An Introduction To The Grammar of Sumeri PDF

----
----
ELTE Faculty of Humanities
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR OF SUMERIAN

This textbook provides an introduction to the grammar of Sumerian, one
of the oldest documented languages in the world. It not only synthesizes AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE GRAMMAR
the results of recent scholarship but introduces original insights on many
important questions. The book is designed to appeal to readers of all back-
grounds, including those with no prior background in Sumerian or cunei-
of
form writing.
It is written for undergraduate students and structured for a semester-long
SUMERIAN
course: the order of the topics is determined by didactic considerations,
with the focus on syntactic analysis and evidence. It explains the function-
ing of Sumerian grammar in 16 lessons, illustrated with more than 500 fully
glossed examples. Each lesson ends with a series of tasks; a solution key to
selected exercises can be found at the end of the volume. Above all, this is
the first Sumerian textbook that introduces and utilizes the online assyrio-
logical resources available on the internet.
An Introduction to the Grammar of Sumerian has been written on the as-
sumption that after decades of grammatical research it has become possible
now to teach a general framework of Sumerian grammar that may function
as the basis of further, more intensive and elaborate studies.
a
a
Gbor Zlyomi
Gbor Zlyomi
ISBN 978 963 284 844 0
etvs UNIVERSITY PRESS

etvs lornd UNIVERSITY
----
----
zolyomi_borito_b.indd 1 2017.01.23. 9:03:31

Zolyomi_Sumer__3!korr. 2017.01.26. 15:07 Page 1
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR

OF SUMERIAN
AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE GRAMMAR
OF SUMERIAN
Gbor Zlyomi
with the collaboration of

Szilvia Jka-Svegjrt
and
Melinda Hagymssy
Budapest, 2017
Supported by the Higher Education Restructuring Fund allocated to ELTE by

the Hungarian Government (Project no. FSA0103-22)
Language editor: Vera Benczik
Gbor Zlyomi, 2017
ISBN 978 963 284 844 0
www.eotvoskiado.hu
Executive publisher: the Dean of the Faculty of Humanities of Etvs Lornd University
Editorial manager: dm Gaborjk
Project manager: Jlia Sndor
Layout: Tibor Anders
Cover: Ildik Csele Kmotrik
Printed by: Komromi Nyomda s Kiad Kft.
CONTENTS
Abbreviations in the morphemic glossings ..................................................................9

A short index of subjects ................................................................................................11
Foreword ..........................................................................................................................13
LESSON 1
INTRODUCTION ....................................................................................................................15
1.1 Sources ....................................................................................................................15
1.2 Some features of the Sumerian writing system..................................................16
1.3 Dialects ....................................................................................................................19
1.4 The Sumerian-Akkadian bilingualism ................................................................20
1.5 From cuneiform script to modern linguistic analysis........................................21
1.6 The linguistic study of Sumerian..........................................................................22
Further readings and resources ................................................................................23
LESSON 2
PHONOLOGY..........................................................................................................................27
2.1 The consonants ......................................................................................................27
2.2 Vowels and vowel harmonies ..............................................................................29
2.3 Syllable structure and stress ................................................................................33
Further readings ..........................................................................................................33
Exercises........................................................................................................................34
LESSON 3
THE NOMINAL TEMPLATE AND THE NON-ADVERBIAL CASES........................................37
3.1 The nominal template............................................................................................37
3.2 The ergative and the absolutive case ..................................................................41
3.3 The genitive case ....................................................................................................42
3.4 The equative case ..................................................................................................44
Exercises........................................................................................................................46
LESSON 4
GENITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS ................................................................................................51
4.1 Modifying genitive constructions ........................................................................51
4.2 Left-dislocated genitive constructions ................................................................53
4.3 Genitive constructions with suspended cliticization ........................................56
Exercises........................................................................................................................58
5
CONTENTS
LESSON 5
PRONOUNS, ADVERBS, AND NUMERALS ..........................................................................61
5.1 Pronouns ................................................................................................................61
5.2 Adverbs of manner and the adverbiative ............................................................68
5.3 Numerals ................................................................................................................70
Exercises........................................................................................................................74
LESSON 6
THE VERBAL TEMPLATE......................................................................................................77
6.1 The general structure of the finite verbal form..................................................77
6.2 The prefixes of S1115 ..........................................................................................78
6.3 The adverbial prefixes ..........................................................................................79
6.4 The prefixes of S15 ..............................................................................................82
6.5 Observations on the functioning of the finite verbal form ..............................83
Exercises........................................................................................................................88
LESSON 7
NON-FINITE VERBAL FORMS AND RELATIVE CLAUSES ..................................................91
7.1 Non-finite verbal forms ........................................................................................91
7.2 The subordinator suffix (Slot 15)..........................................................................94
7.3 Relative clauses ......................................................................................................96
7.4 Non-finite verbal forms expressing a purpose ................................................100
7.5 Non-finite verbal forms as adverbial clauses of time ......................................102
Further readings ........................................................................................................104
Exercises......................................................................................................................104
LESSON 8
NON-VERBAL PREDICATION AND OTHER USES OF THE COPULA..................................107
8.1 Copular clauses ....................................................................................................107
8.2 Non-verbal predicates without a copula ..........................................................112
8.3 Copular biclausal constructions ........................................................................114
8.4 The copula functioning as standard marker ....................................................116
8.5 The copula functioning as focus marker ..........................................................117
Exercises......................................................................................................................119
LESSON 9
VERBAL TENSE....................................................................................................................123
9.1 The formal marking of the tenses ......................................................................123
9.2 The preterite ........................................................................................................126
6
CONTENTS
9.3 The present-future ..............................................................................................127

9.4 The prefix of anteriority......................................................................................131
Exercises......................................................................................................................133
LESSON 10
VERBAL PLURALITY ..........................................................................................................137
10.1 Event number ....................................................................................................137
10.2 Participant number............................................................................................138
Further reading ..........................................................................................................141
Exercises......................................................................................................................142
LESSON 11
THE PREFIXES OF SLOTS 26 ............................................................................................145
11.1 The finite-marker prefixes (Slot 2) ..................................................................145
11.2 The coordinator prefix (Slot 3) ........................................................................149
11.3 The ventive prefix (Slot 4) ................................................................................151
11.4 The middle prefix (Slot 5)..................................................................................156
11.5 The initial pronominal prefixes (Slot 6) ..........................................................162
Exercises......................................................................................................................164
LESSON 12
THE DATIVE AND THE COMITATIVE CASE ......................................................................167
12.1 The dative case (Slot 7) ......................................................................................167
12.2 The comitative case (Slot 8) ..............................................................................172
Exercises......................................................................................................................180
LESSON 13
THE ABLATIVE AND THE TERMINATIVE CASE................................................................183
13.1 The ablative case (slot 9) ..................................................................................183
13.2 The terminative case (slot 9) ............................................................................191
Exercises......................................................................................................................199
LESSON 14
THE LOCATIVE CASES ........................................................................................................201
14.1 The adverbial cases of Slot 10 ..........................................................................201
14.2 The locative1 ......................................................................................................203
14.3 The locative2 ......................................................................................................206
14.4 The locative3 ......................................................................................................215
Exercises......................................................................................................................221
7
CONTENTS
LESSON 15
CONSTRUCTIONS INVOLVING AN EXTRA VERBAL PARTICIPANT ............................223
15.1 The causative construction ..............................................................................223
15.2 The compound verbs..........................................................................................226
15.3 The external possession construction ............................................................228
15.4 The dative promotion ........................................................................................230
Exercises......................................................................................................................233
LESSON 16
NEGATION AND MODALITY ..............................................................................................237
16.1 The negative particle ........................................................................................237
16.2 Modality ..............................................................................................................239
Exercises......................................................................................................................249
INDEX OF QUOTED SUMERIAN TEXTS ............................................................................255
REFERENCES........................................................................................................................263
SOLUTION KEY TO SELECTED EXERCISES ........................................................................271
8
ABBREVIATIONS IN THE MORPHEMIC

GLOSSINGS
~ reduplication MASC = masculine

~PL = reduplication expressing verbal MID = middle prefix
plurality MOD = modal prefix
~PF = reduplication expressing NEG = negative particle
present-future tense NH = non-human
1= first person NOM = nominative
2= second person ORD = suffix that forms ordinal
3= third person numbers
A= agent (subject of a transitive P = patient (object of a transitive
verb) verb)
ABL = ablative case-marker or prefix PF = present-future, or the marker
ABS = absolutive case-marker of the present-future
ACC = accusative PL = plural
ADV = adverbiative PR = pronoun
ANT = prefix of anteriority PN = personal name
COM = comitative case-marker or POSS = possessive enclitic
prefix PT = preterite, or the marker of the
COOR = coordinator prefix preterite
COP = copula RDP = reduplication
CVN = compound verb nominal S = subject (subject of an
element intransitive verb)
DAT = dative case-marker or prefix SG = singular
DEM = demonstrative pronoun SUB = subordinator suffix
DN = divine name STM = standard marker
ERG = ergative case-marker SYN = syncopated form of a verbal
FIN = finite-marker prefix prefix
GEN = genitive case-marker TL = tenseless
GN = geographical name TERM = terminative case-marker
H= human or prefix
L1 = locative1 case-marker or prefix TN = temple name
L2 = locative2 case-marker or prefix VEN= ventive prefix
L3 = locative3 case-marker or prefix
L4 = the archaic locative enclitic
=/ne/
9
A SHORT INDEX OF SUBJECTS
ablative case (S9) 13.1 locative1 case (S10) 14.2

absolutive case 3.2 locative2 case (S10) 14.3
adverbial prefixes 6.3 locative3 case (S10) 14.4
adverbiative 5.2 middle prefix (S5) 11.4
adverbs of manner 5.2 modal prefixes (S12) 16.2
/ba/- (middle prefix) (S5) 11.4 modifying genitive 4.1
/bara/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2 /na/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2
causative constructions 14.4, 15.1 /na(n)/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2
comitative case (S8) 12.2 negative particle (S1) 16.1
composite adverbial prefix 6.3 /nga/- (coordinator prefix) (S3) 11.2
compound verbs 15.2 nominal template 3.1
conjunction 11.2 non-finite verbal forms 7
consonants 2.1 /nu/- (negative particle) (S1) 16.1
coordinator prefix (S3) 11.2 numerals 5.3
copula (as focus marker) 8.5 /nu/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2
copula (as standard marker) 8.4 participant number 10.2
copular biclausal constructions 8.3 plural reduplication (S12) 10.1
copular clauses 8.1 plural verbs (S12) 10.1
dative case (S7) 12.1 present-future 9.3
dative promotion 15.4 preterite 9.2
demonstrative pronouns 5.1 reflexive pronouns 5.1
/ed/ (present-future suffix)(S13) 7.1, 9.3 relative clauses 7.3
equative case 3.4 /i/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2
ergative case 3.2 simple adverbial prefix 6.3
event number 10.1 stress 2.3
external possession 15.3 subordinator suffix (S15) 7.2
final pronominal prefix (S11) 9.1 suspended cliticization 4.3
finite-marker prefix (S2) 11.1 syllable structure 2.3
/ga/- (modal prefix) (S2) 16.2 terminative case (S9) 13.2
genitive case 3.3 /u/- (prefix of anteriority) (S1) 9.4
genitive constructions 4 ventive prefix (S4) 11.3
/a/- (modal prefix) (S1) 16.2 verbal template 6
independent pronouns 5.1 verbal tense 9
initial pronominal prefix (S6) 11.5 vowel harmony 2.2
interrogative pronouns 5.1 vowels 2.2
left-dislocated genitive 4.2 writing system 1.4
11
With gratitude, I dedicate this book to Gza Komorczy,

who enticed and inducted me into Assyriology.
FOREWORD
This textbook is the edited version of the teaching material used during my
Sumerian classes. Its first version was prepared by Szilvia Jka-Svegjrt in
2012, while I was on sabbatical leave, and she kindly took over my classes. I am
most grateful to Szilvia for her incentive, and for her help in preparing this
version, especially the first lesson of the book. I also thank to Melinda
Hagymssy, who helped me in writing several of the exercises and provided
important feedback on earlier versions of this work. I am grateful to my
students (Fruzsina Nmeth, Balzs Kiss, and Gerg Vajda), who visited my
Sumerian grammar classes in the academic year of 2015/2016 and 2016/2017,
for their help in improving this book.
This book is not intended to be acomprehensive grammar of Sumerian. For
that purpose, one should study Bram Jagersmas magnificent work (2010). My
experience as ateacher has been that for students of Sumerian, it is intimi-
dating and frustrating to have to face so much uncertainties and vagueness
when starting to learn Sumerian. One simply cannot see the forest for the trees
because of that. I remember my first year as astudent, when I had to read the
Cylinders of Gudea together with advanced students; it took me months to
figure out the basics. I had to rely on perplexing reference books without any
didactic intention.
The present book attempts to present the forest first. Problems and
uncertainties are left out or are mentioned only in the Further readings sections,
descriptions are shortened on purpose; it pretends that Sumerian is alanguage
whose basic grammatical rules may be learnt during the fourteen or so weeks
of a semester. It has been made on the assumption that after decades of
grammatical research it has become possible now to teach ageneral framework
of Sumerian grammar that may function as the basis of further, more intensive
and elaborate studies.
13
LESSON 1
INTRODUCTION
Sumerian was spoken in the southern part of ancient Mesopotamia, an area

which roughly corresponds to todays Iraq. The name of the language derives
from its Akkadian name: umeru. The Sumerian term was eme-gir which may
mean native tongue. Sumerian is alanguage isolate with no known ancient
or modern relatives. It is an extinct language, and can be studied solely from
written sources, which were recorded using the cuneiform script, a mixed
logographic-phonographic writing system.
Sumerian is a mainly agglutinative language, characterised by split
ergativity.1 It has asystem of grammatical gender based on the distinction
between human and non-human referents. It is averb final language, and the
order of words preceding the verb is determined by the information structure
of the sentence.
1.1 Sources
The first written documents, created most probably by Sumerian speaking

people, are dated to the end of the 4th millennium BCE. These texts were
recorded using alogographic writing, which could be read in any language, and
thus are unsuitable for grammatical analysis. Therefore, the written sources
for the grammatical description of the Sumerian language come mainly from
the 3rd and 2nd millennia BCE, but the language remained in use for religious
and scholarly purposes as late as the 1st millennium BCE. The corpus of
Sumerian texts from the 1st millennium, however, was not produced by native
speakers of the language and thus does not form a solid basis for the
grammatical description of Sumerian.
1 On split ergativity in Sumerian see Lesson 9, section 9.1 below.
15
LESSON 1
The status of the 2nd millennium BCE texts is also ambiguous, as the most
important corpus from this period is that of the literary compositions used as
educational tools or in cultic praxis during the Old Babylonian period (ca. 2014-
1595 BCE). The scribes are certainly no native speakers of Sumerian, and this
results in grammatical irregularities, at least compared to the 3rd millennium
corpus (see also section 1.4 below). However, many morphological features of
the language can first be noted during this period because of the excessive study
of the language and reproduction of its written sources.
Descriptive grammars of the Sumerian language, for this reason, are based
mainly on the corpus from the second half of the 3rd millennium. The preceding
periods include the archaic texts from Ur (ca. 2800 BCE) and the Fara period
(ca. 2600 BCE). Both corpora include several genres, administrative, legal, lexical
and even literary texts. Their orthography is, however, defective and thus no
appropriate object of grammatical research. The relevant corpora of Sumerian
texts, which the present grammar is manly based on, are as follows:
Old Sumerian period (ca. 2470-2340 BCE)
Old Akkadian period (ca. 2340-2200 BCE)
Neo-Sumerian period
Lagash II period (ca. 2200-2113 BCE)
Ur III period (ca. 2112-2004 BCE)
The corpus of texts written in Sumerian is substantial both in its size and in its
variety. The number of Sumerian texts must be over one hundred thousand,
which include an immense quantity of economic and administrative documents,
alarge corpus of literary texts, lexical texts (word- and sign lists), royal and
monumental inscriptions, letters, legal texts, mathematical texts, and even
grammatical texts. Unfortunately, only avery small portion of this relatively
vast corpus may be used for linguistic description, because about 90% of the
written sources consist of administrative records.
1.2 Some features of the Sumerian

writing system
The Sumerian script used in the second part of the 3rd millennium BCE is
a mixed logographic-phonographic system. It includes two types of signs:
logograms, i.e., word signs representing aword on the level of meaning; and
16
Introduction
phonograms representing asequence of sounds.2 Many signs may be used either

as alogogram or aphonogram depending on the context.
If a logogram has more than one possible pronunciations, it may be
accompanied by auxiliary signs. There are two types of such auxiliary signs. If
the auxiliary sign functions as alogogram, it is called determinative, identifying
the semantic class of the preceding or following sign. If it functions as
aphonogram it is called phonetic complement, specifying the phonemic value
of the preceding or following sign, repeating the word wholly or partially.
The development of the writing system just described was along process.
In the 4th millennium BCE the Sumerian writing system was purely logographic,
the signs being depictions of the represented object or abstract symbols,
primarily stemming from administrative conventions. The use of the existing
logograms could be extended in two ways:
i) semantic association: alogogram could get another pronunciation with
ametaphorically or metonymically related meaning; or
ii) phonemic association: a logogram could get a different meaning, when
anewly associated word was pronounced similarly to the original one.
These innovations prevented the Sumerian writing system from introducing
anew sign for every single word. Logograms could also be combined to gain
new word signs. In some of these composite signs only the meaning of the
constituent logograms counts, however, in some cases the reading of the signs
was used as aphonemic indicator disambiguating the reading of the new, yet
logographic construct. With the help of these techniques the number of signs
remained limited to around 600.
The phonograms developed from logograms. The technique had already been
discovered earlier: the reading of alogogram may be used to specify the reading
of acomposite sign. As the demand to put abstract grammatical morphemes into
writing arose, some logograms with the appropriate phonemic values were
chosen to denote such abstract morphemes. Though these signs were the first
phonograms, they might be better described with the term grammograms as
signs with similar phonemic values were not applied freely, but rather, such
functions were assigned to alimited set of signs. According to Jagersma, the
choice of signs not only took their phonemic values of signs into consideration,
but also additional features such as vowel length (Jagersma 2010: 24).
2 This term is used by Jagersma (2010: 15) instead of the well-established term syllabogram.
He points out that this term is more appropriate, since the rendering of phoneme sequences is
intended and not that of syllables.
17
LESSON 1
The Sumerian writing system retained ahighly logographic character even

in the 2nd millennium BCE, making it difficult for us to detect any phonemic or
morphological changes within aword stem. Another difficulty from the point
of view linguistic description is the phenomenon that grammograms, i.e.,
graphemes used to write grammatical morphemes, tend not to reflect changes
in the form of the morphemes. The negative particle /nu/, for example, may
change to /la/, when followed by the syllable /ba/. Yet it is apparently up to
the scribe to decide whether to write the word in question using the phonogram
pronounced as /la/, or with the grammogram used commonly to denote the
negative particle, the sign nu-, irrespective of its actual pronunciation, see
Lesson 16, section 16.1 below.
The same happens to the terminative case-marker =/e/, which may be
written with the sign E (with the readings -e or -e) even when one is sure
that after an open syllable ending with /a/, it was probably reduced to only //,
and one would consequently expect it to be written with the phonographic sign
-a.
The Sumerian writing system in the 3rd millennium BCE is an imperfect
tool for the phonemic rendering of texts for yet another reason: syllable-final
consonants were often ignored in the spelling of grammatical morphemes. The
writing system simply lacked the appropriate signs to record closed syllables.
The need to circumvent this inadequacy gave rise to two techniques. In Ebla,
an important urban centre in the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE in Syria,
a closed C1VC2 syllable was spelled with an additional CV-sign, with the second
sign repeating the vowel of the first one: C1V-C2V to be read as C1VC2. In
Mesopotamia, aset of VC-signs came into use at the end of the 3rd millennium
BCE, mainly relying on CVC-signs originally starting with the phoneme //,
which was lost in almost all environments by the end of the millennium. Here
aclosed syllable was spelled as C1V-VC2, to be read as C1VC2. The use of this
technique, however, remained optional, although it became increasingly
regular in Sumerian texts until the beginning of the 2nd millennium BCE.
Also at the end of the 3rd millennium BCE anew method emerged for the
representation of vowel length: plene-writings, i.e., the adding of an additional
V-sign, to indicate along vowel or vocal contraction. Although plene-writings
occur in some contexts frequently and consistently, the method never became
anorm to indicate along vowel in writing.
18
Introduction
1.3 Dialects
As every language, spoken Sumerian too must have had several different local
and temporal varieties. We, however, know, the language only from written
sources, and consequently most of these variations went lost forever. We have
access only to awritten, formal version of Sumerian whose traits and history
may be very different from the traits and history of the vernacular. Yet, it is
also possible that the traits of the local dialects are reflected in local scribal
traditions in the Old Sumerian and Old Akkadian periods. During the second
half of the 3rd millennium BCE two main traditions can be distinguished, the
Northern (Nippur, Adab, Isin) and the Southern Sumerian (Lagash, Umma, Ur,
Uruk) dialects.
In the Old Sumerian period, only ahandful of differences among the two
dialects can be detected: the vowel harmony of the verbal prefixes in the
southern cities (see Lesson 2 section 2.2. below), the use of the finite-marker
prefix /a(l)/ in apassive sense in the north Babylonian cities (see Lesson 11,
section 11.1. below), and the use of the comitative case in the function of the
terminative in the 25th century, for example. During the Old Akkadian period,
most of these distinctive features disappear, only the distinctive passive
markers are retained. Additionally, anew dialectal difference emerges, namely
the voiceless aspirated affricate /tsh/ the /dr/ phoneme in the earlier
literature becomes /r/ in Southern but /d/ in Northern Sumerian (see Lesson
2, section 2.1 below)
By the end of the 3rd millennium BCE, with the rise of the Ur III dynasty,
the local traditions are not reflected in the written language any more. The
Sumerian language was standardised in aform related to Southern Sumerian
and this written variety also spread in the northern area of Sumer (cf. Drehem
sources). The only place where texts with the features of the Northern dialect
or with mixed features come from was Nippur. The proof that the
standardisation of Sumerian only occurred on the level of the written language
is provided by the Old Babylonian Sumerian which preserved many features of
Northern Sumerian. As the centre of power moved to the north, this is also
reflected in the formal, written language.
A unique variety of Sumerian which should also be mentioned here is
asociolect known under the Sumerian term emesal (meaning probably fine
tongue). The emesal dialect is characterised by phonological alteration and
by limited lexical substitution, that is, the morphological and syntactical rules
of Sumerian remain intact, the difference only appears on the level of the
19
LESSON 1
phonology and the lexicon. The elements of the emesal dialect are usually
mixed with standard Sumerian. It is not possible to know at what date or in
which region emesal first emerged, but it is supposed to be aform of spoken
Sumerian, specifically awomens dialect. By the early 2nd millennium, the
period in which it is first recorded in writing, the emesal dialect had already
become restricted to certain religious and poetic genres and contexts, also
including the literary representation of womens speech.
1.4 The SumerianAkkadian bilingualism
Sumerian was only one of the main languages used by amultilingual society.
The other major language was East-Semitic, and from about the 24th century
onwards one of the dialects of East Semitic, Akkadian. Contact between the two
languages is thought to have begun at least as early as the beginning of writing
at the turn of the 4th to the 3rd millennium BCE. The presumably widespread
bilingualism resulted in similarities between the two languages on the level of
lexicon, phonology, morphology and syntax. Many of the shared features are
already present in the languages when they become accessible to us in the
middle of the 3rd millennium BCE. We cannot therefore know if the assumed
shared traits are the result of the long-term language contact of alinguistic
area or the result of unilateral diffusions with changing directions.
Whatever the relationship between the two languages in earlier times was,
it is reasonable to assume that from about the 24th century onwards Akkadian
became the dominant language with aresulting asymmetrical bilingualism in
which knowledge of Akkadian may have proved practical in more and more
contexts. The reduction of Proto-Semitic gutturals in Akkadian at around this
time may point to arelatively large Sumerian speaking population changing to
Akkadian, and in the subsequent centuries only interferences from Akkadian
on Sumerian are attested and never the other way around. The dominance of
Akkadian eventually led to the replacement of Sumerian by Akkadian as the
vernacular. It can be assumed that by the end of the Old Babylonian period
Sumerian was no longer acquired as afirst language, and that already during
the Old Babylonian period most of the users of written Sumerian were native
speakers of Akkadian or other languages. The appearance of the long,
sophisticatedly organised AkkadianSumerian verbal paradigms, the so called
Old Babylonian Grammatical Texts (Black 1991), which analyse Sumerian in
terms of Akkadian categories, also imply the second language status of Sumerian.
20
Introduction
At the beginning of the 2nd millennium several genres, such as letters, legal
records, administrative documents disappear gradually. Sumerian becomes
restricted to more formal registers, like royal inscriptions (usually bilingual in
Sumerian and Akkadian), and literary texts. After the Old Babylonian period
Sumerian remained to be taught and learnt only for the purposes of the cultic,
literary and scholarly tradition.
Starting from around the end of the 3rd millennium, Sumerian undergoes
an Akkadization which must relate to the change in its sociolinguistic status.
Its sound system becomes more like that of Akkadian: e.g., the unaspirated
voiceless consonants become voiced in most environments. Grammatical
distinctions of Sumerian are no longer maintained consistently or are replaced
because of a mismatch between Sumerian and Akkadian distinctions: e.g.,
human and non-human pronominal forms are often used erroneously; the use
of the locative1, locative2, and locative3 cases becomes promiscuous. Several
structural interferences from Akkadian can be observed (see Zlyomi 2005b and
2014): e.g., the correspondence between case-markers and verbal prefixes
disappear, and the nominal case-markers are influenced by the corresponding
Akkadian idioms; Sumerian develops morphological causativity.
1.5 From cuneiform script to modern

linguistic analysis
The mixed logographic-phonographic writing system reflects the morpho-

phonological structure of Sumerian to varying extent in different periods. The
morpho-phonological structure of Sumerian words must therefore be
reconstructed by setting up correspondences between the sequence of
graphemes and the sequence of morphemes. This interpretation is necessarily
subjective to some extent, and reflects the grammatical model of the
interpreter. The object of linguistic description, however, must be the
reconstructed sequence of morphemes, and not that of graphemes.
It must be clear that one cannot even hope to recover the full complexity
of the language. Its phonology, morphology, syntax, and usage can be
reconstructed only incompletely and to varying extents from the linguistic
evidence at our disposal. This introductory grammar attempts to describe what
seem to be the most important characteristics of the language.
In order to overcome the difficulties caused by the writing system, all
Sumerian examples used in this grammar will be presented in four lines: the
21
LESSON 1
first line represents the utterance in standard graphemic transliteration; the

second, asegmentation into morphemes (reconstructed by interpreting the
sequence of graphemes); the third, amorpheme-by-morpheme glossing; and
the fourth, atranslation.3 In the graphemic transliteration subscript numerals
distinguish homophonic graphemes, and superscript graphemes are semantic
classifiers; graphemes that constitute aword are linked by hyphens; in the
morphemic segmentation and in the glosses the sign = links enclitics to their
hosts. Three special characters are used in transliterating Sumerian:
(pronounced as the last consonant in sing), (pronounced as the last consonant
in loch), and (as the first consonant in ship).
1.6 The linguistic study of Sumerian
When the cuneiform script was deciphered in the early 19th century, three
languages written in cuneiform were discovered: Akkadian, Persian and
Elamite. Only after understanding the Akkadian texts better did scholars
become aware of the existence of texts written in another different language.
The royal library in Nineveh provided many bilingual sources, mainly lexical
lists and literary texts with Akkadian translations which contributed to the
decipherment of the Sumerian script and language.
The first systematic attempt at the linguistic description of Sumerian was
realised by Arno Poebel in his Grundzuge der sumerischen Grammatik in 1923. His
research was based on the written evidence available at the time. Adam
Falkensteins two volume Grammatik der Sprache Gudeas von Lagash, published in
1949 and 1950, attempted to elaborate the grammar of ahomogenous group of
texts from the Lagash II period. In the following decades, the written evidence
of Sumerian increased and so did the need of aSumerian grammar considering
the recently published material. In 1984 Marie-Louise Thomsen published The
Sumerian Language, atextbook still in use nowadays. The third edition published
in 2001 has only an appendix with the literature published after 1984, but the
main text is the same.
A further important publication is Pascal Attingers Elments de linguistique
sumrienne from 1993, acomprehensive study of the grammatical and semantic
properties of asingle verb, which however contains along section describing the
3 The morphemic glossing follows the conventions of The Leipzig Glossing rules
(http://www.eva.mpg.de/lingua/resources/glossing-rules.php).
22
Introduction
grammar of Sumerian (141314). Joachim Krechers teaching material, Zur

Sumerischen Grammatik (1998), became available online in 2015. Shorter grammars
are Dietz Otto Edzards Sumerian Grammar (2003) and Daniel A. Foxvogs online
available Introduction to Sumerian Grammar (2016). Abraham H. Jagersmas
monumental PhD dissertation, A Descriptive Grammar of Sumerian (2010) is adetailed
reference grammar of the language building on the scholarly debates of the past
decades and summarising the present knowledge on the Sumerian language.
Shorter grammatical sketches of the language are Michalowski 2004, Rubio
2007, and Zlyomi 2007.
Unfortunately, no modern Sumerian dictionary is available, making the
learning of Sumerian even more challenging. The Pennsylvania Sumerian
Dictionary (= PSD) project published only the letter Aand B (Sjberg et al. 1984
1998). The online version of the PSD covers all letters but is basically only
a glossary (= ePSD, http://psd.museum.upenn.edu/epsd1). Daniel Foxvogs
Elementary Sumerian Glossary (2016b) is an extremely valuable reference work,
and the glossary and sign list in Volks chrestomathy (Volk 2012) is also useful
for beginners.
One may also consult the Leipzig-Mnchner Sumerischer Zettelkasten
(http://www.assyriologie.uni-muenchen.de/forschung/forschungsprojekte/
sumglossar/zettelkasten2006_09.pdf, last updated in 2006), The Index to the
Sumerian Secondary Literature (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/issl), and
Pascal Attingers Lexique sumrien-franais (http://www.iaw.unibe.ch/
unibe/portal/fak_historisch/dga/iaw/content/e39448/e99428/e122665/e122821/
pane123080/e1 99038/Lexiquesumrien-franais.pdf), for information on the
meaning of Sumerian words.
The most important sign lists are Borger 2003 and Mittermayer 2006.
Further readings and resources
A longer and more technical introduction to the study of Sumerian is Black and
Zlyomi 2007 (an even longer version of this paper is available online at various
places:
http://etcsl.orinst.ox.ac.uk/edition2/pdf/diachronsum.pdf or
http://www.hebraisztika.hu/attachments/00000129.pdf). On Sumerians the
most up-to-date summary is Cooper 2013 (available online at
http://krieger2.jhu.edu/neareast/pdf/jcooper/Sumer_Sumerisch_RLA_13_2012.pdf,
which is in English in spite of its German title).
23
LESSON 1
An essential paper on the context of the eme-sal sociolect of Sumerian is

Cooper 2006.
Important contributions to the writing system used for recording Sumerian
is Attinger 1993: 12913, Cooper 2005, Jagersma 2010: 1529, and Meyer-Laurin
2011. On various changes in the orthography at the end of the 3rd millennium
BCE see Civil 2013.
On the history of Sumerian-Akkadian bilingualism the best paper to consult
is Woods 2006. An important contribution is Sallaberger 2004, who discusses
the death of Sumerian based on the distribution of Sumerian and Akkadian
personal names. Sallaberger 2011 is acase-study based on the Ur III archive of
Garshana, with many important observations on Sumerian-Akkadian bilingual-
ism. Crisostomo 2015 is an investigation into the sociolinguistic parameters of
Sumerian-Akkadian bilingualism as reflected in writing practices.
Black 1991 remained to be the most important work to start with for the so
called grammatical texts.
In addition to the printed and often not easily accessible publications of
Sumerian texts, there exist now agrowing number of online corpora produced
by scholars of cuneiform. The best place to start with is the homepage of the
Cuneiform Digital Library Initiative project (= CDLI, http://cdli.ucla.edu/),
which endeavours to register all cuneiform texts. It contains now almost
500.000 records, publishing copies and/or photos of inscribed objects and their
transliterations. The other important project is The Open Richly Annotated
Cuneiform Corpus (ORACC, http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/). It comprises
aworkspace and toolkit for the development of acomplete corpus of cuneiform
whose rich annotation and open licensing are designed to support the next
generation of scholarly research and online dissemination of data and ndings
(Robson 2014: 143).
The Electronic Text Corpus of Sumerian Literary Texts project (= ETCSL,
http://etcsl.orinst.ox.ac.uk/) contains more than 400 Sumerian literary texts
from the Old Babylonian period in transliteration, English prose translations
and bibliographical information for each composition.
The Database of Neo-Sumerian Texts (= BDTNS, http://bdts.filol.csic.es) is
arelational database of around 100.000 administrative cuneiform tablets from
the end of the 3rd millennium BCE.
The Electronic Text Corpus of Sumerian Royal Inscriptions (= ETCSRI,
http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/) is one of the ORACC sites; it is an
annotated, grammatically and morphologically analysed, transliterated,
trilingual (Sumerian-English-Hungarian), parallel corpus of all Sumerian royal
inscriptions.
24
Introduction
The Official Inscriptions of the Middle East in Antiquity (= OIMEA,

http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/oimea/) is an ORACC based umbrella project
that aims to facilitate quick and easy access to awide range of open-access
editions of ancient Middle Eastern texts, including cuneiform texts in Sumerian.
A survey and assessment of all assyriological internet sites is provided by
Charpin 2014.
For more details on the history of the linguistic study of the Sumerian
language see now Marsal 2014 and 2015.
25
LESSON 2
PHONOLOGY
Sumerian is an extinct language without any known relatives. The reconstruc-

tion of its sound system must therefore rely entirely on written sources which
were recorded using amixed logographic-phonographic writing system. The
interpretation and transliteration of this writing system is eventually based on
our understanding of Akkadian phonology. Additional evidence is provided, for
example, by the behaviour of loanwords, by glosses in syllabaries and vocabu-
laries, by spelling variants of the same word, by the ancient names of cuneiform
signs, and by Greek spellings of Sumerian and Akkadian words from the
Hellenistic period. Needless to say, the reconstruction of the Sumerian sound
system will always involve acertain degree of conjecture.
2.1 The consonants
The transliteration system used for Sumerian is based on its sound system in
the 2nd millennium BCE, which differs significantly from the sound system of
the 3rd millennium, and whose reconstruction itself is based on aby now partly
overhauled understanding of Akkadian phonology. In Table 2.1 below each
consonant is represented in square brackets by their reconstructed
pronunciation in the 3rd millennium (using the symbols of the International
Phonetic Alphabet), followed in curly brackets by the letter with which they
are normally transliterated, called graphonemes.
Graphonemes are phonemic units distinguished by the writing system.
Their values ultimately reflect their use in an Akkadian context and depend on
our understanding of Akkadian phonetics.
One may ask if it were not better to use different systems for transliterating
Sumerian texts from different periods. One could argue, for example, that the
verbal form mu-na-du should be be transliterated as mu-na-tshu if it occurs
in ainscription of Ur-Nanshe from the 25th c. BCE. There are several arguments
against such aproposal. First, this would entail that any time anew proposal
27
LESSON 2
about the pronunciation of Sumerian is made and accepted, the transliteration

system would be changed. Second, we simply cannot know when exactly the
assumed changes happened. Third, this would be against the spirit of the
writing system used for Sumerian, which even in the later periods made great
use of word signs that encoded the language on the level of the meaning and
not on the level of its pronunciation. One therefore must accept that the
transliteration system we use may not reflect the actual pronunciation of
aword, and is based on readings of the cuneiform signs in the first part of the
2nd millennium BCE. In away, the graphonemes may be considered to function
like variables in mathematics, their value depending on the period and place
where atext comes from.
Consonants which went lost during the 3rd millennium BCE, and are
therefore usually ignored in the transliteration, are marked with {};
vl. = voiceless, asp. = aspirated in Table 2.1. In the descriptions below phonemes
are enclosed by forward slashes.
Table 2.1: The Sumerian consonants in the 3rd millennium BCE
STOPS AFFRICATES FRICATIVES APPROXIMANTS NASALS

vl. vl. asp. vl. vl. asp
BILABIAL [p] {b} [ph] {p} [m] {m}
DENTAL OR h [tsh] {d}, {r},
[t] {d} [t ] {t} [ts] {z} [s] {s} [] {r} [n] {n}
ALVEOLAR or {}
LATERAL [l] {l}
PALATAL [] {} [j] {}
VELAR [k] {g} [kh] {k} [x] {} []{}
GLOTTAL [] {} [h] {}
Stops (except for the glottal stop) and affricates had two series in the 3rd
millennium BCE. Both were pronounced voiceless, their distinctive feature
being aspiration. Around the 2000 BCE, the plain voiceless stops underwent
sound change: they became voiced in most environments. The aspirated
voiceless stops retained their old pronunciation. At the same time the plain
voiceless affricate ([ts]) underwent the same change as the plain voiceless stops:
it became a voiced affricate ([dz]) in most environments. The voiceless
aspirated affricate ([tsh]) disappeared from the language by the end of the 3rd
millennium: it merged with [] or [t] before avowel, while it was lost word-
finally and before aconsonant.
A phoneme /h/ can be reconstructed only in acouple of words, like */haj/
house (later e = /e/) or /hit/ river (later id = /id/). Both this phoneme
and the glottal stop // were lost during the second half of the 3rd millennium
28
Phonology
BCE. The phoneme /j/ gradually disappeared by around 2000 BCE, syllable final
/aj/ became // (e.g., */aj/ water > //).
Note that the consonant transliterated with the graphoneme {r} was atap
[], aconsonant produced with avery short closure, and not atrill. The voiceless
aspirated affricate ([tsh]) appears in the earlier literature as the /dr/-phoneme.
2.2 Vowels and vowel harmonies
The writing system indicates the existence of four vowels. Vowel length was
probably phonemic but as the writing system did not indicate vowel length
systematically, this assumption is partly based on circumstantial evidence like,
e.g., Sumerian loanwords into Akkadian.
Table 2.2: The vowels
FRONT BACK
HIGH {i} {u}
LOW {e} {a}
The assimilation of certain verbal prefixes containing the graphoneme {i} or

{e} in respect of vowel height to the vowel of the following syllable, the so-called
Old Sumerian vowel harmony was an isogloss dividing cities in southern
Babylonia (Lagash, Umma, Ur and Uruk, which exhibit the assimilation) from
cities further north in Babylonia (Nippur, Adab, Shuruppag and Isin) in the
25th23rd centuries BCE. In subsequent centuries, the assimilation disappeared.
The following prefixes take part in this vowel assimilation:
The finite marker /i/ (see Lesson 11, section 11.1 below). The graphoneme
{e} is written with the sign E as in exx. (1), (3), and (9) below; the graphoneme
{i} is written with the sign NI (= i) as in exx. (2), (4), (10) below.
(1) En-metena 1 3:4 (RIME 1.9.5.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001103)4
e-ma-ta-bala
S2i-S4m-S5ba-S9ta-S10e-S11bala-S14
FIN-VEN-MID-ABL-L2-cross-3.SG.S
4 Q-numbers and P-numbers refer to the catalogue-numbers of the Cuneiform Digital Library
Initiative Project (http://www.cdli.ucla.edu). Q-numbers refer to compositions, P-numbers to
manuscripts. In the morphemic segmentation of the finite verbal forms subscript S + number
refers to the verbal slots discussed in detail in Lesson 6 below.
29
LESSON 2
(2) DP 218 rev. 4:2 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220868)5

i-tud-da-a
S2i-S11n-S12tud-S14-S15a-a
FIN-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P-SUB-L1
The ventive prefix followed by a3rd ps. sg. non-human composite locative2
or locative3 prefix (see Lesson 14, section 14.3 and 14.4). The graphoneme {e}
is written with the sign ME as in ex. (3) below; the graphoneme {i} is written
with the sign MI as in ex. (4) below.
(3) En-metena 1 2:5 (RIME 1.9.5.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001103)
e-me-sar-sar
S1i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12sar~sar-S14
FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-write~PL-3.SG.P
(4) En-metena 23 30 (RIME 1.9.5.23) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222530)

i-mi-dug-dug
S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dug~dug-S14
FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-do~PL-3.SG.P
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human composite locative2 or locative3 prefix (see
Lesson 14, section 14.3 and 14.4 below). The graphoneme {e} is written with the
sign BI (= be) as in ex. (5) below; the graphoneme {i} is written with the sign
NE (= bi) as in ex. (6) below.
(5) Iri-kagina 1 4:8 (RIME 1.9.9.1) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222607)
be-ar-re-e
S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ar-S14e
3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.PL

bi-gi
S5b-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-return-3.SG.P
The terminative prefix (see Lesson 13, section 13.2 below). The graphoneme
{e} is written with the sign E as in ex. (7) below; the graphoneme {i} is written
with the sign I as in ex. (8) below.
5 Abbreviations follow the conventions of the Cuneiform Digital Library Initiative

(http://cdli.ox.ac.uk/wiki/abbreviations_for_assyriology).
30
Phonology
(7) En-ana-tum I 5 4:8 (RIME 1.9.4.5) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001090)

e-na-e-al
S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S9i-S11n-S12al-S14
MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-TERM-3.SG.H.A-exist-3.SG.P

e-na-i-gub
S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S9i-S12gub-S14
MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-TERM-stand-3.SG.S
The locative1, and 3rd ps. sg. human composite locative2 or locative3 prefix
(see Lesson 14, section 14.2, 14.3 and 14.4 below). The graphoneme {e} is written
with the sign NI (= ne) as in ex. (9) below; the graphoneme {i} is written also
with the sign NI (=ni) as in ex. (10) below.6
e-ne-pad-da-a
S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12pad-S14-S15a-a
FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-find-3.SG.P-SUB-L1
(10) DP 103 rev. 2:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220753)

i-ni-gi
S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-return-3.SG.P
The signs used to write the graphoneme {i} remained in use after the vowel
harmony disappeared.
Based on the writing system used to record Sumerian in the first part of the
2nd millennium BCE, Sumerian appears to have only four vowels; i.e., the
writing system distinguishes four vowels, see Table 2.2 above. There exist,
however, data which suggest that the writing system used in the 2nd
millennium BCE may not have reflected the number of vowels in the middle of
the 3rd millennium BCE adequately.
Table 2.3 below shows the correspondences between the vowel of the verbal
prefixes and the vowel of the stems as reflected in our transliteration system
in texts form around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE from places which
exhibit vowel harmony. It is based on data collected by Keetman (2014: 144
149). The table shows, for example, that all the verbal stems transliterated with
6 Note that both the high and the low forms were written with the same grapheme, but it is
assumed in this textbook that the high and the low forms were pronounced differently.
31
LESSON 2
the graphoneme {a}, e.g., ar to place, or ak to act, occur with alow

version of the verbal prefix, which undergoes vowel assimilation.
Table 2.3: Correspondences of verbal prefixes and verbal bases
PREFIX / STEM {i} {u} {e} {a}

{i} 8 31 6 0
{e} 0 9 4 27
The problem occurs with the stems transliterated with {u} or {e} graphonemes.
Some of them occur with the low, some with high prefixes. The data in
Table 2.3 suggests that the vowels written as {u} and {e} might have had ahigh
and low variant in Sumerian, making the number of vowels 6, asuggestion
already put forward by Poebel (1931: 6). Keetman (2005) goes further and he
does not consider it impossible that the Sumerian vowel system consists of 7
or 9 vowels.
Table 2.4 below shows apossible interpretation of Poebels suggestion, using
the symbols of the International Phonetic Alphabet. It shows that, for example,
the graphoneme {u} may correspond in fact both to alow back vowel [] and
ahigh back vowel [u].
Table 2.4: The assumed two classes of vowels in respect of height
PREFIX VERBAL STEM

{a} = [a]
LOW {e} = [] or [] {e} or {a} = [] or []
{u} = []
{e} = [e]
HIGH {i} = [i] {i} = [i]
{u}= [u]
Vowel harmony the agreement among vowels in successive syllables in

respect to one or more features is also attested among the vowels of aword
stem in Sumerian. In particular, the vowels of the syllables often appear to be
the same in polysyllabic Sumerian words, i.e., they are transliterated with the
same graphoneme, e.g., zalag to be bright, saar dust, iri foot, gibil
to be new, tukul weapon, sukud height.
The phenomenon is also attested with loan words, with the advantage that
the original form of the word is also known, e.g., gada < Akk. kitm linen,
32
Phonology
libir < Akk. lab(ir)um to be old, niir < Akk. ngirum herald, silim < Akk.
al(i)mum to be healthy.
There also exist words which are attested both in forms with two similar
and with two different vowels: a-gu vs. ugu skull, a-ne vs. e-ne he, a-lu
vs. hu-lu to be afraid, u-ub vs. i-ub brick-mold.
The last two groups of the words involved suggest that it is the vowel of the
first syllable that assimilates to the vowel of the second one, which may well
be due to the stress on the last syllable of the words, see the next subsection.
2.3 Syllable structure and stress
Sumerian syllables may have the structure CV, (VC), or CVC. It is likely that
before the glottal stop // was lost, all words began with a consonant and
consequently VC type syllables did not exist. Word initial consonant clusters
were not tolerated.
Sumerian had astress-accent, and Sumerian words were probably stressed
on the last syllable.
Further readings
The best systematic treatment of Sumerian phonology is without doubt

Jagersmas chapter on phonology in his grammar (2010: 3167). He not only
discusses the phonemes in detail but also the methodology with which the
sound system of an extinct and unrelated language recorded with amixed
logographic-phonographic writing system may be recovered.
There are several papers on the vowel harmony of the verbal prefixes.
Poebel 1931 and Kramer 1936 are still worth reading. Krispijn 2000 discusses
the phenomenon in its historical context. The three latest contributions,
Keetman 2005, 2014 and Smith 2007, are important but are not for the light-
hearted. The vowel harmony within the word stems is discussed in detail in
Keetman 2014.
The classical study on the phoneme // is Krecher 1978. Keetman 2004 is
an important contribution on the distinctive features of stops and affricates in
Sumerian. The Greek spellings of Sumerian and Akkadian words from the
Hellenistic period are discussed in Maul 1991. On the various proposals
33
LESSON 2
concerning alleged extra phonemes, phonemes concealed by the writing

system, see Black 1990.
Exercises
2.1 Consider the data below on the correspondences between stops in Sumerian and
Akkadian in loanwords in the 3rd mill. BCE. Then fill out Table 3.5, mark the feature
that applies to the group of graphonemes in the left with a+. Try to explain based
on the features why Akkadian borrowed the Sumerian words the way it did.
Table 2.5
Sumerian voice aspiration emphatic

{b}, {d}, {g}
{p}, {t}, {k}
Akkadian voice aspiration emphatic

{b}, {d}, {g}
{p}, {t}, {k}
{}, {q}
Sumerian {b}, {d}, {g} correspond to voiceless graphonemes in Akkadian

e-gal ekallum palace
kiri-dab kartappum groom
nu-banda laputtm overseer
barag parakkum dais
gada kitm linen
dug-gan tukkannum bag
u-dug utukkum demon
gu-za kussm throne
Sumerian {p}, {t}, {k} correspond to voiceless graphonemes in Akkadian
pisa piannum basket
temen temennum foundation
ensi iiakkum ruler
kiri-dab kartappum groom
kar krum quay
sukkal ukkalum messenger
e-kin kikanm (a tree)
34
Phonology
Akkadian {p}, {t}, {k} correspond to voiced graphonemes in Sumerian

purumum bur-u-ma old person
aplum i-bi-la heir
pirum abra administrator
imtum si-im-da mark
mtum ma-da country
tamkrum dam-gar merchand
milkum ma-al-ga counsel
maknum ma-gana settlement
kinum agina general
rkibum ra-gaba rider
Akkadian {b}, {d}, {g} and {}, {q} correspond to voiced graphonemes in Sumerian
labirum libir old
mum dim-ma decision
maarum ma-dara inscription
nqidum na-gada shepherd
2.2 Consider the data below. Try to explain the form of the Sumerian loanwords in
Akkadian based on what you have learnt about stress in Sumerian in this lesson;
for the rules of stress in Akkadian, see Huehnergard 1997: 34 (1.3).
a) Sumerian words with afinal consonant, preceded by ashort vowel:
al allu hoe gag kakku nail
gal kallu bowl ub uppu drum
du tuu waste dub uppu tablet
us uu foundation kid kittu reed-mat
ma-gur makurru ship barag parakku dais
ku-dim kutimmu silversmith dub-en tupinnu treasury box
bisa piannu basket um-sikil amakillu onion
mualdim muatimmu cook apin epinnu plough
mar marru shovel bukin bukinnu through
b) Sumerian words with afinal consonant, preceded by along vowel:
nar nru singer an nu sky
en nu high priest eg ku dike
kar kru quay gir kru oven
ambar appru marsh ur-sa urnu hero
banur paru table bur-zid purstu bowl
gala-ma kalamu
chief lamentation priest
35
LESSON 2
2.3 Which of the listed stems would be used with the verbal prefixes in periods and
places that exhibit vowel harmony?
a) {e} (TERM): tud, gi, al, ug, pad
b) {mi} (VEN-3.NH-LOC2/3): gi, gur, sar, bala, tud
c) {ne} (LOC13): dug, al, du, gi, tar, gul
d) {i} (FIN): dim, tu, gi, sa, sig
36
LESSON 3
THE NOMINAL TEMPLATE
AND THE NON-ADVERBIAL CASES
This lesson first describes the general structure of the Sumerian noun phrase.
In its second part, it explains the use of the ergative and the absolutive cases,
which encode the Agent, the Subject, and the Patient, the primary syntactic
functions in Sumerian. In the concluding part of the lesson, the main
characteristics of the two adnominal cases, the genitive and the equative, are
discussed.
3.1 The nominal template
The Sumerian noun phrase consists of five structural positions, see Table 3.1
below. P1 and P2 may be occupied by avariety of structural units. P3 may be
filled either with anoun phrase in the genitive or with an enclitic possessive
pronoun. The possessive pronoun in P3 and the elements occurring in P4 and
P5 are enclitics, i.e., affixes being added to phrases but not to lexical heads.
Table 3.1: The Sumerian nominal template
1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
HEAD MODIFIER POSSESSOR PLURAL-MARKER CASE-MARKER
In ex. (11) the human dative case-marker attaches directly to the head of the
noun phrase. In ex. (12), however, it follows the genitive case-marker of the
noun phrase in P3.
(11) Gudea Statue B 7:24 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)
dnin-ir-su-ra
P1ninirsuk=P5ra
P1DN=P5DAT.H
for the god Ningirsu
37
LESSON 3
(12) Ur-Bau 1 3 (RIME 3/1.1.6.1) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P231808)

dumu an-na-ra
P1dumu P3[P1an=P5ak]=P5ra
P1 child P3[P1DN=P5GEN]=P5DAT.H
for the child of the god An
The noun phrase occupying P3 may have elements in up to four of its five
positions, and then there may be four structural units between the head (P1)
and the case-marker (P5) of the main noun phrase as in ex. (13) below.
(13) CUSAS 17, 13 3:8 (unknown, cca. 23th c.) (P251599)
nam-til e-a-ne-ne
P1namtil P3[P1e=P3ane=P4en=P5ak]=P5
life P3[P1brother=P33.SG.H.POSS=P4PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
the well-being of his brothers
In exx. (14) and (15) below, the noun phrase occupying P3 contains yet another
noun phrase in its P3. In ex. (15) the embedded noun phrase is an appositional
construction.
sipad udu siki-ka-ke-ne
P1 sipad [
P3 P1 udu P3[P1siki=P5ak]=P5ak]=P4en=P5e
P1shepherd P3[P1sheep P3[P1wool=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ERG
the shepherds of sheep of wool (= wool-bearing sheep)
(15) Shulgi 2046 1-3 (RIME 3/2.1.2.2046) (Ur, 21st c.) (P226193)
nam-til, dul-gi, diir kalam-ma-na-ka-e
P1 namtil [
P3 P1 ulgir P1 diir P3[P1kalam=P3ane=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5e
P1life P3[P1PN P1god P3[P1land=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5TERM
for the well-being of Shulgi, the protective god of his land
As the elements in P4, P5, and the possessive pronoun in P3 are enclitics
attaching to the final word-level constituent of the noun phrase, all these
elements cumulate at the right end of the phrase in simple and double genitive
constructions like exx. (13), (14), and (15).
P1 may be occupied by simple nouns, compound nouns, pronouns, non-
finite verbal forms, and clauses with subordinate finite verbal forms. P2 may
be occupied by non-finite verbal forms, relative clauses, noun phrases in the
genitive case (see Lesson 4, section 4.1), noun phrases in the ablative case (see
Lesson 13, section 13.1), cardinal numbers, and demonstrative pronouns.
Anoun phrase may have more than one modifiers. P3 may be filled either with
38
The nominal template and the non-adverbial cases
anoun phrase in the genitive case or with an enclitic possessive pronoun, see
table 3.2. below. The enclitic possessive pronoun is therefore apronoun that
stands for anoun phrase in the genitive case. Note that the 3rd ps. sg. non-
human enclitic =/be/ may also be used with aplural reference.
Table 3.2: The enclitic possessive pronouns
1ST PERSON 2ND PERSON 3RD PERSON

h. (a)-ne (=/ane/)
SG -u (=/u/) -zu (=/zu/)
nh. be (=/be/)
-zu-ne-ne (a)-ne-ne
PL -me (=/m/)
(=/zunen/) (=/anen/)
P4 may be filled only with the plural-marker =/en/. This enclitic is used only
with noun phrases whose head belongs to the human class, but its use is not
obligatory. The exact conditions of its use are unclear. Its meaning may involve
individualising. The plural marker is not used with human head nouns modified
with numerals or functioning as the subject of acopular clause. The plurality
of noun phrases whose head belongs to the non-human class is usually not
overtly marked.
Both human and non-human head nouns may undergo full reduplication;
human head nouns with the plural marker may also be reduplicated, see ex.
(16) below. The function of this morphological process is certainly to mark some
sort of plurality; its exact meaning is, however, unclear, but often involves
anotion of totality, as in ex. (16) below:
den-lil, lugal kur-kur-ra,
P1enlil P1lugal P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]
P1 DN P1 king P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]
ab-ba diir-diir-re-ne-ke
P1 abba P3[P1diir~diir=P4en=P5ak]=P5e
P1father P3[P1god~PL=P4PL= P5GEN]=P5ERG
Enlil, the king of all lands, the father of all gods
The nominal slot P5 accommodates the case-markers. Nine enclitic case-
markers may be distinguished in Sumerian: =//, =/e/, =/()a/, =/ra/, =/ta/,
=/da/, =/e/, =/ak/, =/gen/. The case-markers are enclitics that function to
distinguish cases. In Sumerian cases are distinguished, however, not solely by
nominal case-markers, the verbal affixes also play an essential role in the
39
LESSON 3
identification of cases. Three of the nominal case-markers (=/ra/, =/()a/, and

=/e/), and one of the verbal affixes (/i/ or /e/ in S10) are used as markers of
more than one case. Based on the correspondences between nominal case-
markers and verbal affixes eleven cases may be distinguished in Sumerian:
Table 3.3: The Sumerian casesystem
NOMINAL CASE-MARKER
CASE VERBAL AFFIX
human non-human
=/e/ =/e/ final pronominal prefix (S11)7

ergative
and pronominal suffix (S14)
=// =// final pronominal prefix (S11)
absolutive
and pronominal suffix (S14)
adverbial cases
dative =/ra/ =/e/ /a/ (S7)
comitative =/da/ =/da/ /da/ (S8)
ablative =/ta/ /ta/ (S9)
terminative =/e/ =/e/ /i/ (S9)
locative1 =/()a/ /ni/ (S10)
locative2 =/ra/ =/()a/ /i/ or /e/ (S10)
locative3 =/ra/ =/e/ /i/ or /e/ (S10)
adnominal cases
genitive =/ak/ =/ak/
equative =/gen/ =/gen/
The twelve cases may be classified into three groups: i) ergative and absolutive,
encoders of Agent, Subject and Patient, the primary syntactic functions;
ii) adverbial cases; iii) adnominal cases. The uses of the adverbial cases will be
discussed in detail in Lessons 1214 below. The absolutive, the ergative, and the
adnominal cases are discussed in the remaining part of this lesson.
Several scholars assume the existence of an adverbiative case. Instead of the
adverbiative case which signals a grammatical relationship between two
words this textbook proposes a derivative morpheme, which turns an
expression into an adverb of manner. It will be discussed in Lesson 5, section 5.2.
7 Verbal structural positions will be referred to as slots (= S) throughout this book to

distinguish them form the structural positions of the noun phrase, referred to as positions
(= P).
40
3.2 The ergative and the absolutive case
The ergative and the absolutive encode the Agent, the Subject, and the Patient,
the three primary syntactic functions. The ergative case-marker is the enclitic
=/e/; the absolutive case is signalled with the lack of any case-marker, i.e., with
aso-called null-morpheme, indicated in the morphemic glosses of this textbook
as =//.
In ex. (17) below the subject of the transitive verb, the Agent (henceforth,
A), is in the ergative case. The object of the transitive verb, the Patient
(henceforth, P), is in the absolutive.
(17) Gudea Cyl. A 22:9 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (ETCSL 2.1.7)
ensi-ke e mu-du
P1ensik=P5e P1e=P5 S4mu-S11n-S12du-S14
P1 ruler= P5 ERG P1 house= P5 ABS VEN -3.SG.H.A.-build-3.SG.P
The ruler has built the temple.
In addition to P, the absolutive may also denote the Subject (henceforth, S), the
subject of an intransitive verb. In ex. (18) below, the subject of the intransitive
verb kur to enter, the god Nin-geshzida, is in the absolutive case.
(18) Gudea Statue E 8:1115 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232278)
diir-ra-ne, dnin-e-zid-da, mu-na-da-kur-kur
P1diir=P3ane P1ninezidak=P5 S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S10n-S12kur~kur-S14

P1god=P33.SG.H.POSS P1DN=P5ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-L1.SYN-enter~PL-3.SG.S
His (= Gudeas) personal god, Nin-geshzida, entered (with these gifts to Bau into
her temple in Iri-kug).
The absolutive case may thus encode both S and P, while the ergative encodes
the A. Languages in which Ais encoded with acase different from the one that
encodes both S and P are called ergative. Ergative languages are distinguished
from accusative languages, in which it is the Aand S that are encoded similarly
with acase called nominative case, while the P is encoded with adifferent case
called accusative. Table 3.4 below illustrates the difference between ergative
and accusative languages:
41
LESSON 3
Tab. 3.4
A S P
ERGATIVE ergative absolutive
ACCUSATIVE nominative accusative
3.3 The genitive case
The genitive case usually relates two nominals within anoun phrase. The noun
phrase in the genitive, the possessor, occupies P3 of the noun phrase whose
head is the possessum. The main function of the genitive is to denote the
possessor.
Its basic form is =/ak/, but it rarely appears in this phonetic shape: the /a/
of the genitive case-marker usually contracts with apreceding avowel; and in
word-final position the /k/ of the /ak/ is probably lost. When the /a/ of the
enclitic contracts with apreceding short vowel, the result is as arule an //,
see, e.g., exx. (19) and (20) below. When it contracts with apreceding long vowel
then the result is the preceding long vowel, see, e.g., ex. (13) above and ex. (21)
below, in which the contraction with the last vowel of the plural marker /en/
results in //. The contraction is, however, reflected by the writing only when
the preceding morpheme is written with aphonographic sign. If it is written
with aword sign, see ex. (22) below, then nothing may be noticed.
kisal dnin-ir-su lugal-a-ka
P1 kisal [
P3 P1 ninirsuk P1lugal=P3u=P5ak]=P5a
P1courtyard P3[P1DN P1king=P31.SG.POSS=P5GEN]=P5L1
in the courtyard of Ningirsu, my lord

e lugal-na
P1 e P3[P1lugal=P3ane=P5ak]=P5
P1house P3[P1king=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
his masters temple
42
(21) Gudea Statue A 1:3 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232274)

ama dumu-dumu-ne nin-a-ne
P1 ama [
P3 P1 dumu~dumu= P4 en=P5 ak] P1nin=P3ane=P5ra
P1mother P3[P1child~PL=P4PL=P5GEN] P1lady=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5DAT.H
to the mother of all children, his lady
(22) Ur-Namma 14 6 (RIME 3/2.1.1.14) (Ur, 21st c.) (P227125)
lugal ki-en-gi ki-uri-ke
P1 lugal [
P3 P1 kengir P1kiuri=P3ak]=P5e
P1king P3[P1Sumer P1Akkad=P3GEN]=P5ERG
king of Sumer and Akkad
If the /k/ of the genitive case-marker is at the end of aclosed syllable, then the
writing does not reflect its presence; one may infer its occurrence only from
the form of the morpheme that follows. When the human dative case-marker
=/ra/ is preceded by an open syllable, it undergoes apocope and is reduced to
/r/; and the syllable closing /r/ of the resulting closed syllable /CVr/ will not
be written until the end of the 3rd millennium BCE, see ex. (23) below. In ex.
(24) the dative case-marker has the unreduced form =/ra/ because of the
preceding closed syllable. As the word eninnu ends in avowel, the syllable must
be closed because of the presence of agenitive case-marker =/ak/.
(23) Gudea 72 12 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (Q000924)
dnin-ubur, nin-a-ne
P1ninubur P1nin=P3ane=P5ra
P1 DN P1lady=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5DAT.H
for Ninshubur, his lady
(24) En-ana-tum I 19 12 (Lagash, 25 th c.) (P222490)
dnin-ir-su, e-ninnu-ra
P1 ningirsuk P3[P1eninnu=P5ak]=P5ra
P1DN P3[P1TN=P5GEN]=P5DAT.H
for Ningirsu in the temple E-ninnu
The next lesson, Lesson 4 discusses in detail the various constructions in which
noun phrases in the genitive are used.
43
LESSON 3
3.4 The equative case
The equative case expresses a relation of comparison between two noun

phrases. The equative case-marker attaches to the noun phrase that functions
as the basis of the comparison, called the standard in linguistic literature. The
equative case-marker is the enclitic =/gen/, written with the sign DIM2 (= gen).
In linguistics one may distinguish between i) equative constructions, which
express sameness of extent, and ii) similative constructions, which express
sameness of manner. In English, the equative and the similative constructions
are different, as the examples in Table 3.5 below show:
Table 3.5: Equative and similative constructions

COMPAREE PARAMETER PARAMETER STANDARD STANDARD
MARKER MARKER
i) You are as kind as Bau.

ii) Ninurta roars like a storm.
In Sumerian, however, the equative and similative constructions are the same,
neither of them contains aparameter marker, and the standard marker is the
equative enclitic =/gen/ in both. They may be distinguished only on the basis
of their meaning.
Ex. (25) below is apersonal name containing an equative construction. The
goddess Bau functions as standard, and the standard marker is the equative
enclitic.
(25) CTNMC 4 5:19 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P247619)
dba-u -gen -a-ba-sag
2 7 9
P1 bau= P5 gen P1 aba=P5 S2i-S12sag-S14

P1 DN= P5 EQU P1who= P5ABS FIN-fine-3.SG.S
Who-is-as-kind-as-the-goddess-Bau?
Exx. (26) and (27) below are similative constructions; the standards of the
comparison, the new moon in the former, and a bull in the latter, are case-
marked with the enclitic =/gen/:
44

ud-sakar gibil--gen men bi-il
P1 udsakar P2 gibil-= P5 gen P1 men=P5 S5b-S10i-S11n-S12il-S14
P1 crescent.moon P2 new- TL=P5 EQU P1 crown= P5ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-carry-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) had it (= the temple) wear atiara shaped like the new moon.
(27) Lugal-zagesi 1 2:3032 (RIME 1.14.20.1) (Uruk, 24th c.) (Q001379)
urimki-e gud-gen sa an-e
P1 urim=P5 e P1 gud=P5 gen P1 sa=P5 P1an=P5e
P1GN=P5ERG P1bull=P5EQU P1head=P5ABS P1sky=P5TERM
mu-dab-il
S4mu-S6n-S7da-S11b-S12il-S14
VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.NH.A-raise-3.SG.P
Ur raised its head to the sky like abull because of him.
Constructions with the enclitic copula may also be used in asimilative function,
see Lesson 8, section 8.4 below.
Note that the two adnominal cases discussed in this lesson differ in their
syntactic behaviour. The genitive relates two nominals within anoun phrase,
i.e., possessor and possessum form one single noun phrase. The noun phrase in
the equative, however, constitutes aseparate noun phrase, outside the noun
phrase with which it compares.
Further readings
On the case system of Sumerian see Zlyomi 2010, who argues that cases should
not be distinguished solely based on the form of their case-markers; the
distribution of the case-marked words should also be taken into consideration.
The 3rd ps. possessive enclitics =/ane/ and =/be/ are assumed to be =/ani/
and =/bi/ in the earlier literature. This textbook follows Jagersma (2010: 214
217), who, based on their writings, argues convincingly that their last vowel is
in fact /e/.
The syntax of noun phrases with the equative enclitic is discussed in
Svegjrt 2011. For atypological study of equative and similative constructions
in the languages of Europe, see Haspelmath and Buchholz 1998.
45
LESSON 3
Exercises
3.1 Look up the words used in the examples of this lesson in Foxvogs (2016b) or Volks
(2012) glossary, and learn them.
3.2 Provide amorphemic segmentation and glosses to the noun phrases below based
on the transliterations and translations provided. The grammatical function of the
noun phrases is indicated in brackets.
a) arad nin-a-na-ke his ladys servant (A)

b) iri-ne his city (A)
c) nin diir-re-e-ne the lady of the gods (S)
d) lugal-u my master (A)
e) nam-til e-a-ne-ne the life of his brothers (P)
f) ni u-a the thing of my hand (S)
g) arad-zu your servant (S)
h) inim diir-re-ne the order of the gods (P)
i) e iri nam-lugal-a-ka the temple of the city of my kingship (P)
j) dumu ensi lagaki-ka-ke the son of the ruler of Lagash (A)
k) ama diir-re-ne-ke the mother of the gods (A)
l) lugal an-ub-da limmu-ba-ke the king of the four quarters (A)
m) diir-u-gen like my personal god
n) u ma-ne his mighty hand (P)
o) mu-be its name (S)
p) dumu diir-ra-ne-ne-ne-ke-ne the children of their gods (A)
q) e-ne-ne their temple (P)
r) diir-re-ne the gods (A)
s) bad gal-be its great wall (P)
t) lugal-ne for his king (DAT)
3.3 Mark the positions and add the missing morphological glosses in the noun phrases
below. Translate the noun phrases, too. All the information you need may be found
in Foxvogs glossary (2016b) or can be figured out from the translation (given only
in difficult cases). (PN = Personal Name, DN = Divine Name, GN = Geographical
Name)
a) lugalazida arad lugalkigal=ak=
PN PN
b) namlugal ki=ak=
kingship GN
46
c) biluda diir=en=ak=e
rite =L3.NH
d) diir galgal- laga=ak=en=e
big~PL-TL =ERG
e) e=u=
f) namtil=ane=
g) kisura ninirsuk=ak=e
border DN =L3.NH
h) en aratta=ak=e
lord GN =ERG
i) zapag=zu=
cry
j) nu girin-=a
bed pure-TL=L2.NH
k) a dug-=
water sweet-TL
l) mesalim lugal ki=ak=e
PN GN =ERG
3.4 The following noun phrases consist of the same morphemes, but in adifferent
order. What is the consequence of these differences on the meaning of the noun
phrases? Please translate them!
a)
1. P1a-zu P3[P1e=P3ane=P4en=P5ak]=P5
2. P1a-zu P3[P1e=P3ane=P5ak]=P4en =P5
b)
1. P1ane P2libir- P3[P1e=P3u=P5ak]=P5
2. P1ane P3[P1e P2libir-=P3u=P5ak]=P5
3.5 There is something wrong with the following examples, except for one. Please,
identify the problem in each case.
a) P1e P3[P1diir P2gal-=P5ak]=P4en=P5
the temples of the great god
47
LESSON 3
b) P1azu P2zid- P3[P1lugal=P4en=P5ak]=P5

the good doctors of the king
c) P1dam P2zid-=P3ane=P5ak
his good wife
d) P1namtil=P3u
my well-being
e) P1ezem P2gal-=P4en=P5
the great festivals
f) P1kugsig P1kugbabbar=P3zu=P5
your gold and silver
g) P1geme P2libir- P3[P1damgar=P3ane]=P5
the old female servant of the merchant
3.6 Go to the ETCSRI corpus (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/corpus) and

write N5=ERG (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Find and
make alist of the graphemes that may be used to write the ergative case-marker,
depending on the morpheme or phoneme before the case-marker! Try to find
differences depending on the location or period of the texts! If you are uncertain
about the morphological make-up of aword, follow the link to the text, then either
place the cursor over the word in question, or click on the word Proofing on the
left side of the page.

write N4=PL (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Find and
a make list of the graphemes that may be used to write the plural-marker,
depending on the morpheme or phoneme before and/or after the plural-marker!
If you are uncertain about the morphological make-up of aword, follow the link
to the text, then either place the cursor over the word in question, or click on the
word Proofing on the left side of the page.

write either N3=ju or N3=ani (without the quotation marks) in the Search
Oracc box. Find and amake list of the graphemes that may be used to write the
1st ps. sg. or 3rd. ps. sg. human possessive enclitic, depending on the morpheme or
phoneme before and/or after them! Try to find out differences depending on the
location or period of the texts! If you are uncertain in the morphological make-up
48
of aword, follow the link to the text, then either place the cursor over the word in
question, or click on the word Proofing on the left side of the page.
3.9 Transliterate the text of Ur-Nanshe 26 (RIME 1.9.1.26) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222380)
(a handcopy of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P222380) with the
help of Volks sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of Foxvogs glossary
(2016b). Gloss all the words of the text (except for the verbal form) in the way it is
done in this textbook. Then go to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.
museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q001042), click on the proofing link on the left side
of the page, and compare your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing. Which grammatical
elements are not written in the orthography of this early text?
49
LESSON 4
GENITIVE CONSTRUCTIONS
The genitive construction in ex. (28) is of the most familiar type both in terms
of its meaning and construction: it expresses possession and the possessor, the
noun phrase in the genitive case, occupies P3 of the noun phrase whose head is
the possessum.
(28) Iri-kagina 1 4:9 (Lagash, 24th. c) (Q001124)
gud diir-re-ne-ke
P1gud P3[P1diir=P4en=P5ak]=P5e
P1 ox P3[P1god=P4PL=P5GEN]=P5ERG
The oxen of the gods
There exist, however, other types of genitive constructions which differ from
this common type. This lesson describes the most important characteristics of
three atypical genitive constructions. In modifying genitive constructions, the
noun phrase in the genitive functions as the modifier of the head, which also
affect its syntactic behaviour: it occupies P2 but not P3 of the noun phrase. In
left-dislocated genitive constructions the possessor occupies aposition before the
noun phrase whose head is the possessum. In genitive constructions with suspended
cliticization only the last of the coordinate genitive constructions is case-marked.
4.1 Modifying genitive constructions
In these constructions, the relation between the head and the noun phrase in
the genitive is not possession, rather, the noun phrase in the genitive functions
as the modifier of the head. Accordingly, the noun phrase in the genitive stands
in P2 of the noun phrase whose head it modifies;8 and apossessor, see ex. (29),
apossessive pronominal enclitic, see exx. (30), (31) and (35), or amodifying
8 Adnominal ablatives functioning as modifiers may also stand in P2, see Lesson 13, section 13.1
below.
51
LESSON 4
non-finite verbal form, see ex. (32), may therefore only stand after its genitive
case-marker.
(29) Iri-kagina 1 4:1011 (Lagash, 24th. c) (Q001124)
ki um-ma, ensi2-ka
P1 ki [
P2 P1 um=P5 ak] P3[P1ensik=P5ak]=P5
P1place P2[P1onion=P5GEN] P3[P1ruler=P5GEN]=P5ABS
the onion-plot of the ruler
(30) Gudea Cyl. B 10:1 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (ETCSL 2.1.7)
sipad ane-ka-ne
P1 sipad P2[P1ane=P5ak]=P3ane=P5
P1herder P2[P1donkey=P5GEN]=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
his donkey herder
ki banur-ra-u10
P1 ki P2[P1banur=P5ak]=P3u=P5e
P1place P2[P1table=P5GEN]=P31.SG.POSS=P5L3.NH
at my dining place
(32) VS 14, 162 obv. 3:2 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020173)
4 usan mar gibil
4 P1 usan P2[P1mar=P5ak] P2gibil-=P5
4 P1whip P2[P1wagon=P5GEN] P2new-TL=P5ABS
4 new wagon whips
If ex. (29) were altered by placing the possessor ensik=ak between the word
um onion and its genitive case-marker, as in possessive genitive
constructions, then it would have adifferent meaning as illustrated in the
following hypothetical example:
(33)
P1*ki P3[P1um P3[P1ensik=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5
P1 place [
P3 P1 onion P3[P1ruler=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
the place of the rulers onion
Functionally modifying genitive constructions compensate for the lack of
derivational affixes deriving adjectives from nouns.
Modifying genitives have two main subtypes: i) non-referential genitives
and ii) locative genitives.
52
Genitive constructions
In non-referential genitives, the structural unit in P2 is anoun without

reference to an existing entity. In exx. (29)(31) above the words um onion,
ane donkey, and banur table, respectively, do not refer to an existing
entity; they modify the meaning of the preceding word, the head. Asipad
ane=ak, for example, is akind of herder.
In anon-referential genitive construction, the structural unit in P2 may only
consist of anoun or another non-referential genitive. In ex. (34) below the non-
referential genitive P1gu P2[ane=ak] donkey neck functions as the modifier
in another, superordinate non-referential genitive: P1tug P2[gu ane=ak=ak]
donkey neck cloths.
(34) TSA 31 obv. 2:4 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221392)
26 tug gu ane-ka sumun
26 P1 tug [
P2 P1 gu [
P2 P1 ane=P5ak]=P5ak] P2sumun-=P5
26 P1cloth P2[P1neck P2[P1donkey=P5GEN]=P5GEN] P2old-TL=P5ABS
26 old donkey neck clothes
In locative genitives, the noun phrase in the genitive is ageographical name
which denotes the location of the head:
(35) Gudea 8 6 (RIME 3/1.1.7.8) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (Q000892)
e irsuki-ka-ne
P1e P2[P1irsu=P5ak]=P3ane=P5
P1 temple P2[P1GN=P5GEN]=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
his temple in Girsu
4.2 Leftdislocated genitive constructions
The possessor normally occupies P3 of the noun phrase. Under certain

conditions, however, the possessor may occupy aposition before the head of
the noun phrase, i.e., it may be left-dislocated. This construction is called
anticipatory genitive in earlier literature.
In aleft-dislocated genitive construction the possessor is in the genitive,
and P3 is occupied by aresumptive pronominal enclitic that agrees in person,
gender, and number with the possessor. In ex. (36) below the possessor e
house, temple does not occupy P3 of the noun phrase ni gal great
awesomeness, but is left-dislocated and is in the genitive. P3 is occupied by
the pronominal enclitic =/be/.
53
LESSON 4

e-a ni gal-be
e=
P1 P5 ak P1 ni P2gal-=P3be=P5
P1house=P5GEN P1fear P2great-TL= P33.SG.NH.POSS= P5ABS
kalam-ma mu-ri
P1 kalam= P5 a S4mu-S10n-S12ri-S14
P1 land= P5 L 1 VEN-L1.SYN-settle-3.SG.S
The temples great awesomeness settles upon the Land
The left-dislocated possessor and the possessum may be separated by another
noun phrase:
e-a den-ki-ke e-ur-be
e=
P1 P5 ak P1 enkik=P5 e P1eur=P3be=P5e
P1temple=P5GEN P1DN=P5ERG P1plan=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5L3.NH
si mu-na-sa
si=
P1 P5 S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12sa-S14
P1horn=P5ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-equal-3.SG.P
Enki put right the design of the temple for him.
The left-dislocated possessor may be the possessor of another genitive con-
structions possessor. The non-left-dislocated version of genitive construction
in (38) would look like this: lu ag enlil=ak=ak.
den-lil-la lu ag-ga-na-kam
P1 enlil=P5 ak P1 lu P3[P1ag=P3ane=P5ak]=P5=am-
P1DN=P5GEN P1man P3[P1heart= P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS=COP-3.SG.S
He is aman of Enlils heart.
The possessum of the left-dislocated possessor may be the participant of
arelative clause, in this case the left dislocated possessor may stand in front of the
relative clauses head noun:
gu-de-a, ensi, lagaki-ka,
P1gudea P1ensik P3[P1laga=P5ak]=P5ak
P1PN P1ruler P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P5GEN
54
lu inim-ne ib-kur-a
P1 lu [
P2 P1 inim=P3 ane=P5 S2i-S11b-S12kur-S14e-S15a]=P5
P1man P2[P1word=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS FIN-3.SG.NH.P-change-3.SG.A-SUB]=P5ABS
the man who changes the orders of Gudea, the ruler of Lagash
In the following example the possessum of the left-dislocated possessor e=ak
(house=GEN) is itself a left-dislocated possessor. This doubly left-dislocated
genitive construction may be derived from an underlying double genitive
construction in two steps as is shown in a)c) below.
e-a du-ba mul kug-ba,
e=
P1 P5 ak P1 du=P3 be=P5 ak P1mul P2kug=P3be=P5a
P1house=P5GEN P1building=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5GEN P1star P2holy=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5L2.NH
gu ma-ra-a-de
P1 gu=P5 S4ma-S6r-S7a-S10e-S11n-S12de-S14e
P1voice=P5ABS VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-pour-3.SG.A
She will announce to you the holy stars of the building of the house.
c) P1e=P5ak P1du=P3be=P5ak
P1house=P5GEN P1building=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5GEN
P1mul P2kug=P3be=P5a
P1star P2holy=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5L2.NH
*b) P1du P3[P1e=P5ak]=P5ak P1mul P2kug=P3be=P5a

P1building P3[P1house=P5GEN]=P5GEN P1star P2holy=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5L2.NH
*a) P1mul P2kug P3[P1du P3[P1e=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5a

P1star P2holy P3[P1building P3[P1house=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5L2.NH
In Sumerian, the order of the words preceding the verb is determined by the
information structure of the clause. Information structure is understood as
a phenomenon of information packaging that responds to the immediate
communicative needs of interlocutors (Krifka 2007:13). The left-dislocated
genitive functions to move the possessor into a sentence-initial position,
thereby making the possessor the topic of the clause, because of which the
clause will be construed as being about the possessor, i.e., the clause will express
information which is relevant to and which increases the listener or readers
knowledge of this constituent.
55
LESSON 4
4.3 Genitive constructions

with suspended cliticization
Suspended cliticization in Sumerian is the grammatical phenomenon when in

an appositive or coordinate construction only the last unit of the construction
may be case-marked. Suspended cliticization in appositive constructions is
often attested in inscriptions of the 3rd millennium BCE. In ex. (41) below the
construction has three units: enlil, lugal kur-kur=ak, and abba diir=en=ak,
but only the last one is case-marked with the ergative.
den-lil, lugal kur-kur-ra,
P1enlil P1lugal P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]
P1 DN P1 king P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]
ab-ba diir-diir-re-ne-ke
P1 abba P3[P1diir~diir=P4en=P5ak]=P5e
P1father P3[P1god~PL=P4PL= P5GEN]=P5ERG
Enlil, the king of all lands, the father of all gods
One could argue that in constructions like ex. (41) above, the three units of the
appositive construction are considered as asingle unit from a syntactic point
of view, consequently the ergative case-marker of the case governed by the
verb attaches to its very end. The same happens in ex. (42) below, where the
appositive construction nammane, ensik laga=ak Nam-mahne, the ruler
of Lagash functions as the possessor of the possessum namtil life, well-being.
The appositive construction is regarded as one unit, the genitive case-marker
governed by the head of the noun phrase therefore attaches to the end of its
second unit.
(42) Nam-mahne 7 36 (RIME 3/1.12.7) (Lagash, 21st c.) (Q000932)
nam-til, nam-ma-ne, ensi, lagaki-ka-e
P1namtil P3[P1nammane P1ensik P3[P1laga=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5e
P1 life [
P3 P1 PN P1 ruler P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5TERM
for the well-being of Nam-mahne, ruler of Laga
Suspended cliticization is also attested with coordinate constructions like ex.

(43) below. Here the two coordinate noun phrases, two genitive constructions,
the pedestal of Enlil and the pedestal of Utu, are case-marked only once
with the locative2, the case governed by the verb of the clause.
56
(43) Iri-kagina 5 obv. 1:1213 (RIME 1.9.9.5 ) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222618)
barag den-lil-la, barag dutu-ka
P1barag P3[P1enlil=P5ak] P1barag P3[P1utu=P5ak]=P5a

P1 dais [
P3 P1 DN= P5 GEN ] P1 dais P3[P1DN=P5GEN]=P5L2.NH
(He looted) the pedestal of Enlil and the pedestal of Utu.
Like ex. (43), ex. (44) too contains two coordinate genitive constructions; and
the two noun phrases are also case-marked here only once with the case
governed by the verb of the sentence, the absolutive. In this example, however,
also the genitive is suspended: only the second genitive construction is marked
with the genitive (ensik kurkur=ak), the case-marker is not present in the first
one (baragbarag kiengir). In ex. (44) therefore enclitic suspension occurs
twice: once with the case governed by the verb, once with the case governed
by the possessum.
barag-barag ki-en-gi, ensi kur-kur-ra
[[P1barag~barag P3 kiengir] [P1 ensik P3kur~kur]=P5ak]=P5
[[P1dais~PL P3GN] [P1ruler P3land~PL]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
the sovereigns of Sumer and the rulers of all lands
In ex. (45) the coordinate construction consists of three genitive constructions,
and the whole construction is left-dislocated. Here too, the possessor is case-
marked with the genitive only in the last of the three genitive constructions.
dumu unugki, dumu larsamki, dumu pa-ti-bir-raki-ka
[[P1dumu P3unug] [P1dumu P3larsam] [P1dumu P3patibira]=P5ak]=P5ak
[[P1child P3GN] [P1child P3GN] [P1child P3GN]=P5GEN]=P5GEN
[ama]-gi-be, e-ar
P1amargi=P3be=P5 S2i-S11n-S12ar-S14
P1freedom=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5ABS FIN-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
He released the citizens of Unug, the citizens of Larsam, and the citizens of
Patibira.
57
LESSON 4
Further readings
A more detailed description of the left-dislocated genitive constructions can be

found in Zlyomi 1996b and 2005.
Suspended cliticization in texts from the 3rd millennium BCE is discussed
in detail by Wilcke (1990: 459464); Wilcke does not use this term, which is
adapted from the term suspended affixation, used mainly in linguistic works
on Turkish, another agglutinative language.
Exercises
4.1 Look up the new words used in the examples of this lesson in Foxvogs (2016b) or
Volks (2012) glossary, and learn them.
4.2 Study the examples of this lesson carefully and make yourself familiar with their
grammatical analysis.
4.3 Go to the ETCSRI corpus (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/corpus) and write
N5=GEN (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Find and make
a list of the graphemes that may be used to write the genitive case-marker
depending on the morpheme or phoneme before and/or after the case-marker! Try
to find differences depending on the provenience or period of the texts! If you are
uncertain about the morphological make-up of aword, follow the link to the text,
then either place the cursor over the word in question, or click on the word
Proofing on the left side of the page.
4.4 Translate the following expressions into Sumerian. Provide morphemic
segmentation and glossing to them, use bracketing, as well. All expressions are
assumed to be in the absolutive.
a) the true son of the king (zid- = true-TL)
b) the true sons of the mighty king (ma- = mighty-TL)
c) the true sons of the mighty kings
d) the true sons of the mighty king of the land
e) the true sons of the mighty king of all the lands
f) the true sons of the mighty kings of all the lands
g) the shepherd of his donkeys
h) the shepherd of his mothers donkeys
58
i) the shepherd of his kind mothers donkeys (sag-a = kind-PT)

j) the shepherd of his kind mothers healthy donkeys (zid- = healthy-TL)
k) the mother of his donkey shepherd
l) the mother of his reliable donkey shepherd (zid- = reliable-TL)
m) the kind mother of his reliable donkey shepherd
4.5 Translate the following expressions into Sumerian, and then left-dislocate the
underlined expressions. Provide morphemic segmentation and glossing to them,
use bracketing, as well. All expressions are assumed to be in the absolutive.
a) the kings scribe f) the king of all lands

b) my wifes children g) the heros donkey
c) the servant of my fathers house h) the father of all gods
d) the servant of my fathers house i) the well-being of my brothers
e) the courtyard of my lord j) the shepherds garment
4.6 Determine which sentences contain aleft-dislocated genitive construction based

only on the morphemic segmentations! What is the trick?
a) mu=be=e anzag=ta kurkur=e gu= i-m-b-a-si~si-e
b) namnundakiara=ak ur=be= na=a mu-nn-a-ni-n-du-
c) id=be=a u= mu-r-a-n-de-
d) e melem=be= an=e us-a=e
e) e=u=ak ni gal-=be kalam=a mu-n-ri-
f) ibila dudu=ak=en=e kag=anene=a ba-ni-n-gen-e
g) ane= sa=ane=e diir-=am-
h) e ninirsuk=ak= eridu=gen ki sikil-=a b-i-n-du-
i) gudea lu e= du-a=ak=ak namtil=ane= a-i-sud-
4.7 Transform the constructions of exx. (43)(45) into constructions without suspended
cliticization. You must produce only the morphemic segmentation and glossing
(2nd and 3rd line of the examples).
4.8 In Lesson 3, section 3.1 above, ex. (46) (= ex. [14]) was used to demonstrate the
structure of the Sumerian nominal template. Relabel its brackets now based on
what you have learnt in this lesson about modifying genitive constructions.
59
LESSON 4

P1sipad P3[P1udu P3[P1siki=P5ak]=P5ak]=P4en=P5e
P1shepherd P3[P1sheep P3[P1wool=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ERG

the shepherds of sheep of wool (= wool-bearing sheep)
4.9 Please use the enclitic possessive pronouns, the plural-marker, the ergative,
absolutive, or genitive case-marker, and the Sumerian translation of the words
listed below to create the nominal constructions defined by the position of their
constituents. Provide morphemic segmentation and glossing to them, use
bracketing, as well. Use your creativity, more than one solutions are possible. Note
that one of the constructions is erroneous.
Words: temple, child, king, great, kind, mighty, mother, city, shepherd, donkey,
god, man, true, heart, Enlil, Girsu
a) P1 P2 P4 P5
b) P1 P2 P3 [P1 P3 P5] P4 P5
c) P1 P3[P1 P5] P5
d) P1 P2[P1 P5] P3 P5
e) P1 P3 P5 P5
f) P1 P5 P1 P3 P5
g) P1 P4 P5 P1 P3 P5
h) P1 P5 P1 P3 [P1 P3 P5] P5
4.10 Transliterate the text Gudea 18 (RIME 3/1.1.7.18, ex. 2) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232472)
(Volk 2012 no. 6) (a photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P232472)
with the help of Volks sign list (2012). Translate the text. Gloss all the words of
the text (except for the verbal form) in the way it is done in this textbook. Then go
to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/
Q000896), click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and compare
your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing. Compare the orthography of this text with
that of Ur-Nanshe 26 treated in the exercises of the previous lesson. What are the
differences?
60
LESSON 5
PRONOUNS, ADVERBS, AND NUMERALS
This lesson focuses on the closed word class of pronouns: the independent
personal, the interrogative, the indefinite, the reflexive, and the demonstrative
pronouns. The enclitic possessive pronoun is discussed in Lesson 3 above. The
second part of the lesson describes the adverbs of manner and the forms and
function of the adverbiative enclitic. The lesson concludes with asection on
numerals in Sumerian with an emphasis on the syntax of the numeral
expressions.
5.1 Pronouns
The independent personal pronouns
Unlike in languages like English or German, independent personal pronouns

play arather restricted role in Sumerian. The main reason for this is that verbal
participants that are contextually identifiable are referred to not by
independent pronouns but by pronominal affixes incorporated in the finite
verbal form (see Lesson 6, section 6.5 below). In ex. (47) the he pronoun of
the English translation corresponds to the 3rd ps. sg. pronominal suffix in S14
of the Sumerian finite verb.
kug da-tum-dug-ra mu-na-en
kug atumdug=ra S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12en-S14
holy DN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-go-3.SG.S
He went to holy Gatumdug.
Independent personal pronouns are used as arule only when their referents
function either as contrastive topic or as focus. In ex. (48) below the first
pronoun (/ze/ you) is in focus, i.e., it expresses an exhaustive identification,
as the English translation also indicates. The second pronoun (/e/ I)
expresses acontrast to the other participant.
61
LESSON 5
Both as contrastive topic and as focus the pronouns in ex. (48) may also have
been marked with prosodic prominence; in contrast, the verbal pronominal
affixes are always unaccented.
(48) Enmerkar and En-suhgir-ana 278 (ETCSL 1.8.2.4)
sig-ta igi-nim-e en gal-be za-e-me-en
sig=ta iginim=e en gal=be= ze==me-en
low=ABL upper=TERM lord big=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
e-e us-sa-zu-me-en
e= us-a=zu==me-en
1.SG.PR=ABS follow-PT=2.SG.POSS=ABS=COP-1.SG.S
(For the people) from the south to the highlands, their great lord is you (and no
one else). As for me, I am indeed only second one to you.
Table 5.1. below shows the forms of the independent pronouns. The 1st and 2nd
ps. pl. forms are supplied with various periphrastic constructions. Note that
the 3rd ps. forms belong to those which are attested both in forms with two
similar and with two different vowels (see Lesson 2, section 2.2. above); the
former is the form used in the 3rd millennium BCE.
Table 5.1: The independent pronouns

SG e-e (/e/) za-e (/ze/) a-ne (/ane/), e-ne (/ene/)
PL a-ne-ne (/anen/), e-ne-ne (/enen/)
Sumerian exhibits an ergativity split according to the semantics of the noun

phrase. Nouns are marked ergatively, while independent personal pronouns
are marked accusatively, i.e. they do not distinguish formally between Aand S.
The interrogative pronouns
The interrogative pronouns behave like nouns, and accordingly they take case-
markers. The human interrogative pronoun is formed from the stem /aba/,
while the non-human from the stem /ana/. The stem /me(n)/ is used only with
adverbial cases.
62
Pronouns, adverbs, and numerals
a-ba (aba= : who=ABS) = who, whom

a-ba-a (aba=e : who=ERG) = who
a-na (ana= : what=ABS) = what
a-na-a (ana=e : what=TERM) = why, lit. for what
me-a (me=a : wh=L1) = where
me-e3 (me=e : wh=TERM) = where to
Constituent questions in Sumerian follow two main patterns in terms of the
form and place of the interrogative pronouns. An interrogative pronoun may
occur: i) in asentence-initial position; or ii) immediately before the verb. In
sentence-initial position it is as arule accompanied with a3rd. ps. sg. enclitic
copula, see ex. (49) below. When it stands immediately before the verb, then it
usually occurs alone, see ex. (50).
(49) Proverbs collection 2 + 6 Segment D 23 (ETCSL 6.1.02)
a-ba-am ima bi-in-du
aba==am- ma=e S5b-S10i-S11n-S12du-S14
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S boat=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-caulk-3.SG.P
Who caulked the boat?

en unugki-ga en kul-abaki -ra a-na ga-an-na-ab-be
en unug=ak en kulaba=ak=ra ana= S2ga-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12e
lord GN=GEN lord GN=GEN=DAT.H what=ABS MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF
What shall I say to the lord of Unug, the lord of Kulaba?
The indefinite pronoun
The pronoun /name/ some, any is used as an indefinite modifier, most often
in negative clauses as in exx. (51)(53) below:
(51) The Cursing of Agade 160 (ETCSL 2.1.5)
ni na-me a-be la-ba-ra-e
P1ni P2name=P5 a=be=ta nu-ba-ta-e-
P1 thing P2 some= P5 ABS arm=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABL NEG-MID-ABL-leave-3.SG.S
Nothing escaped their clutches.
63
LESSON 5
(52) SNAT 535 13 (Umma, 21st c.) (P130295)

ni na-me nu-mu-da-a-tuku
P1 ni P2 name= P5 S1nu-S4mu-S6-S7da-S11e-S12tuku-S14
P1 thing P2 some= P5 ABS NEG -VEN-1.SG-COM-2.SG.A-have-3.SG.P
I do not owe you anything = lit. You do not have anything with me.
(53) TCS 1 68 rev. 3 (unknown, 21st c.) (P145654)
lu na-me na-na-ab-um-e
P1lu P2name=P5ra S2na-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
P1 person P2 some= P5 DAT .H MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A
He should not give it to anyone!
The words lu person and ni thing may also be used in apronominal
function with the meaning someone, anyone and something, anything,
respectively, without the modifier na-me, see, e.g., ex. (54) below.
lu ur-ra, e lu-ka nu-kur(REC145)
lu ur=ak= e lu=ak=a S1nu-S2i-S10n-S12kur-S14
person debt=GEN=ABS house person=GEN=L1 NEG-FIN-L1.SYN-enter-3.SG.S
No ones house was entered by the debt collector.
The reflexive pronouns
The reflexive pronouns behave like nouns, and accordingly they take case-
markers. The reflexive pronouns are formed from the stem /ni(te)/ with the
addition of apossessive enclitic. As arule, the allomorph /ni/ occurs before
aconsonant, while /nite/ occurs before avowel. The 1st and 2nd ps. pl. forms
are not attested.
Table 5.2: The reflexive pronouns

h.: ni-te-ne (nite=ane)
SG ni-u (ni=u) ni-zu (ni=u)
nh.: ni-be (ni=be)
PL ni-te-ne-ne (nite=anen)
The form /nite/ may also be written as ne-te-, see ex. (56) below, or as
mete(TE+ME)-, see ex. (57) below in the 3rd millennium BCE. The pronoun may
occur without apossessive enclitic when used as the object of acompound verb,
see ex. (483) in Lesson 16 below.
64
The reflexive pronoun is used when the Aor the S of averb is coreferent
with one of the other participants of the verb; except for the participant in the
dative, in which case the middle prefix /ba/- is used, see Lesson 11, section 11.4
below:
(55) TMH NF 1-2, 53 obv. 8 (Ur, 21st c.) (P134365)
ni-te-ne-ne ba-ra-an-sa-a
nite=anen= S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12sa-S14e
self=3.PL.POSS=ABS MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-barter-3.PL
They sold themselves.
(56) NWHCM 2009.174 obv. 1416 (Umma, 23th c.) (P480080)
ne-te-ni-ta, kar-da-iki-e, ba-en
nete=ane=ta kardai=e ba-en-
self=3.SG.H.POSS=ABL GN=TERM MID-go-3.SG.S
He left on his own for Kardahi.
The reflexive pronoun may function as the emphatic form of the possessive
enclitic, occupying P3 of the noun phrase:
(57) E-ana-tum 3 3:1516 (RIME 1.9.3.3) (Lagash, 25th c) (Q001067)
iri mete-na, u e-na-zig
P1iri P3nite=ane=P5a u= S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S10n-S12zig-S14
P1 city P3 self=3.SG .H.POSS =P5 L 1 hand=ABS MOD -FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1.SYN-rise-3.SG.S
May there be arevolt against him in his own city!
A comparison of exx. (57) and (58) shows that when the reflexive pronoun
functions as possessor, it emphasizes that the possessum belongs to aparticular
person.
nam-lu-lu iri-na, u u-na-zig,
namlulu=e iri=ane=a u= S1u-S6nn-S7a-S10n-S12zig-S14
people=ERG city=3.SG.H.POSS=L1 hand=ABS ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-L1.SYN-rise-3.SG.S
ag iri-na-ka, a-ne-gaz-ze(AB.A.GE)
ag iri=ane=ak=a S1a-S10ni-S11n-S12gaz-S14e
heart city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=L1 MOD-L1-3.SG.H.P-kill-3.SG.A
After there has been arevolt against him in his city, may the people kill him in
the middle of his city!
65
LESSON 5
Demonstrative pronouns
Six demonstrative pronouns can be identified but the semantic distinction

between them is not always clear. The pronouns =/e(n)/, =/be/, =/re(n)/, and
=/e/ are used as enclitics. The pronoun (=)/n(n)/ is used both as enclitic, see
exx. (62) and (63) below, and as an independent pronoun, see exx. (64) and (65)
below. The pronoun /ur/ is used only as an independent pronoun, see ex. (67)
below. The most frequently attested of them are =/be/, see ex. (59) below,
=/e(n)/, see exx. (60) and (61) below, and (=)/n(n)/, in this order. The
demonstrative pronouns =/re(n)/ and =/e/ are used mainly in fixed
expressions.
(59) Ur-Namma 19 2:78 (RIME 3/2.1.1.19) (Ur, 21st c.) (Q000946)

eg-ba a-ba-dnanna-gen,
P1eg=P3be=P5ak aba=-nanna-gen=
P1 levee= P3 DEM =P5 GEN who= ABS-DN-EQU=ABS
mu-be
mu=be==am-
name=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
Of this levee Who-is-like-the-god-Nanna? is its name.
(60) Rimush 18 1822 (RIME 2.1.2.18) (Agade, 23rd c.) (Q000842)

lu, im-sar-ra-e, ab-ha-lam-me-a
lu P1imsara=P2e=P5 S2a-S11b-S12halam-S14e-S15a=
person P1inscription=P2DEM=P5ABS FIN-3.SG.NH.P-obliterate-3.SG.A-SUB=ABS
Whoever obliterates this inscription, .
(61) The three ox-drivers form Adab 15 (ETCSL 5.6.5)

amar-e a-ba-kam
P1 amar= e=
P2 P5 aba=ak=am-
P1calf=P2DEM=P5ABS who=GEN=COP-3.SG.S
Whom does this calf belong to?

ud-ne ma-i-ka,
P1 ud=P2 n maik=a
P1day=P2DEM vision=L1
On this day, in adream, .
66

gud-gen, ud-ne-na e-gaz
gud=gen P1 ud=P2 nn= P5 a S1a-S2i-S12gaz-S14
ox=EQU P1 day=P2 DEM =P5 L 1 MOD-FIN-kill-3.SG.S
May he be slaughtered like an ox on the very day!
(64) Enki and Ninhursaga 201 (ETCSL 1.1.1)

a-na-am ne-e
ana==am- P1n=P5
what=ABS=COP-3.SG.S P1DEM=P5ABS
What is this?
(65) FaoS 17, 45 10 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P123220)

ne-me arad a-me
P1n=P5=me-e arad= S1a-S12me-S14e
P1 DEM =P5 ABS =COP -3. PL.S slave=ABS MOD -COP-3.PL.S
(Ipqua and Shu-Ninmug sold their sister Ala-NE. If she stops working,) it is these
(i.e., the brothers) who should be slaves (in her place).
(66) The Debate between Grain and Sheep 20 (ETCSL 5.3.2)

nam-lu-ulu ud-re-a-ke-ne
P1namlulu P3[P1ud=P2re=P5ak]=P4en=P5e
P1people P3[P1day=P2DEM=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ERG
The people of those days
It is likely that these demonstrative pronouns participated in athree-degree

set this (near the speaker), that (within view of the speaker), that (outside
of the view of the speaker). The following groupings are attested in grammatical
and lexical texts:
Table 5.3: The demonstrative pronouns
this that that

near the speaker within view of the speaker outside of the view of the speaker
=/e(n)/ =/e/ =/re(n)/
(=)/n(n)/ =/e/ =/re(n)/
=/e(n)/ =/re(n)/ =/be/
67
LESSON 5
In actual texts, however, the pronoun =/be/ often appears rather to have the
meaning this, see, e.g., ex. (59) above or ex. (106) below. It is also often used
as aquasi-definite article, and it is likely to be the source of the 3rd ps. sg. non-
human possessive enclitic. The pronoun /ur/ is frequently attested with the
equative case-marker as in ex. (67) below.
(67) Gudea Statue B 6:777:3 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)
e ur-gen dim-ma, ensi dili-e,
e ur=gen dim-a= ensi dili=e
house DEM=EQU make-PT=ABS ruler single=ERG
dnin-ir-su-ra, nu-na-du,
ninirsuk=ra S1nu-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12du-S14
DN=DAT.H NEG-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
No ruler ever built atemple fashioned like this for Ningirsu.
5.2 Adverbs of manner and the adverbiative
There are two ways to form adverbs of manner in Sumerian: i) With the
adverbiative enclitic =/e/; ii) with the enclitic =/be/. First we discuss the
adverbiative in detail as its exact classification is controversial.
The basic form of the adverbiative enclitic is =/e/. In many contexts, the
enclitic of the adverbiative and the terminative case-marker are written with
the same grapheme, E, which may be read either as e or e, consequently
the adverbiative and the terminative cases are not always easy to tell apart in
practice. It is the easiest to distinguish them after words ending in aconsonant.
In ex. (68) below the spelling clearly shows that the form of the adverbiative is
=/e/, in contrast to the terminative in ex. (69) whose basic form is =/e/.
e2 lugal-na zid-de3-e2 mu-du3
e lugal=ane=ak= zid-=e S4mu-S11n-S12du-S14
house king=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=ABS right-TL=ADV VEN-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
He built his masters temple in the appropriate manner.
gu-de-a, sipad zid-e kalam-ma
gudea= sipad zid-=e kalam=a
PN=ABS shepherd right-TL=TERM land=L1
68
ba-ni-pad-da-a
S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12pad-S14-S15a-a
MID-L1-3.SG.H.A-find-3.SG.P-SUB-L1
(when Ningirsu) chose Gudea for (being) the true shepherd of the Land for
himself, .
After aword ending in avowel the terminative case-marker =/e/ reduces to
//; the adverbiative and the terminative are therefore difficult to distinguish
in this morphological environment, see Attinger (1993: 253), who offers alist
of morphological criteria to be used to distinguish between them.
The /e/ of the adverbiative enclitic may contract with last vowel of the word
it attaches to, and the syllable closing // is often not written as the contrast
between the orthography in ex. (70) and ex. (71) demonstrates.
gil-sa im-mi-ak
gilsa=e S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ak-S14
treasure=ADV FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-act-3.SG.P
(After building the E-ninnu for Ningirsu, Gudea, ruler of Lagash,) donated (the
booty) to it for ever. = lit. (He) made (the Eninnu) treat (the booty) in the manner
of atreasure.
(71) Ur-Namma 19 2:56 (Ur, 21st c.) (Q000946)
urimki-e gil-sa-a, e-mi-ak
urim=e gilsa=e S1a-S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ak-S14
GN=L3.NH treasure=ADV MOD-FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-act-3.SG.P
He donated indeed (the drained swamp) to Urim for ever. = lit. He made indeed
Urim treat (the drained swamp) in the manner of atreasure.
The function of the adverbiative is to form an adverb of manner. The

adverbiative is therefore not acase which signals agrammatical relationship
between words, but akind of derivational formative that functions to change
the word class of an expression. The adverbiative can be attached to nouns, see
exx. (70) and (71) above, to nouns modified by anon-finite verb, see ex. (72),
and to non-finite verbs, see ex. (68) above. All these expressions change into an
adverb. The adverbiative enclitic is probably a loan from the Akkadian
terminative-adverbial -i into Sumerian.
69
LESSON 5
(72) Enkis journey to Nibru 71 (ETCSL 1.1.4)

e-engur-ra-ke ir dug-ge-e im-me
eengurak=e ir dug--e S2i-S4m-S11b-S12e-S14e
TN=L3.NH song sweet-TL-ADV FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH.L3-speak.PF-3.SG.A
He praised the E-engura temple in the manner of sweet songs.
The other way to form an adverb of manner is to attach the enclitic =/be/ to
atenseless, see ex. (73), or apreterite non-finite verbal form, see ex. (74) below.
(73) Enlil in the Ekur 75 (ETCSL 4.05.1)
abzu barag kug-ga gal-be tum-ma-zu
abzu barag kug=a gal-=be tum-a=zu
GN dais holy=L2.NH great-TL=3.SG.NH.POSS suit=PT=2.SG.POSS
That you are greatly suited for the abzu, the holy throne .
(74) Letter from Ishbi-Erra to Ibbi-Suen 25 (ETCSL 3.1.17)
e-ba-ne ul-la-be al-til-la
eba=ane= ul-a=be S2al-S12til-S14-S15a==am-
ration=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS hurry-PT=3.SG.NH.POSS FIN-complete-3.SG.S-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
The thing is that his grain rations have quickly been exhausted.
The enclitic =/be/ may well be related to the 3rd ps. sg. non-human possessive
enclitic, but the origin of this construction is unclear. From the Old Babylonian
period onwards, the meaning of this form is occasionally reinforced with an
additional adverbiative:
(75) Anam A 38 (ETCSL 2.7.1.1)
den-lil-e ma-be-e al-me-en
enlil=e ma=be=e al-==me=en
DN=TERM great=3.SG.NH.POSS=ADV exist-TL=ABS=COP=2.SG.S
You are grandly there for Enlil!
5.3 Numerals
Sumerians used asexagesimal number system, i.e., they counted in multiples

of sixty. As numerals normally were written with logograms, the reconstruction
of their phonological and morphological form is not without problem. The
numbers 15, 10, 20, 60 and 3600 are expressed with unanalysable words, while
70
the other numbers are probably compound numerals which are either additive
or multiplicative, or both.
1 /di/ or /a/ 20 /ni/

2 /min/ 30 /uu/ (= 310 */e/ + /u/)
3 /e/ 50 /ninnu/ (= 202+10 */ni/ + /min/ + /u/)
4 /limmu/ 60 /ed/
5 /ya/ 3600 /ar/
6 /a/ (= 5+1 */ya/ + /a/)
7 /imin/ (= 5+2 */ya/ + /min/)
8 /ussu/ (= 5+3 */ya/ + /e/)
9 /ilimmu/ (= 5+4 */ya/ + /limmu/)
10 /u/
A sentence like John bought 4 bulls may be expressed in two different ways
as far as the numeral modifier of bulls is concerned in Sumerian. In
construction a) the cardinal number functions as the modifier of the head noun
as in exx. (76) and (77) below:
(76) Gudea 56 3:3-4 (RIME 3/1.1.7.56) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P234436)
ita(KAK.GI) ur sa 3-e, mu-na-dim
ita ur P1 sa 3=
P2 P5 e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dim-S14
mace lion P1head P23=P5TERM VEN-3.SG-DAT-3.SG.H.A-make-3.SG.P
He fashioned amace with three lion heads from it.
SAHAR.DU6.TAK4-be, ki 5-a,
SAHARDUTAK=be= P1 ki P25= P5a
burial.mound=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS P1place P25= P5L2.NH
i3-mi-dub
S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dub-S14
FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-pile.up-3.SG.P
He piled up their burial mounds in five places.
In construction b) the cardinal number functions as the predicate complement
and the counted thing or person as the subject of acopular clause as in exx.
(78) and (79) below.
71
LESSON 5
(78) Gudea Statue B 7:30 ( (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)

ud 7-am e la-ba-ara
S [day=] PC [7=]=am- e= S1nu-S5ba-S12ara-S14
S [day=ABS ] PC [7= ABS ]=COP -3. SG .S grain=ABS NEG -MID-grind-3.SG.S
Lit For days that are seven (in number) no grain was ground. = For seven days
no grain was ground.
(79) MVN 6, 293 rev. 3:9 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P114737)
mu dumu-ne 3-am3 ba-gub-ba-e3
mu S [dumu=ane=] PC [3=]=am- S5ba-S12gub-S14-S15a=ak=e
name S[child=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS] PC[3=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S MID-stand-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM
Lit. Because his sons who are three (in number) were on duty. = Because his
three sons were on duty.
There is a discrepancy between spoken and written forms of metrological

expressions in Sumerian. In spoken language, the word order is measured item
- measure - numeral, while in writing, especially in administrative texts, the
norm becomes numeral - measure - measured item by the end of the 3rd
millennium BCE. In these texts the written word order is governed by scribal
convention and not by grammatical rules. The tendency that numerals precede
the quantified nouns apparently serves visual clarity. The former order, which
reflects the spoken language, is used in ex. (80) below, while the latter one is
used in ex. (81).
lu dam u-taka, kug gi 5-am,
lu=e dam= u- n-
S1 S11 S12 taka- S14 kug gi 5==am-
man=ERG wife=ABS ANT-3.SG.H.A-leave-3.SG.P silver unit 5=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
ensi-ke, ba-de
ensik=e S5ba-S11n-S12de-S14
ruler=ERG MID-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P
If aman divorced (his) wife, the ruler received 5 shekels of silver for himself.
(81) TCS 1, 131 36 (unknown, 21st c.) (P145679)
1 gi kug-babbar-am, mu-u-e,
1 gi kugbabbar==am- mu=u=e
1 unit silver=ABS=COP-3.SG.S name=1.SG.POSS=TERM
ba-sag-ga, e-na-ab-um-mu
basaga=ra S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
PN=DAT.H MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A
(Tell Lu-Shara that) he should give ONE shekel of silver to Basaga on my behalf!
72
A construction in which the numeral stands in apposition to the quantified

noun and the possessive enclitic attached to the numeral agrees in person,
gender and number with the quantified noun functions to make the expression
definite:
(82) NG 117 rev. 4 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111340)
di til-la di-kud lugal 7-ba
di til-a [
P3 P1 dikud [
P2 P1 lugal=P5 ak] P17=P3be=P5ak]=P5
case complete-PT P3[P1judge P2[P1king=P5GEN] P17=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
Lit. a closed case of royal judges, seven of them = a closed case of the seven
royal judges
(83) Amar-Suena 5 2:1 (RIME3 /2.1.3.5) (Ur, 21st c.) (P227059)
lugal an-ub-da limmu-ba-ke
lugal P3[P1anubda P1limmu=P3be=P5ak]=P5e
king [
P3 P1 quarter P1four=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ERG
Lit. king of the quarters, four of them = king of the four quarters
The numeral with the possessive enclitic may also be used without an
immediately preceding noun:
(84) NRVN 1, 224 obv. 8 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P122441)
limmu-ne-ne
P1limmu=P3anen=P5e
four=3.PL.POSS=TERM
Lit. for their four = for the four of them
Ordinal numbers are formed from cardinal numbers with asuffix -/kama(k)/:
ud 7-kam-ma-ka e-e im-mi-dab
ud 7-kamak=a e=e S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dab-S14
day 7-ORD=L1 house=L3.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-encircle-3.SG.P
By the seventh day he had set them (= the stelae) up around the temple.
73
LESSON 5
Further readings
A general survey of the word classes of Sumerian is provided by Black 2002. On

the forms and uses of the independent personal pronouns, see Klein 2000 and
Attinger 2011. The syntax of constituent questions is discussed in Attinger 2004
and Zlyomi 2014c: 135148. On demonstrative pronouns, see Woods 2000: 303
314; on the demonstrative enclitic =/e(n)/, see Attinger 2014.
For the different constructions with numeral modifiers, see Jagersma 2010:
246-255 and 706-707.
The adverbiative was first identified by Attinger (1993: 253255), who
considers it acase, unlike this textbook. An important contribution to its form,
spellings, and history is Meyer-Laurin 2012. She argues against the assumption
that the adverbiative is akind of derivational formative, but does not rule out
that the Sumerian adverbiative =/e/ was a loan from the Akkadian
terminative-adverbial i (2012: 23670).
Exercises
5.3 Provide the missing parts of the morphemic glossings in the following examples.
a) mu dumu-ne 3-am ba-gub-ba-e
mu S[dumu=ane=] PC[3=]=am- S5ba-S12gub-S14-S15a=ak=e
name MID-stand-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM
Lit. Because his sons that are three (in number) were on duty.
b) a-ba-am ema bi2-in-du8
2
boat=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-caulk-3SG.P
Who caulked the boat?
74
c) za-gen a-ba an-ga-kalag

za=gen aba= S2a-S3nga-S12kalag-S14
FIN-COOR-strong-3.SG.S
a-ba an-ga-an-da-sa2
aba= S2a-S3nga-S6nn-S8da-S12sa-S14
FIN-COOR-3.SG.H-COM-equal-3.SG.S
Who is as mighty as you, and who rivals you?
d) amar-e a-ba-am ba-an-tum
amar=e= aba==am- S5ba-S11n-S12tum-S14
MID-3.SG.H.A-lead-3.SG.P
Who leads this calf away?
e) a-ba-am za-e-me-en
aba==am- S[ze=]-me-en
S[ ]=COP-2.SG.S
Who are you?
5.4 Translate the following expressions into Sumerian. Provide transliteration,
morphemic segmentation, and glossing.
a) 5 shekels of gold
b) the ruler of two cities (= A)
c) this temple (= P)
d) of this canal
e) in the middle of their own cities
f) where?
g) why?
h) I do not owe you any silver.
j) Who is this man?
k) He built the house of his mother quickly.
l) the three royal sons
m) in the 3rd temple
5.5 Transliterate the text Gisha-kidu 1 (RIME 1.12.6.1, ex. 01) (Ur, 21st c.) (P222828) (a
photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P222828) with the help of
Volks sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of either Volks (2012) or
Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to all
words, except for the finite verbs. Then go to the ETCSRI edition of the text
(http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q001325), click on the proofing link on
the left side of the page, and compare your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing. How
could you characterize the text in terms of suspended cliticization?
75
LESSON 5
5.6 Transliterate the text Ur-Namma 33 (RIME 3/2.1.1.33, ex. 01) (Ur, 21st c.) (P226641)
(a copy of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P226641) with the help of
Foxvogs glossary (2016b). The text is no. 1 in Volks (2012) chrestomathy. Assign
morphemic segmentation and glossing to all words, except for the finite verb. Then
go to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/
Q000953), click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and compare
your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing.
76
LESSON 6
THE VERBAL TEMPLATE
The finite verbal form is the most important constituent of the clause in
Sumerian. In addition to the modality, voice, tense, and direction of the verbal
event, it may also indicate the syntactic function of up to four of the verbal par-
ticipants, even when no noun phrase or independent pronoun is present in
the clause. This lesson gives an overview of the structure and functioning
of the Sumerian finite verb. The detailed description of the functions of the
morphemes it may consist of can be found in the subsequent lessons of the text-
book.
6.1 The general structure of the finite verbal form
Finite verbal forms in Sumerian are distinguished by the large number of affixes
that can be attached to averbal stem. These affixes and the verbal stem may be
arranged into 15 structural positions or slots on distributional grounds. There
are eleven slots before the stem, which itself fills slot 12 (henceforth, S12) and
there are three slots after the stem. Unlike in German or English, where only
the subject is cross-referenced with an affix on the verbal form, Sumerian verbal
forms may cross-reference up to four participants of the verb. Table 6.1. below
gives an overview of the affixes functions.
The finite verb is almost always the last constituent of the clause; only in
literary texts may aconstituent stand behind it.
77
LESSON 6
Table 6.1: The verbal template
Slot 1 Modal prefix (a), negative particle, prefix of anteriority, stem (in imperative forms)
Slot 2 Finite-marker prefix, modal prefixes (all the other)
Slot 3 Coordinator prefix
Slot 4 Ventive (cislocative) prefix
Middle prefix or the 3.SG.NH pronominal prefix /b/ (specifying the person,
Slot 5
gender and number of the first in the sequence of adverbial prefixes)
Initial Pronominal Prefix (= IPP) (specifying the person, gender and number
Slot 6
of the first in the sequence of adverbial prefixes)
Slot 7 Adverbial I: dative prefix
Slot 8 Adverbial II: comitative prefix
Slot 9 Adverbial III: ablative or terminative prefix
Slot 10 Adverbial IV: locative1, locative2, or locative3 prefix
Final Pronominal Prefix (= FPP) (referring to A or P, depending on the tense,
Slot 11
or locative3)
Slot 12 stem
Slot 13 present-future marker (in intransitive verbs)
Slot 14 pronominal suffix (referring A, S, or P depending on the tense)
Slot 15 subordinator
6.2 The prefixes of S1115
S11 and S14 contain pronominal affixes which may cross-reference the Agent,
the Subject, and the Patient of the finite verb. The syntactic function of these
verbal participants is mainly indicated by the position of the affixes that cross-
reference them; so, e.g., in the present-future conjugation the pronominal suffix
in S14 cross-references Aand S, while the final pronominal prefix in S11 cross-
references P. S12 contains the verbal stem. S13 contains the present-future
marker suffix /ed/, which occurs in the intransitive present-future forms. The
morphemes of S11S14 are involved in the expression of the grammatical
categories of verbal tense and verbal plurality. The detailed description of their
functioning is the subject of Lessons 8 and 9.
S15 contains the subordinator suffix /a/. It changes the clause of the finite
verb into a subordinate clause, which may then function as a relative or
acomplement clause. The subordinator suffix is discussed in Lesson 7.
78
The verbal template
6.3 The adverbial prefixes
The prefixes of S5-10 are involved in the verbal cross-reference of participants

in an adverbial case; see also Table 3.3 in Lesson 3, section 3.1 above. These
participants may be cross-referenced either by acomposite or by asimple
adverbial prefix.
A composite adverbial prefix is composed of i) apronominal prefix and ii)
an adverbial prefix. The former specifies the person, gender, and number, while
the latter identifies the syntactic function of the prefixs referent. In ex. (86)
below, the indirect object of the verb um2 to give is in the dative case. In the
verbal prefix-chain this participant is cross-referenced by acomposite dative
prefix that consists of an initial pronominal prefix /nn/ in S6 and adative prefix
/a/ in S7 (both in bold).
(86) Enmerkar and the Lord of Aratta 420 (ETCSL 1.8.2.3)
en-me-er-kara-ra den-ki-ke etug mu-na-an-um
enmerkara=ra enkik=e etug= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
PN=DAT.H DN=ERG ear=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
The god Enki gave wisdom to Enmerkara.
The relationship between the noun phrase in the dative and the composite
adverbial prefix is schematized in Table 6.2. It shows that the function of the
dative adverbial prefix /a/ corresponds to the function of the dative case-
marker =/ra/, both serve to identify the syntactic function of the verbal
participant.
Table 6.2
NOUN PHRASE ADVERBIAL PREFIX
REFERENTIAL EXPRESSION Enmerkara S6 /nn/

CASE-MARKER =/ra/ S7 /a/
A simple adverbial verbal prefix consists only of an adverbial prefix without

apronominal prefix. The existence of simple adverbial prefixes follows from
the structure of the verbal prefix-chain: there is only one pronominal slot, S6,
before the adverbial prefixes (this rule, however, is valid only with some
qualifications, for which see below). So, if, for example, the prefix-chain
contains adative prefix in S7, then any subsequent adverbial prefix must occur
as asimple adverbial prefix, i.e., without apronominal prefix. In ex. (87) below,
79
LESSON 6
for example, the locative2 prefix in S10 (in bold) occurs as asimple prefix,
because it is preceded by acomposite dative prefix.

arza-a mul an kug-ba
arza=u=ak mul an kug=be=a
regulation=1.SG.POSS=GEN star sky holy=3.SG.NH.POSs=L2.NH
gu ga-mu-ra-a-de
gu= S2ga-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S10e-S12de
voice=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-pour
Let me tell you the pure stars of heaven indicating my regulations!
In contrast, the locative2 prefix occurs as a composite adverbial prefix in

ex. (88) below. It consists of an initial pronominal prefix /nn/ in S6 and
alocative prefix /i/ in S10 (both in bold). In ex. (88) the locative2 prefix in S10
is the first adverbial prefix of the finite verb: it is not preceded by any other
adverbial prefix, and there is no other morpheme between it and the initial
pronominal prefix in S6. Consequently, the initial pronominal prefix specifies
the person, gender, and number of the verbal participant in the locative2 case.
dnin-ir-su-ke, sa-u-gal-ne , u-ni-u
2
ninirsuk=e saugal=ane= S2u-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12u-S14
DN=ERG battle.net=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS ANT-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-cover-3.SG.P
After Ningirsu had thrown hisbattle-net on him (= the Ummaite), .
It follows from the above description that the dative prefix occurs always as
a composite prefix, as its slot (S7) is the nearest to the slot of the initial
pronominal prefix (S6). Other adverbial prefixes may have either composite or
simple form depending on the structure of the prefix-chain: only the first of
the adverbial prefixes of a finite verb may be composite preceded by
apronominal prefix, every subsequent adverbial prefix is simple and refers to
a 3rd ps. non-human verbal participant. Or, conversely, only a composite
adverbial prefix containing ahuman initial pronominal prefix can refer to a3rd
ps. human participant.
The pronominal prefix of a composite adverbial prefix is as a rule
amorpheme in S6. There exist, however, three exceptions to this rule:
i) There is no initial pronominal prefix in S6 cross-referencing a3rd ps. sg.
non-human verbal participant, but a/b/ prefix in S5, which may diachronically
80
The verbal template
be related to the middle prefix, is used in this function. The mutually exclusive
distribution of the middle prefix of S5 and the 3rd ps. sg. non-human
pronominal prefix /b/ has the consequence that no composite adverbial prefix
with a 3rd ps. sg. non-human reference may occur in a verbal form with
amiddle prefix. So, in ex. (89) below, the comitative with ahuman reference
may occur in acomposite form, as its 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal prefix
occupies S6, but in ex. (90) below the locative2 with anon-human reference
must occur in asimple form because of the presence of the middle prefix. The
mutually exclusive distribution of the middle prefix and the 3rd ps. sg. non-
human pronominal prefix explains that forms like *ba-ba-um [ba-b-a-um-:
MID-3.SG.NH-DAT-give-3.SG.S], approx. was given to it are grammatically
incorrect and are not attested.
(89) UET 3, 335 rev. 1 (Ur, 21st c.) (P136656)

ud ba-nu-a ba-an-da-ar
ud ba-nu--a=a S5ba-S6n-S8da-S12ar-S14
day MID-lie-3.SG.S-SUB=L1 MID-3.SG.H-COM-place-3.SG.S
On the day she/he was buried, (various golden objects) were put next to
her/him.
(90) Nisaba 8, 365 rev. 7 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P321037)
ma-a ba-a-a-ar
ma=a S5ba-S10e-S12ar-S14
boat=L2.NH MID-L2-place-3.SG.S
(Various animals) were put on the boat.
In ex. (91) below S5 is used by the middle prefix, consequently the ablative
prefix occurs in asimple form, without any pronominal prefix.
bisa u-ub-ba-ta sig ba-ta-il
bisa uub=ak=ta sig= S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12il-S14
basket brick.mold=GEN=ABL brick MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-raise-3.SG.P
He lifted the brick out of the frame of the mould.
ii) If the composite form of adative, locative2, or locative3 (i.e., of cases that
may indicate motion towards adestination) refers to a1st ps. sg. participant,
then the pronominal element is not the 1st ps. sg form of the initial pronominal
prefix in S6, but the ventive prefix in S4. In ex. (92) below, the ventive prefix in
S4 precedes the dative prefix in S6, and the two morphemes form acomposite
adverbial prefix with a1st ps. sg. reference.
81
LESSON 6
(92) The victory of Utu-hegal 29 (ETCSL 2.1.6)

gu-ti-umki den-lil-le ma-an-um
gutium= enlil=e S4m-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
GN=ABS DN=ERG VEN-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
Enlil has given Gutium to me.
iii) The locative1 prefix /ni/ in S10 has no composite form, only simple form:
it always occurs without apronominal prefix, and always cross-references a3rd
ps. non-human participant.
The adverbial cases and their verbal markers are discussed in detail in Lessons
1214. The ventive prefix in S4, the 3rd ps. sg. non-human pronominal prefix
in S5, and the initial pronominal prefixes in S6 are discussed in Lesson 11.
The structure and functioning of the adverbial prefixes impose restrictions
on their co-occurrences. Some of these restrictions will be discussed in later
lessons. The restriction on the co-occurrence of the composite 3rd ps. sg. human
dative prefix and the simple locative2 or locative3 prefix in transitive preterite
verbal forms will be discussed in Lesson 14, sections 14.3 and 14.4. Co-occurrence
restrictions circumvented by changing one of the incompatible adverbial
prefixes into adative prefix will be discussed in Lesson 15, section 15.4.
6.4 The prefixes of S15
The first slot of the finite verbal form contains the prefix of negation and the
modal prefix /a/-. Their function is discussed in the last lesson of the textbook,
Lesson 16. The prefix of anteriority of S1 is involved in indicating the relative
time of the verbal event in Sumerian, it is discussed in Lesson 9, section 9.2.
S2 may contain all the modal prefixes, except for /a/-, and the finite
prefixes. The modal prefixes will be treated in Lesson 16, section 16.2 below,
together with the prefix /a/-.
The finite-marker prefix has acomplicated history that is obscured by the
phenomenon that in many morphological environments it went lost. In the
Sumerian texts we know, in many verbal forms it only indicates that the verbal
form functions as the predicate of the clause and not as amodifier of anoun.
The coordinator prefix in S3 functions as aclause coordinator. The main
function of the ventive or cislocative prefix in S4 is to indicate amotion towards
adeictic centre that may be the location of the speech event or one of the
82
The verbal template
speech act participants, the speaker or the addressee. The middle prefix in S5
indicates that the verbal action or state affects the grammatical subject or his
interests. The prefixes of S25, except for the modal prefixes, are discussed in
Lesson 11.
6.5 Observations on the functioning

of the finite verbal form
The Sumerian verbal template consists of fifteen slots. The existence of

arelatively large number of structural positions does not entail that afinite
verb should have amorpheme in every slot. In fact, no finite verbal form is
attested in which all slots are filled with amorpheme. The shortest finite verbal
form contains at least three morphemes: afinite-marker in S2, the stem in S12,
and apronominal suffix cross-referencing S in S14 as in ex. (93) below.
gu-de-a i-zig
gudea= S2i-S12zig-S14
PN=ABS FIN-rise-3.SG.S
Gudea woke up.
The number of morphemes in the longest finite verbal forms is eight, see e.g.,
in ex. (94) below, or nine, see, e.g., in ex. (95) below.
(94) En-metena 2 3:54:2 (RIME 1.9.5.2) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222546)
id-nun-ta, mu-bi-kur-ra,
idnun=ta mubikura=e
WN=ABL GN=TERM
e-na-ta-ni-e
S2i-S6nn-S7a-S9ta-S10ni-S11n-S12e-S14
FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-ABL-L1-3.SG.H.A-leave-3.SG.P
(For Ningirsu, his master who loves him, En-metena) extended it (= the boundary
levee) from the Idnun canal until Mubikura.
a-agaag tum-de, am-ta-bala-e-da
aag= tum-ed=e S2a-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S10e-S12bala-S13ed-S14-S15a
field=ABS bring-PF=DAT.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-L2-cross-PF-3.SG.S-SUB
who crosses (the boundary levees) to take away fields
83
LESSON 6
As expected, it is not the case either that all morphemes occur with the same
frequency. An examination of the relative frequency of the morphemes of slots
110 (Zlyomi 2013) resulted in Chart 6.1 below.9
Chart 6.1: The frequency of the verbal prefixes
The chart shows that in the corpus of the royal inscriptions the most frequently
used verbal prefix among the prefixes of slots 1-10 is the ventive in S4. Among
the 2135 finite verbal forms 1415 contained aventive prefix, which is 66 % of
all finite verbal forms in the corpus.
263 finite verbal forms contained amodal or negative prefix in S1 (= 12 %).
Among the 263 forms, 59 were negated forms with the prefix /nu/-.
The most frequent prefix among the adverbial prefixes was the dative in
S7: 979 (= 46 %) finite verbal forms of the corpus contained adative prefix. The
second most frequent were the various locative prefixes in S10: 453 (= 21 %).
Another study (Zlyomi 2013b) examined the co-occurrences of the
adverbial prefixes based on 2138 finite verbal forms available at ETCSRI on 3
August 2013. Table 6.3 below shows the findings of the study in detail.
The study found that among the 2138 finite verbal forms in the corpus, 1529
(72 %) contained asingle adverbial prefix, 138 (6.45 %) contained two, and only
3 (0.14 %) contained three prefixes. It concluded that Sumerian finite verbal
forms in this corpus typically contain only one adverbial prefix. If they contain
two, then one of them is the dative in the great majority of occurrences. Finite
verbal forms with three adverbial prefixes (see, e.g., ex. [94] above) are
extremely rare. Chart 6.2 below visualize the data of Table 6.2.
9 The examination was based on the 2135 morphologically analyzed finite verbal forms which
were available at the website of Electronic Text Corpus of Sumerian Royal Inscriptions
(http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri) on 1 August 2013.
84
The verbal template
Table 6.3: Cooccurrences of the adverbial prefixes
DAT COM ABL TERM L1 L2 L3(V10) L3(V11)
ALONE 857 66 83 54 186 209 58 16
DAT 3 9 13 80 10 0 2
COM 0 0 8 5 0 2
ABL 0 2 3 0 0
TERM 0 0 0 0
L1 0 0 1
L2 0 0
L3(V10) 0
L3(V11)
Chart 6.2
The two peaks of the chart indicate that in this corpus averbal form with two
adverbial prefixes typically contains an adverbial prefix that specifies the
location of the verbal event, and the dative, which cross-references the
beneficiary; note that this corpus contains a great number of votive
inscriptions. If the verbal form contains athird adverbial prefix, then as arule
it refers not to the location of the event but has some other function, as in ex.
(96) below, where the ablative basically functions to modify the meaning of the
verb similarly to the verbal prefixes in German, e.g, herauskommen.
85
LESSON 6

iri-e dutu-gin, ki-a-ra
iri=e utu=gin kiar=a
city=DAT.NH DN=EQU earth=L2.NH
im-ma-ta-a-e
S2i-S4m-S5b-S7a-S9ta-S10e-S12e-S14
FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-ABL-L2-leave-3.SG.S
Like Utu, he (= Gudea) rose on the horizon for the city.
The verbal participants of the finite verb are cross-referenced with the
adverbial prefixes and the pronominal affixes of S11 and S14. There is, however,
no one-to-one correspondence between the verbal affixes and the case-marked
noun phrases of the clause. Two types of discrepancies may be distinguished:
i) The noun phrase in an adverbial case is not cross-referenced with any adverbial
prefix
The co-occurrence between the noun phrase in the dative, the comitative, and
the locative cases (used in alocal meaning) is quite strict. Anoun phrase in any
of these cases occurs as arule together with acorresponding adverbial prefix
in the verbal prefix-chain (unless the structure of the prefix-chain obstructs its
presence, see Lesson 14, sections 14.3 and 14.4 below). In case of the ablative
and terminative the co-occurrence is much less strict. Noun phrases in the
ablative or terminative may quite often occur without a corresponding
adverbial prefix, see Lesson 13 below. This is obviously a semantic issue;
adetailed examination of the phenomenon is needed.
Starting from around the end of the 3rd millennium BCE the correspon-
dence between noun phrases and adverbial prefixes is often lost: the nominal
case-markers are influenced by the corresponding Akkadian idioms but the
original adverbial prefix is preserved, see, e.g., ex. (308) in Lesson 12 below.
ii) The adverbial prefix has no nominal counterpart in the clause

This phenomenon is quite common, because both the adverbial prefixes and
the pronominal affixes of S11 and S14 may function as anaphoric (or occa-
sionally, as cataphoric) pronouns. These affixes are therefore not agreement
markers: they may occur either without or with acoreferential noun phrase in
the clause. They may exceptionally also occur with independent pronouns, but
only to express acontrast.
The adverbial prefixes and the pronominal affixes of S11 and S14 function
similarly to the pronouns of other languages, averbal participant introduced
earlier in the discourse may be encoded only with averbal affix in Sumerian.
86
The verbal template
In ex. (97) the Agent (= Ningirsu) is cross-referenced by the prefix /n/ in

S12, and the verbal participant in locative2 (= the city of Umma) is cross-
referenced by acomposite adverbial prefix /b-i/ in S5 and S10. The noun phrase
in the ergative, and the noun phrase in the locative2 are missing from the
sentence. Both verbal participants were mentioned in the text previously, they
are therefore referred to only by pronouns, as in other languages. The
independent personal pronouns of the English translation correspond to the
verbal affixes. Some scholars translate sentences like ex. (97) with pronouns in
brackets, assuming and indicating that they are not present in the Sumerian
sentence. This assumption is unfounded, the pronouns are there, but they are
part of the finite verbal form.
inim den-lil-la-ta, sa-u-gal bi-u
inim enlil=ak=ta saugal= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12u-S14
word DN=GEN=ABL battle.net=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-cover-3.SG.P
By the order of Enlil, he (= Ningirsu) threw abattle net on it (= the city Umma).
Occasionally adverbial prefixes occur without referring to any verbal
participant. In this case their function is to modify the meaning of the verb,
similarly to the verbal prefixes of German verbs, like aus- oder weggehen, see,
e.g., ex. (96) above, and ex. (98) below, in which the ablative prefix modifies
the meaning of the verb sa to barter to to sell.
(98) TMH NF 1-2, 53 obv. 8 (Ur, 21st c.) (P134365)
ni-te-ne-ne ba-ra-an-sa-a
nite=anen= S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12sa-S14e
self=3.PL.POSS=ABS MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-barter-3.PL
They sold themselves.
Further readings
The rule that only the first of the adverbial prefixes of afinite verb may be
preceded by apronominal prefix, i.e., that afinite verb may only contain one
composite adverbial prefix, was explicitly formulated by Joachim Krecher (1985:
1331) for the first time; see also Attinger 1993: 206 (134 R1). The consequences
of Krechers rule are discussed in Zlyomi 1999: 220224.
87
LESSON 6
On the anaphoric use of the adverbial prefixes and the pronominal affixes
of S11 and S14, see Zlyomi 2010: 580583.
Exercises
6.3 Identify the slots in the following prefix chains. Find all the adverbial prefixes and
decide whether they are composite or simple.
a) S4mu-S6n-S8da-S12ak-S14e
b) S1a-S2i-S6m-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
c) S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S9ta-S12e-S14
d) S2i-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14
e) S2i-S10n-S12gu-S14en
f) S5ba-S9i-S11n-S12nu-S14
g) S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S10ni-S11n-S12du-S14
h) S2a-S6r-S7a-S12gig-S14
i) S1a-S4mu-S6-S8da-S11n-S12gub-S14
j) S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12il-S14
k) S4mu-S6n-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14
6.4 Assign the glossed morphemes to slots and try to translate the verbal forms based
on the glosses.
a) FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-give-3.SG.A
b) VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A
c) ANT-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.NH.A-give-3.SG.P
d) FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
88
The verbal template
e) VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
f) ANT-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-L1-enter-2.SG.S
6.5 Try to pair the verbal forms with the matching translations. You do not have to
know the meaning of the stem, just concentrate on the slots and the information
hidden in the glosses.
S2na-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14en They stepped forward to him with .

MOD-3.SG.H.P-stem~PF-2.SG.A
S1a-S2i-S12til-S14 He also demolished it.

MOD-FIN-stem-3.SG.S
S1u-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S10n-S12kur-S14en After he had thrown it on him, ....

ANT-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-L1.SYN-stem-2.SG.S
S2a-S5b-S9ta-S11n-S12gu-S14-S15a Do not buy her!

FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.H.A-stem-3.SG.P-SUB
S1u-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12u-S14 It cannot be tired.

ANT-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-stem-3.SG.P
S2i-S3nga-S11n-S12sig-S14 From which he consumed it.

FIN-COOR-3.SG.A-stem-3.SG.P
S2i-S6nn-S9i-S11n-S12sa-S14 After you had entered to her into it with

FIN-3.PL-TERM-3.SG.H.A-stem-3.SG.P them, .
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S12ug-S14e He bought her from them (lit. bartered

VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-stem.PL-3.PL.S for them).
S1u-S11n-S12taka-S14 May it come to an end!

ANT-3.SG.H.A-stem-3.SG.P
S2nan-S12kuu-S13ed-S14 After he left her, .

MOD-stem-PF-3.SG.S
6.6 Transliterate the text Ur-Namma 4 (RIME 3/2.1.1.4, ex. 01) (Ur, 21st c.) (P226639)
morphemic segmentation and glossing to all words. Then go to the ETCSRI edition
of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q000936), click on the
proofing link on the left side of the page, and compare your glosses with ETCSRIs
glossing.
89
LESSON 6
6.7 Transliterate the text Gudea 64 (RIME 3/1.1.7.64, ex. 01) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P234557)
morphemic segmentation and glossing to all words. Then go to the ETCSRI edition
of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q000921), click on the
proofing link on the left side of the page, and compare your glosses with ETCSRIs
glossing.
90
LESSON 7
NON-FINITE VERBAL FORMS
AND RELATIVE CLAUSES
The first section of this lesson discusses the forms and functions of the non-
finite verbal forms. It is followed by asection on the subordinator suffix, which
transforms the clause of averb into asubordinate clause. The subject of the
third section is the relative clause, which may be formed either from anon-
finite verbal form or from asubordinate clause with afinite verb in Sumerian.
The lesson concludes with two sections on constructions involving non-finite
verbal forms. The first functions as apurpose clause, the second as atemporal
clause.
7.1 Nonfinite verbal forms
Three forms of the non-finite verbal form can be distinguished on formal

grounds:
PTSTEM-
(stem-TL) tenseless non-finite verbal form
PTSTEM-a
(stem-PT) preterite non-finite verbal form
PFSTEM-ed
(stem-PF) present-future non-finite verbal form
The first two forms use the preterite stem, while the third form uses the
present-future stem of the verb, supposing the verb has one. In all three forms
the stem may undergo aplural-reduplication, see, e.g. ex. (118) below. Non-
finite verbal forms can only be prefixed with the negative prefix /nu/-. The
opposition between the preterite and the present-future is maintained only
with verbs expressing an action. Non-finite verbal forms expressing astate
always use the preterite form.
Future forms often express modal meanings. This is also true about the
present-future non-finite verbal form which may express the modal meaning
91
LESSON 7
of necessity, obligation, see e.g., ex. (99) below, ability or inability, see, e.g., ex.
(119) below:
(99) NG 209 obv. 2:1617 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P134582)
nam-erim2-be, ku5-ru-dam
namerim=be= kur-ed==am-
oath=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS cut-PF=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
This is to be taken an oath about.
The preterite and the present-future non-finite verbal form consist of the verbal
stem and asuffix which is the marker of tense. The tenseless non-finite verbal
form consists only of the verbal stem without any material suffix, indicating
iconically that it is aform which expresses the verbal state or action without
any temporal reference point as permanent and essential. The expression lugal
gabari nu-tuku means, for example, a king who has no rival. The use of
apreterite non-finite verbal form nu-tuku-a would refer to aking who until
agiven point of time has not had or at agiven point of time does not have
arival.
Sumerian is alanguage without adistinguishable word class of adjectives.
Adjectival concepts are expressed with non-finite verbal stems or with
structures like the modifying genitive construction, see Lesson 4, section 4.1
above.
Verbal stems with an adjectival meaning (e.g., dugud heavy, tur small,
sukud high, dug3 sweet) occur most frequently as tenseless non-finite
verbal forms. They occur in fewer contexts than averb expressing an action.
This is, however, the consequence of their meaning which affects in which
grammatical forms they can occur, but does not justify the postulation of
aseparate word class of adjectives in Sumerian.
Tenseless non-finite verbal forms are one of the main sources of compound
nouns. The following compound nouns are based on headless tenseless non-
finite verbal forms: dub-sar scribe < dub sar (dub= sar- : tablet=ABS
write-TL) he who writes tablets, ku-dim goldsmith < ku dim (kug=
dim- : metal=ABS fashione-TL) he who fashions metal.
Adjective-like compound constructions are normally based on tenseless
non-finite verbal forms: usu tuku (usu= tuku- : power=ABS have-TL)
powerful, igi al2 (igi= al- : eye=ABS exist-TL) wise.
Compound verbs with nominal parts that derive from non-finite verbal
forms also use tenseless non-finite verbal forms: u-tag dug to decorate
< u= tag-= : hand=ABS touch=TL=ABS to do hand touching, see also ex. (175)
below in Lesson 9, section 9.3.
92
Non-finite verbal forms and relative clauses
Sumerian non-finite verbal forms can function both as verbal adjectives and
as verbal nouns. Unlike in many other languages, these two functions are not
distinguished morphologically in Sumerian. Used as averbal adjective they
modify ahead noun in P2 of anoun phrase, or form apredicate with the copula,
see, e.g., ex. (99) above, exx. (100) and (131) below.
(100) BM 106451 7 (Umma, 21st c.) (P200743)
lu-am
lu-==am-
false-TL=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
(Lu-Suena declared:) This is false!
Used as averbal noun, they function as nouns that take cases. In ex. (101) below
the present-future non-finite form of the verb du to build, together with its
object, e house, temple, functions as averbal noun. It is the left-dislocated
possessor of the word ikim sign, and consequently is in the genitive.
e-gu du-da
e=u= du-ed=ak
house=1.SG.POSS=ABS build-PF=GEN
ikim-be ga-ra-ab-um
ikim=be= S2ga-S6r-S7a-S11b-S12um
sign=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS MOD-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give
I promise to give you the ominous sign concerning the building of my temple.
In ex. (102) below again the present-future non-finite form of the verb du to
build, together with its object, e house, temple, functions as averbal noun.
Here, however, it functions as anon-finite complement clause of the verb to
say, and is in the locative2 case.
e-a-ne du-da ma-an-dug
e=ane= du-ed=a S4m-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14
house=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS build-PF=L2.NH VEN-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
He ordered me to build his temple.
In ex. (103) below the preterite non-finite form of the verb sa to barter,
together with its object sa slave, functions as a verbal noun. It is the
possessor of the expression lu inim-ma witness, and consequently is in the
genitive.
93
LESSON 7
(103) NG 51 rev. 3 (Umma, 21st c. BCE) (P131780)

lu inim-ma sa sa-a-e mu-ne-ra-e
P1 [lu inim=ak] P3 [sa= sa-a=ak]=e S4mu-S6nn-S8a-S9ta-S12e-S14
P1 [man word= GEN ] P3 [head= ABS buy- PT=GEN ]=TERM VEN-3.PL-DAT-ABL-leave-3.SG.S
(Two persons) came forward as witnesses against them that the slave had been
bought.
Non-finite verbal forms that function as averbal adjective and modify ahead
noun in P2 of a noun phrase are discussed in section 7.3 of this lesson as
examples of non-finite relative clauses.
7.2 The subordinator suffix (Slot 15)
The last structural position of the finite verb, S15, accommodates the
subordinator suffix -/a/. Although it attaches to the verb as the last
constituent of the clause, it affects in fact not the verb but the clause. It
transforms the clause of the verb into asubordinate clause which may then
function either as acomplement clause, having the properties of anoun and
taking acase, or as arelative clause, occupying P2, the position of the modifier
in anoun phrase. The finite relative clauses are discussed in section 7.3 of this
lesson.
Exx. (104) and (105) below are examples of subordinate clauses functioning
as complement clauses. In both examples the subordinate clauses function as
possessors. In ex. (104) the subordinate clause is aleft-dislocated possessor,
while in ex. (105) the subordinate clause occupies P3 of the noun phrase whose
head is the expression lu inim-ma witness. Note the functional and
structural similarity between the constructions in ex. (103) and ex. (105): in the
former the possessor is anon-finite verbal form used as averbal noun, in the
latter the possessor is asubordinate clause used as acomplement clause.
94

nu-siki nu-ma-ku, lu a tuku,
nusiki numaku= lu a= tuku-=ra
orphan widow=ABS person arm=ABS have-TL-DAT.H
nu-na-a-a-a, dnin-ir-su-da,iri-ka-gi-na-ke,
S1nu-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12a~a-S14e-S15a=ak ninirsuk=da irikagenak=e

NEG-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.P-place-3.SG.A-SUB=GEN DN=COM PN=ERG
inim-be ka e-da-kee
inim=be=e kag= S2i-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12kee-S14
word=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH mouth=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-bind-3.SG.P
Iri-kagina made an agreement with Ningirsu that he would not surrender the
orphan or the widow to the powerful.
(105) NG 11 obv. 1314 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111315)
lu inim-ma ekiri,
P1[lu inim=ak] P3[kiri=

P1[person word=GEN] P3[garden=ABS
ur-dnane-ra ba-na-gid-da-me
ur-nanek=ra S5ba-S6nn-S7a-S12gid-S14-S15a=ak]==me-e
PN=DAT.H MID-3.SG.H-DAT-long-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN]=ABS-COP-3.PL.S
They were the witnesses that the garden was measured out for Ur-Nanshe.
Causal subordination may be expressed with a construction involving
asubordinate finite clause used as acomplement clause: P1bar P3[complement
clause]=ak=P5a (outside [complement clause]=GEN=L2.NH) or P1mu
P3[complement clause]=ak=P5e (name [complement clause]=GEN=TERM)
because of as in ex. (106) below (with bar), and in ex. (231) (with mu) in
Lesson 11, section 11.4 below.
bar e-be nu-da-su-su-da-ka
bar e=be= S1nu-S2i-S5b-S8da-S12su~su-S13ed-S14-S15a=ak=a
outside grain=DEM=ABS NEG-FIN-3.SG.NH-COM-repay~PF-PF-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=L2.NH
As this (amount of) barley cannot not be repaid, .
95
LESSON 7
7.3 Relative clauses
A relative clause states something about ahead noun which is coreferent with
one of the participants in the relative clause. In Sumerian, ahead noun may be
modified by two varieties of relative clauses: clauses containing afinite verb
and clauses containing a non-finite verb. In both cases the relative clause
follows the noun. In the following, the first type will be referred to as afinite
relative clause and the second type as anon-finite relative clause.
In finite relative clauses, the finite verb of the clause is suffixed as arule
with the subordinator suffix -/()a/ in S15, and the subordinate clause occupies
the modifier position of the noun phrase (= P2) whose head (= P1) is the
relativized noun, as in exx. (107)-(110), and (112) below. In non-finite relative
clauses, the verbal form is anon-finite verbal form: in exx. (114), (115), and
(118) atenseless, in exx. (111), (113), (116) and (117) apreterite, and in ex. (119)
apresent-future non-finite verb. The non-finite relative clause also occupies
the modifier position of the noun phrase whose head is the relativized noun.
The Aof the non-finite verbal form may be expressed either by anoun
phrase in the ergative case preceding the verbal form as in ex. (117), or by
anoun phrase in the genitive case, as the possessor of the relativized noun as
in exx. (113) and (116). The former construction is often called as the
mesanepada-construction in the literature after the personal name me-an-
ne-pad-da (me an=e pad-a : young.man DN=ERG find-PT young man chosen
by An).
Less frequently the possessor of the relativized noun expresses the indirect
object of the verb as in ex. (118) below, which is aheadless non-finite relative
clause.
Note that in finite relative clauses the syntactic function of the head noun
within the relative clause is marked in Sumerian not with arelative pronoun
but with apronominal affix of the finite verb. In ex. (107) below, for example,
the head noun gur-gur kug lu-a gurgur vessel of purified silver functions
as the source from which the god consumes the oil. This syntactic function is
indicated merely by the composite ablative prefix S5b-S9ta in the verbal prefix-
chain of the subordinate finite verb. The relative clause occupies P2 of the noun
phrase, whose head is gur-gur kug lu-a, the relativized noun. The case-
marker in P5 marks the syntactic function of the whole noun phrase in the main
clause.
96

gur-gur kug lu-a i itud!-da
P1[gurgur kug luh-a=ak] P2[i itud=ak=
P1 [vessel silver clean- PT= GEN ] P2 [oil month=GEN=ABS
dnin-ir-su-ke ab-ta-gu-a,
ninirsuk=e S2a-S5b-S9ta-S12gu-S14e-S15a]=P5
DN=ERG FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-eat-3.SG.A-SUB]=P5ABS
mu-na-dim
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dim-S14
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-create-3.SG.P
(For the god Ningirsu, En-metena) fashioned agurgur vessel of purified silver,
from which Ningirsu consumes the monthly oil (offering).
u-ni-al-dugud, kindagal, nam-nu-banda3 e-ag-ga,
P1 unialdugud P1 kindagal P2 [namnubanda eag=ak=
P1 PN P1 chief.barber P2 [overseership inner.room= GEN=ABS
an-na-ta-a, KIB mu-dim-dim

S2a-S6nn-S7a-S12ta-S14-S15a]=P5e KIB= S4mu-S11n-S12dim~dim-S14
FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-add-3.SG.S-SUB]=P5ERG nail=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-create~PL-3.SG.P
Shuni-aldugud, the chief barber, to whom the office of the personal quarters
overseer was also given, fashioned numerous inscribed clay nails.
ensi, inim bi-ib-gi-gi-a
ensik [inim= 10
P1 P2 S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gi~gi-S14e-S15a](=P5ak)
P1ruler P2[word=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-return~PF-3.SG.A-SUB](=P5GEN)
The ruler who withdraws (the regular offerings), .
ud ki-ar-ra ma-ra-ta-e-a
P1 ud P2 [kiar=a S4mu-S6r-S7a-S9ta-S10e-S12e-S14-S15a]=P5
P1light P2[horizon=L2.NH VEN-2.SG-DAT-ABL-L2-leave-3.SG.S-SUB]=P5ABS
The daylight that had risen for you on the horizon .
10 This noun phrase is the first in a sequence of noun phrases standing in apposition to each
other. Only the last of these noun phrases is case-marked with the genitive, which is to be
understood as the case-marker of all noun phrases in the sequence.
97
LESSON 7
(111) Nabi-Enlil to Iter-pisha 1 ( (Nippur, 19th c.)11

lugal dutu-gen kalam-ma-na e-a-ra
P1lugal P2[utu=gen kalam=ane=a e-a]=P5ra
P1 king P2 [DN=EQU land=3. SG .H.POSS =L 2. NH leave- PT]=P5DAT.H
(Say) to the king who rose over his land like divine Utu!
Exx. (112) and (113) below are instructive about the interchangeability of finite
and non-finite relative clauses; the same idiom is expressed as afinite relative
clause in the former, and as anon-finite relative clause in the latter.
inim dnane-e mu-na-dug-ga-a,
P1 inim P2 [nane=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14-S15a]=P5e
P1word P2[DN=ERG VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P-SUB]=P5TERM
sa sig ba-i-ar
sa sig-= S5ba-S9i-S12n-S13ar-S14
head low-TL=ABS MID-TERM-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
Lit. He set alow head to the words that Nanshe told him = He accepted what
Nanshe told him.
(113) Gudea Cyl. A 12:14-15 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (ETCSL 2.1.7)
inim dug-ga dnin-ir-su-ka-e,
P1inim P2[dug-a] P3[ninirsuk=ak]= P5e

P1 word P2 [speak-PT] P3[DN=GEN]=P5TERM
sag sig ba-i-ar

He accepted what was told by Ningirsu.
There seems to be no restriction on the syntactic function of the participants to
be relativized: the relativized noun is the Ain exx. (109), (114), and (118); the S in
exx. (110), (111) and (115); the P in exx. (112), (113), (116), and (117), the indirect
object in ex. (108); aplace adverbial in exx. (107) (in the ablative) and (119) (in
the locative1).
arad ni tuku, nin-a-na-kam
P1 arad P2 [ni= tuku-] P3[nin=ane=ak]==am-
P1slave P2[fear=ABS have-TL] P3[lady=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN]=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
(Gudea) is the reverent (lit. who has fear [of gods]) slave of his lady.
11 This Old Babylonian literary letter is published by Kleinerman and Gadotti (2013: 154162).
98

kisal ma-na
P1 kisal P2[ma-]=ane=a
P1 courtyard P2[great-TL]=3.SG.H.POSS=L1
in her main courtyard
dumu tud-da, da-tum-dug-ke
P1dumu P2[tud-a] P3[atumdug=ak]=P5e

P1 child P2 [bear-PT] P3[DN=GEN]=P5ERG
the child born by the goddess Gatumdug
dumu an kug-ge tud-da
P1dumu P2[an kug=e tud-a]=P5
P1 child P2 [DN holy= ERG bear-PT]=P5ABS
the child born by the holy god An
(118) E-ana-tum 4 1:910 (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222460)
kur gu ar-ar, dnin-ir-su-ka-ke
P2[kur=e gu= ar~ar-] P3[ninirsuk=ak]=P5e

P2 [kur=L 3. NH neck= ABS place~ PL- TL] P3[DN=GEN]=P5ERG
who makes all the foreign lands submit to Ningirsu
kur eerin-na lu nu-ku-ku-da
P1[kur erin=ak] P2[lu= nu-ku~ku-ed]=P5a
P1 [mountain cedar= GEN ] P2 [man= ABS NEG -enter~PF-PF]=P5L1
into the mountain of cedars which no one is to penetrate
Even possessors of verbal participants may be relativized, as shown by the
following examples:
(120) NG 215 obv. 1:5 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131762)

lu 3 uku-be i-la-a
P1[lu 3] P2[ukur=be= S2i-S12la-S14-S15a=]=P5e
P1 [man 3] P2 [prebend=3.SG .NH.POSS =ABS FIN -small-3.SG.S-SUB]=P5ERG
the three men whose subsistence land was curtailed
99
LESSON 7

e me-lem-be an-ne us-sa
P1 e P2 [melem=be= an=e us-a]=(P5e)12
P1house P2[halo=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS heaven=L3.NH next.to-PT]=(P5TERM)
(Towards) the temple whose halo reaches to heaven
The relative clauses play an important role in the interclausal syntax of
Sumerian as temporal subordination is usually expressed with the construction
P1noun P2[relative clause]=P5case-marker: P1ud P2[relative clause]=P5a (day
[relative clause]=L1) on the day when ; P1eer P2[relative clause]= P5ta (back
[relative clause]=ABL) after . Occasionally the head noun may be missing
from these constructions.
7.4 Nonfinite verbal forms expressing a purpose
A special construction with the present-future non-finite verbal form is used

as asubordinate clause expressing agoal or purpose. The present-future non-
finite verbal form is used in this construction as a verbal noun and is
case-marked with the non-human dative case-marker =/e/. There is no
difference between constructions in which the Aof the subordinate clause is
the same as the A, see ex. (122), or S, see ex. (123 ), of the main clause, and
constructions in which the Ais different from the Aof the main clause, see exx.
(124) and (125) below.
Functionally these constructions are comparable to infinitives. Note that
the phenomenon that the morpheme used to express the infinitive is the same
as the one used to mark the indirect object is attested in other languages, for
example in English: cf. to do, and he gave it to him.
e dnin-ir-su-ka du-de,
e ninirsuk=ak= du-ed=e
house DN=GEN=ABS build-PF=DAT.NH
12 This noun phrase is the first in asequence of noun phrases standing in apposition to each
other. Only the last of these noun phrases is case-marked with the terminative, which is to be
understood as the case-marker of all noun phrases in the sequence.
100
gu-de-a iri-ne ir-suki-e gu mu-na-si-si

gudea=ra iri=ane irsu=e gu= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12si~si-S14e
PN=DAT city=3.SG.H.POSS GN=TERM neck=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-fill~PF-3.SG.A
To build the temple of Ningirsu (Magan and Meluhha) gathered for Gudea at his
city Girsu.
a-agaag tum-de, am-ta-bala-e-da
aag= tum-ed=e S2a-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S10e-S12bala-S13ed-S14-S15a
field=ABS bring-PF=DAT.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-L2-cross-PF-3.SG.S-SUB
who crosses (the boundary levees) to take away fields
(124) DP 307 obv. 2:16 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220957)
ku hab-e ak-de, amar-giridki muhaldim-ra,
ku= hab=e ak-ed=e amargirid muhaldim=ra
fish=ABS fish.oil=TERM act-PF=DAT.NH PN cook=DAT.H
en-ig-gal, nu-banda, e-na-um

eniggal nubanda=e S2i-S6nn- S7a- S11n- S12um- S14
PN overseer=ERG FIN-3.SG.H.-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
En-iggal, the overseer, gave fish to Amar-Girid, the cook, so that he (= Amar-
Girid) makes them into fish-oil(?).
(125) SNAT 535 15 (Umma, 21st c.) (P130295)
ur-dal-mu-[a-ke], lugal-uur simug-[ra], a-zi-in dim-e-de
uralmuak=e lugaluur simug=ra azin= dim-ed=e
PN=ERG PN smith=DAT.H axe=ABS create-PF=DAT.NH
1 2/3 ma-na zabar, in-na-an-um
1 2/3 mana zabar= S2i-S6nn- S7a- S11n- S12um- S14
1 2/3 unit bronze=abs FIN-3.SG.H.-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
Ur-Halmusha gave Lugal-ushur, the smith, 1 and 2/3 manas of bronze, to produce
an axe.
Examples like (126) below suggest that when the structure of the prefix-chain
allows it, the composite dative prefix that cross-references the non-finite form
may occur.
u-ub mu-dub
uub= S4mu-S11n-S12dub-S14
mould=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-shake-3.SG.P
101
LESSON 7
eg ad-de ba-ub
eg= ad-ed=e S5b-S7a-S11n-S12ub-S14
brick=ABS dry-PF-DAT.NH 3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.H.A-fall-3.SG.P
He shook the brick mould and left the brick to dry
7.5 Nonfinite verbal forms as adverbial

clauses of time
A special construction involving both the preterite and the present-future non-
finite verbal form is used as asubordinate temporal clause. This construction
was referred to as pronominal conjugation in earlier literature.
Table 7.1
PRETERITE FORMS PRESENT-FUTURE FORMS
PTSTEM-a=u10=ne PFSTEM-ed-a=u10=ne
1.SG
(stem-PT=1.SG.POSS=L4) (stem-PF-SUB=1.SG.POSS=L4)
PTSTEM-a=zu=ne PFSTEM-ed-a=zu=ne
2.SG
(stem-PT=2.SG.POSS=L4) (stem-PF-SUB=2.SG.POSS=L4)
PTSTEM-a=ane=e PFSTEM-ed-a=ane-e
3.SG HUMAN
(stem-PT=3.SG.H.POSS=L3.NH) (stem-PF-SUB=3.SG.H.POSS=L3.NH)
PTSTEM-a=be=e PFSTEM-ed-a=be=e
3.SG NON-HUMAN
(stem-PT=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH) (stem-PF-SUB=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH)
PTSTEM-a=anen=e PFSTEM-ed-a=anene=e
3.PL
(stem-PT=3.PL.POSS=L3.NH) (stem-PF-SUB=3.PL.POSS=L3.NH)
1st and 2nd person plural forms are not attested. The morphological analyis of
these forms is controversial. Being verbal nouns these forms too should be case-
marked with acase. The table above assumes that the 1st and 2nd ps. forms are
case-marked with an enclitic =/ne/, which might be an archaic marker of the
locative, the nominal equivalence of the locative1 verbal prefix /ni/, surviving
only in marginal, non-productive contexts. The 3rd ps. forms are analysed as
being case-marked with the non-human locative3 =/e/.
The use of the subordinator suffix /()a/ with the present-future forms is
unexpected. It may represent asecondary development on the analogy of the
preterite forms starting with a reanalysis of the most frequent 3rd ps. sg.
present-future forms like ku-ku-da-ne (= ku~ku-ed=ane=e) at his entering
as ku~ku-ed-a=ane=e. The preterite forms express anteriority, see ex. (127)
102
below, while the present-future forms express simultaneity, see ex. (128) below,
with the verbal event of the main clause.
(127) Lugalbanda in the mountain cave 241 (ETCSL 1.8.2.1)
nu-a-zu-ne u i-mu-e-da-nu
nu-a=zu=ne u= S2a-S4mu-S6e-S7da-S12nu-S14ed-S16
lie-PT=2.SG.POSS=L4 people=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-COM-lie-PF-3.SG.S
When you have lain down, the people lie down with you.
(128) Nam-mahne 6 2:25 (RIME 3/1.1.12.6) (Lagash, 21st c.) (P234696)
dlamma tar-sir-sir-ra, kisal dba-u-ka ku(REC56)-ku(REC56)-da-ne,
lamma tarsirsir=ak= kisal bau=ak=a ku~ku-ed-a=ane=e
spirit GN=GEN=ABS courtyard DN=GEN=L1 enter~PF-PF-SUB-3.SG.H.POSS=L3.NH
alan-e nin-u, etug-ga-ni-a

alan=e=e nin=u= etug=ane=a
alan=DEM=ERG lady=1.SG.POSS=ABS ear-3.SG.H.POSS=L1
mu-na-ni-ru-gu
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S10ni-S11n-S12rugu-S14e
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1-3.SG.H.P-whitstand-3.SG.A
Whenever the protective spirit of Tarsirsir enters the courtyard of Bau, this
statue will attract my ladys attention towards him.
The verbal stem /du/, the present-future stem of the verb en to go, forms
the 3rd ps. forms of the construction without an -/ed/ and -/a/ suffix:
(129) ABTR 13 rev. 5 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P100201)
[a]-dam-aki-e du-ne-ne
adama=e du=anen=e
GN=TERM go.PF=3.PL.POSS=L3.NH
When they were going to Adamshah.
(130) MVN 22, 71 obv. 8 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P206204)
a-dam-aki-ta du-ne
adama=ta du=ane=e
GN=ABL go.PF=3.SG.H.POSS=L3.NH
When they were coming from Adamshah.
In texts from the first part of the 2nd millennium BCE and in later texts the 3rd
ps. sg. forms are sometimes case-marked with the locative1 or the ablative
instead of the locative3, what may be an interference from Akkadian which
translates these forms with the construction ina + infinitive + genitive pronoun.
103
LESSON 7
Acorrespondence between the Akkadian preposition ina and the Sumerian

locative1 and ablative was well established.
The construction is also attested with the word dili single: dili-u-ne
on my own, I alone, dili-zu-ne on your own, you alone, see ex. (131) below,
dili-ne2 on his own, he alone.
(131) Ibbi-Suen B Segment A37 (ETCSL 2.4.5.2)
dili-zu-ne ma-me-en
dili=zu=ne ma-=-me-en
single=2.SG.POSS=L4 august-TL=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
You alone are august!
Further readings
The word class of adjectives is controversial in Sumerian. Ageneral survey of

the word classes of Sumerian is provided by Black 2002. His arguments for
aseparate word class of adjectives in Sumerian are detailed in Black 2000. He,
and also Jagersma (2010: 267284), assume that Sumerian has aclosed word
class of adjectives.
On the function of the possessor of the head of arelative clause, see Peust
2009. On the archaic locative enclitic, called here locative4, see Krecher 1993:
9698.
Exercises
7.3 Add morphological segmentation and glossing to the excerpt from a votive
inscription of Lugal-zagesi below. Translate the text with the help of Foxvogs
(2016b) glossary. Pay special attention to the genitive constructions used in this
text, and find the constructions where the text uses suspended cliticization. Then
104
go to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/

etcsri/Q001379), click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and
compare your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing.
Lugal-zagesi 1 1:335 (RIME 1.14.20.1) (Uruk, 24th c.) (Q001379)
i3 lugal-zag-ge-si i 20 dutu
i4 lugal unugki-ga i 21 sukkal-ma

i5 lugal kalam-ma i 22 dsuen
i6 iib an-na i 23 agina

i7 lu-ma i 24 dutu
i8 dnisaba i 25 u-a dinana

i9 dumu bu-bu i 26 dumu tud-da
i 10 ensi ummaki i 27 dnisaba
i 11 lu-ma i 28 ga zid gu-a

i 12 dnisaba-ka i 29 dnin-ur-sa
i 13 igi zid bar-ra i 30 lu2 dme-saa-unugki-ga

i 14 an lugal kur-kur-ka i 31 sa a e-a
i 15 ensi-gal i 32 dnin-girim
i 16 den-lil i 33 nin unugki-ga-ka

i 17 etug um-ma i 34 agrig ma
i 18 den-ki i 35 diir-re-ne-ra
i 19 mu pad-da
7.4 Transliterate the text Shu-Suen 12 (RIME 3/2.1.4.12, ex. 2) (Ur, 21st c.) (P226510)
(a copy and aphoto of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla. edu/P226510) with
the help of Volks sign list (2012). Add morphological segmentation and glossing to
the text. Translate the text with the help of Foxvogs (2016b) glossary. Then go to
the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q000996),
click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and compare your glosses
with ETCSRIs glossing. Identify and list the non-finite verbal forms. Can you notice
something about the orthography of the text?
105
LESSON 8
NON-VERBAL PREDICATION
AND OTHER USES OF THE COPULA
In Sumerian there exist two kinds of non-verbal predicates. The more common
type is the one in which the predicate contains averbal copula. If the S of the
non-verbal predicate is in the 3rd ps. sg. then the non-verbal predicate may
occur without acopula in certain contexts. This lesson describes both kinds of
non-verbal predicates, and the various other uses of the copula.
8.1 Copular clauses
The Sumerian copular clause is an intransitive clause which consists of two

main parts: a) the subject and b) anon-verbal predicate. The predicate itself
consists of two parts: i) a structural unit functioning as the predicate
complement (= PC) and ii) acopula.
The Sumerian copula is averbal copula formed from the verb me to be.
It has two forms: the independent and the enclitic copula. The independent
copula is afinite verb with at least one verbal prefix, while the enclitic copula
is attached to the last word of the clause without any prefix. As arule, the
predicate complement is situated next to the copula; if the copula is enclitic,
then it cliticizes to the predicate complement. In copular clauses, where the
constituent next to the copula is the predicate complement, the predicate
complement as arule predicates aproperty about areferential S. Ex. (132)
contains a3rd ps. sg. enclitic copula cliticized to the last unit of the predicate
complement:
ud-ba du-du, saa dnin-ir-su-ka-kam
ud=be=a S[dudu=] PC[saa ninirsuk=ak=]=am-

day=DEM=L1 S [PN=ABS ] PC [official DN= GEN=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
At that time Dudu was the temple administrator of the god Ningirsu.
107
LESSON 8
As other stative verbs in Sumerian, the copula too has only apreterite and
no present-future form. Both the independent and the enclitic copula are
suffixed with the set of pronominal suffixes that are coreferential with the
participant in the absolutive case in preterite tense verbal forms (called Set B
in Table 9.1, in Lesson 9, section 9.1. below). The final /e/ of the copula and the
initial /e/ of the pronominal suffixes are contracted to asingle vowel, which
may have been long.
Table 9.1: Forms of the copula
SINGULAR PLURAL
1ST 2ND 3RD 1ST 2ND 3RD

INDEPENDENT -me-en -me-en -me- -me-enden -me-enzen -me-e
ENCLITIC =me-en =me-en =am- =me-enden =me-enzen =me-e
In the 3rd ps. sg., the enclitic copula uses aspecial stem, the stem /am/ instead
of /me/. The 3rd ps. sg. enclitic copula is written as am(AN) until around 24th
c. BCE, and later as am(A.AN).
If anoun phrase ends in avowel, the vowel of the 3rd ps. sg. enclitic copula
/am/ contracts with the vowel. The contraction is, however, reflected by the
writing only when the preceding morpheme is written with aphonographic
sign as in ex. (133) below. In ex. (134) the enclitic copula follows aword sign,
the copula and the preceding word most probably contracted to /esim/, yet
the writing does not reflect the contraction. In asimilar example, ex. (135),
where the preceding morpheme is written with a phonographic sign, the
contraction is reflected also by the writing.
(133) BM 106540 obv. 3 (Umma, 21st c.) (P200724)
nin-u-um
PC[nin=u=]=am-
PC[sister=1.SG.POSS=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
She is my sister.
naesi-am
PC[esi=]=am-
PC[diorit=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
(The statue) is of diorite.
108
Non-verbal predication and other uses of the copula
(135) Shu-Suen 1 4:44-46 (RIME 3/2.1.4.1) (P227137)

iriki-ba, du-dsuen, diir-be-em
PCs POSS [iri=be=ak] S [usuen=] PC[diir=be=]=am-
PCs POSS [city=3. SG .NH.POSS =GEN ] S [PN= ABS ] PC[god=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
Of their town, Shu-Suen is its protective god.
In literary contexts, see exx. (136) and (137) below, and in personal names of
the 3rd millennium BCE, see ex. (138) below, the copula may use yet another
stem, the stem /(na)nam/. This stem may derive from amodal form of the
copula: na-me- (= MOD-COP-3.SG.S), which became /nam/ after the loss of the
stem final -/e/, and was expanded again pleonastically with the affirmative
epistemic modal prefix /na/-. The form may, at least originally, have expressed
epistemic certainty, see Lesson 16, section 16.2 below.
(136) Lugalbanda in the mountain cave 59 (ETCSL 1.8.2.1) (P227137)
ud-be-a 7 e-na-me-e
ud=be=a PC[7=] S1a-S12i-S12nam-S14e
day=DEM=L1 PC [7= ABS ] MOD-FIN-COP-3.PL.S
At that time there were seven of them.
sukkal en arattaki-ka sukkal an-sig-ga-ri-a
PCs POSS[sukkal en aratta=ak=ak] S[sukkal ansigaria=]
PCs POSS [minister lord GN=GEN =GEN ] S [minister PN= ABS]
mu-ne e-en-na-nam
PC[mu=ane=] S1a-S12i-S12nanam-S14
PC [name=3.SG .H.POSS =ABS ] MOD-FIN-COP-3.SG.S
Now the name of the lord of Arattas minister was minister Ansiga-ria.
(138) BIN 8, 345 obv. 7:6 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221476)
dba-u-na-nam
PC[bau=ak]=nanam-
PC[DN=GEN]=COP-3.SG.S
She/he belongs to Bau.
The S of acopular clause is in the absolutive case. The copula agrees in person
and number with the S. The S of acopular clause may be expressed in three ways:
i) both as an overt lexical noun phrase and by apronominal suffix on the copula,
see, e.g., ex. (132) above; ii) solely by the pronominal suffix on the copula, see,
e.g., ex. (133) above; or iii) both as an independent pronoun and by apronominal
suffix on the copula, see, e.g., ex. (144) below.
109
LESSON 8
As arule, the predicate complement is in the absolutive case. Less frequently

it may be in the genitive, as in exx. (139), (140); ablative (expressing an
instrumental meaning), as in ex. (141); or equative, as in ex. (142) below:
(139) En-ana-tum I 2 rev. 2:5 (RIME 1.9.4.2) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222496)
an-ta-su-ra a-kam
S [antasura=] PC[e=ak]=am-
S[GN=ABS] PC[1.SG.PR=GEN]=COP-3.SG.S
The Antasura is mine!
(140) TCS 1, 177 rev. 2 (unknown, 21st c.) (P145700)
gu-na-kam
PC[gu=ane=ak]=am-
PC[neck=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN]=COP-3.SG.S
It is of his neck. = It is his responsibility.
(141) NG 214 obv. 1:8 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131761)
inim ur-niarar nu-banda-ta-am3
PC[inim urniar nubanda=ak=ta]=am-
PC [word PN overseer= GEN=ABL]=COP-3.SG.S
This was with the permission of Urnigar, the overseer.
(142) TCS 1, 327 obv. 3-4 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111288)
a tug gada-a du-a,
S[a tug gada=a du-=ak=]
S [wage cloth line=L 2. NH go- TL=GEN=ABS]
urimki-ma-gen-nam
PC[urim=ak=gen]=am-
PC[GN=GEN=EQU]=COP-3.SG.S
The wages for walking on cloth and line are as those of Urim.
The independent and the enclitic copula have acomplementary distribution. The
independent form of the copula is used i) when the meaning of the predicate
requires the use of averbal prefix other than the finite-marker prefix (this verbal
prefix is amodal prefix in S1 in ex. [143], while it is the coordinator prefix in S3
in ex. [144]); ii) in subordinate copula clauses, which may be acomplement clause
as in ex. (145), or a relative clause as in ex. (146). In morphosyntactic
environments different to i) and ii), the enclitic copula is used. The enclitic copula
thus occurs in place of anot subordinate independent copula whose prefix-chain
consists exclusively of a finite-marker prefix. It may have come into being
through the syncopation of the finite-marker prefix /i/-. As it often happens, the
original, i.e., the independent form was retained in subordinate contexts.
110
(143) Lugalbanda and the Anzud bird 106 (ETCSL 1.8.2.2)

diir e-me-en
PC [diir=] S1a-S2i-S12me-S14en
PC [god= ABS ] MOD-FIN-COP-2.SG.S
if you are agod, .
(144) Shulgi C 9 (ETCSL 2.4.2.03)
ni-erim-ma usan bar-u-be
PCs POSS[nierim=ak] PC[usan baru=be=]
PCs POSS [evil=GEN] PC[scourge stick=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS]
e in-ga-me-en
S[e=] S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14en
S [1.SG .PR =ABS ] FIN-COOR-COP-1.SG.S
As for all evil, their scourge and stick are also me.
(145) NG 212 obv. 2:4 (Umma, 21st c.) (P142272)
arad dara i-me-a
PC[arad ara=ak=] S2i-S12me-S14-S15a=ak
PC [slave GN= GEN =ABS ] FIN-COP-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN
(Lugalazida is to take the assertory oath) that he (= Lugalitida) is aslave of the
god Shara.
(146) ASJ 4, p. 141, no. 6 obv. 2 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P102167)
ud tur5-ra i3-me-a
ud PC [tur-a=] S2i-S12me-S14-S15a=a
day PC[ill-PT=ABS] FIN-COP-3.SG.S-SUB=L1
When he was ill.
Non-verbal predicates may be negated in two ways: i) The negative equivalent
of acopular clause with a3rd ps. sg. S and an enclitic copula is negated solely
with the negative particle /nu/- and the negative clause contains no copula;
ii) if the S is not in the 3rd ps. sg. and/or the copula is not enclitic, then the clause
is negated with an independent copula prefixed with the negation prefix /nu/-.
In ex. (147) below the first clause is negated with the particle /nu/-, while
the second is negated with an independent copula prefixed with the negation
particle /nu/-; see also exx. (507) and (508) below in Lesson 16, exercise 16.3.
alan-e, u kug nu
S [alan=e=] u PC [kug=] nu
S[statue=DEM=ABS] and PC[silver=ABS] NEG
111
LESSON 8
za-gin nu-ga-am
PC[zagin=] S1nu- S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14
PC [lapis.lazuli=ABS ] NEG-FIN-COOR-COP-3.SG.S
This statue is of neither silver nor lapis lazuli.
The affirmative equivalent of the first clause would contain the 3rd ps. sg. form
of the enclitic copula (*kug==am- : silver=ABS=COP-3.SG.S), while the affirmative
equivalent of the second clause would contain an independent copula because
of the presence of acoordinator prefix in S3 (*S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14 : FIN-COOR-
COP-3.SG.S). The difference in the way the two clauses are negated in ex. (147) is
thus conditioned by the form of the copula in the corresponding affirmative
clauses.
Non-verbal predicates may be used to express arange of semantic relations.
In English, for example, the same verb, the verb to be, is used to express
identity, attribution, possession, benefaction, and location. In Sumerian, only
the first four of the semantic relations mentioned are expressed with the
copular verb me to be, while for location adifferent verb, the verb al to
exist somewhere, is used.
8.2 Nonverbal predicates without a copula
If the S is in the 3rd ps. sg., then the non-verbal predicate may occur without
acopula in certain grammatical environments. There are four grammatical
environments in which the non-verbal predicate is attested to omit the copula:
i) copular clauses functioning as proper names (names of persons, statues etc.)
in which the S is an overt lexical noun; ii) seal inscriptions; iii) the negated
counterpart of copular clauses in which the S is in the 3rd ps. sg. and the copula
is enclitic (see the previous subsection above); iv) interrogative clauses.
In proper names consisting of anon-verbal predicate the copula may be
omitted if the S of the clause is an overt lexical noun, as in exx. (148) and (149)
below. If the S is not an overt lexical noun, then the copula is present, as shown
by ex. (150) below.
(148) UET 2, 338 rev. 2:2 (Ur, 28th c.) (P005925)
ama-etin
S[ama=] PC[etin=]
S[mother=ABS] PC[wine=ABS]
The-mother-is-wine
112
(149) Amar-Suena 20 1 (RIME 3/2.1.3.20) (Ur, 21st. c) (P200450)

nin-he2-du7
S[nin=] PC[hedu=]
S[lady=ABS] PC[ornament=ABS]
The-lady-is-an-ornament
(150) Nam-mahne 11 9 (RIME 3/1.1.12.11) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P234704)
dutu-kam
PC[utu=ak]=am-
PC[DN=GEN]=COP-3.SG.S
He-is-Utus
In seal inscriptions ending with the your slave formula, which functions as
the predicate, the copula never occurs, as in ex. (151) below.
(151) Shulgi 86 (RIME 3/2.1.2.86) (unknown, 21st c.) (P226941)
ba-qar-tum, dumu-munus lugal, dul-gi-i-li, arad-zu
baqartum dumumunus lugal=ak= S[ulgiili=] PC[arad=zu=]

PN1 daughter king=GEN=ABS S[PN2=abs] PC[slave=2SG.POSS=ABS]
Baqartum, the kings daughter: Shulgi-ili is your slave.
If the S of an interrogative clause is in the 3rd ps. sg., then the copula may be
dropped. In ex. (152) below the first clause is interrogative, while the second
one is declarative; the S of both clauses is in the 3rd ps. sg. In the first clause,
the copula after the predicate is omitted, while in the second one the predicate
complement is followed by acopula. The presence of the copula in the first
clause is thus conditioned by the type of the clause. (In ex. [152] the sentence-
initial interrogative pronoun is accompanied by acopula. The structure and
function of forms like this is discussed in Lesson 5 above.)
(152) Enlil and Nam-zid-tara 23-24 (ETCSL 5.7.1)
a-ba-am3 mu-zu,
aba==am- PC[mu=zu=]
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S PC[name=2.SG.POSS=ABS]
nam-zid-tar-ra mu-u10-um
S[namzidtara=] PC[mu=u=]=am-
S [PN=ABS ] PC[name=1.SG.POSS=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
What (lit. who) is your name? My name is Nam-zid-tara.
113
LESSON 8
8.3 Copular biclausal constructions
Copular clauses may be used as parts of biclausal constructions. In Sumerian

copular biclausal constructions the initial clause is always acopular clause. The
verb of the second clause is typically afinite, non-copular verb, but occasionally
the second clause too may be copular. The defining characteristic of copular
biclausal constructions is that one of the participants of the copular clause and
one of the participants of the other clause are coreferential. The shared
participant may occur as an overt noun phrase only in the initial copular clause,
and is present only in the form of apronominal affix on the (verbal) predicate
in the second clause.
A typical example is ex. (153) below, in which the S of the copular clause
functions as P in the second, non-copular clause. The shared participant is li
juniper, which is referred to by apronominal suffix in S14 of the finite verb
in the second clause. The two component clauses of this construction could be
used separately without any modification as simple sentences. In sentences like
ex. (153) the predicate of the initial copular clause may be interpreted as an
attributive apposition or as an attributive relative clause of the shared
participant, as shown also by the second, non-literal translation.
lie u sikil kur-ra-kam
S [li=] PC [u sikil kur=ak=]=am-
S[juniper=ABS] PC[plant pure mountain=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
izi-a bi-si-si
izi=a S5b-S10i-S11n-S12si~si-S14
fire=L2.NH 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-fill~PL-3.SG.P
Lit. The juniper is the pure plant of the mountains; he (= Gudea) put it onto the
fire.
= He put juniper, (which is) the pure plant of the mountains, onto the fire.
In relative clauses of non-copular verbs, the relative clause is syntactically
subordinate, formally marked with the subordinator suffix -/a/, as in ex. (154)
below.
inim dnane-e mu-na-dug4-ga-a,
P1inim P2[nane=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14-S15a]=P5e
P1 word P2 [DN= ERG VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P-SUB]=P5TERM
114
sa sig ba-i-ar
Lit. He set alow head to the words that Nanshe told him = He accepted what
Nanshe told him.
Copular clauses may also be used in similar constructions. In ex. (155) below
the head of the copular relative clause (ab cow) is the possessor of the
predicate complement of the copular clause. The copular clause is subordinated,
formally marked with the subordination suffix in S15, and consequently the
copula uses its independent form.
(155) NG 137 obv. 7 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131782)
ab a-bar-tur mu-be i-me-a
P1ab P2[S[abartur=] PC[mu=be=] S3i-S12me-S14-S14a]=P5
P1 cow [
P2 S [PN=ABS ] PC [name=3.SG .NH.POSS =ABS ] FIN-COP-3.SG.S-SUB]=ABS
the cow whose name is Shabar-tur
Subordinate copular relative clauses like ex. (155) may, however, be formed
only if the relativized constituent is different from the S of the copular clause.
Subordinate copular relative clauses in which the relativized constituent is the
S of the copular clause do not exist in Sumerian; they are substituted by
biclausal constructions like ex. (153) above. To put it simply, the sentence John,
who is asailor, built ahouse may only be said in Sumerian as John is asailor;
he built a house. In constructions like ex. (153) above, the copular clause
functions as paratactic, i.e., syntactically non-subordinate, copular relative
clause; its predicate functions only to provide some additional information
about the shared participant.
In Lesson 5 (section 5.1) above it was mentioned that only participants
functioning as identificational focus or contrastive topic are referred to by
independent pronouns. Because of this rule, appositional constructions with
apronominal head, e.g., I, the shepherd, do not exist in Sumerian: ex. (156)
below would be ungrammatical in Sumerian, acopular biclausal construction
is used instead, see ex. (157) below.
(156)
*e-e sipad-e e mu-du
e sipad=e e= S4mu-S11-S12du-S14
1.SG.PR shepherd=ERG house=ABS VEN-1.SG.A-build-3.SG.P
I, the shepherd, have built the temple.
115
LESSON 8

sipad-me e mu-du
PC [sipad=]=me-en e= S4mu-S11-S12du-S14
PC [shepherd= ABS ]=COP -1. SG .S house=ABS VEN -1.SG.A-build-3.SG.P
I am shepherd, I have built the temple. = I, who am ashepherd, have built the
temple. = I, the shepherd, have built the temple.
8.4 The copula functioning as standard marker
In some of its occurrences the 3rd ps. sg. enclitic copula =/am-/ lends itself
easily to atranslation with the preposition like:
(158) Iddin-Dagan A172 (ETCSL 2.5.3.1)
lugal diir-am ag-be-a mu-un-da-an-til
lugal= diir==am- ag=be=a S4mu-S6n-S7da-S10n-S12til-S14
king=ABS god=ABS=COP-3.SG.S heart=3.SG.NH.POSS=L1 VEN-3.SG-COM-L1.SYN-live-3.SG.S
Lit. The king is agod; he lives with her in it. = The king, (who is) agod, lives
with her in it. = The king lives with her (= the goddess Ninegala) in it like agod.
The ancient scribes already recognized this usage. In agrammatical text from
the first millennium BCE (NGBT IX l. 270-271 in MSL 4: 175), the enclitic copula
is equated with the Akkadian preposition kma like.
It was discussed in Lesson 3 above that in similative constructions, which
express sameness of manner, and equative constructions, which express
sameness of extent, the standard marker is as a rule the equative enclitic
=/gen/. In ex. (158) above, which in essence is asimilative construction, the
predicate complement with the copula appears to be interpreted as the
standard with its marker.
Ex. (158) may be considered acopular biclausal construction (see the second
translation given to it above). There exists, however, examples which may be
not be construed as consisting of acopular and anon-copular clause.
In ex. (159) below the constituent ag enlil=ak the heart of the god Enlil
is in the ergative case, the case required by the transitive verb of the second
clause. Should this constituent still function as the S of the copular clause the
heart of the god Enlil is the river Tigris, then it would be in the absolutive case.
Consequently, this example is not biclausal, the morpheme =/am/ functions in
it truly as astandard marker (= STM), but not as the predicate of acopular clause.
In other words, the original enclitic copula changed its function and became
116
grammaticalized as astandard marker. Ex. (158) above should probably be

interpreted similarly, but in this example the change in the grammatical
function of the enclitic copula may not be recognized, as the word lugal king
would be in the absolutive both in the copular and the non-copular clause.
ag en-lil-la-ke id2idigna-am
ag enlil=ak=e idigna=am
heart DN=GEN=ERG WN=STM
a dug-ga nam-de
a dug-= S2na-S4m-S11b-S12de-S14
water sweet-PT=ABS MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH.A-bring-3.SG.P
The heart of the god Enlil brought sweet water like the river Tigris.
The use of =/am/ as standard marker appears to be restricted to literary texts,
suggesting that it belonged to a higher register; and it is used as standard
marker only in similative constructions.
8.5 The copula functioning as focus marker
In copular clauses, the constituent next to the copula is mostly the predicate
complement. The order of the predicate complement and the S may, however,
sometimes be inverted, as in the second clause of ex. (160) below.
ama nu-tuku-me
PC [ama nu-tuku-]=me-en
PC[mother NEG-have-TL]=COP-1.SG.S
ama-u ze-me
PC [ama-u=] S[ze=]=me-en
PC[mother=1.SG.POSS=ABS] S[2.SG.PR=ABS]=COP-2.SG.S
I am someone who has no mother, my mother is you (and no one else).
Copular clauses with an inverted word order do not predicate aproperty about
a referential S. Such clauses do something fundamentally different; they
exhaustively identify the referent of adescription by naming it. So, in ex. (160)
the description my mother is identified as you (and no one else). The S next
117
LESSON 8
to the copula functions thus as the identificational focus of the copular clause,
i.e., [i]t indicates that the focus denotation is the only one that leads to atrue
proposition (Krifka 2007: 33). Copular clauses like the second one in ex. (160)
are called specificational in linguistics.
Ex. (161) below is a copular biclausal construction in which the initial
copular clause is specificational. The shared participant is I, which is referred
to by apronominal suffix in S14 of the finite verb in the second clause.
Copular biclausal constructions in which the copular clause is
specificational are to be translated and interpreted as cleft clauses. The
constituent next to the copula, see exx. (161) and (162), or asubconstituent of
the constituent next to the copula, see ex. (163) below, functions as the
identificational focus of the clause.
(161) Hoe and Plough 147 (ETCSL 5.3.1)
e26-e-me-en mu-sar-ra a bi-ib-sig-sig-ge-en
S [e=]=me-en musar=a a= S5b-S10i-S11b-S12sig~sig-S14en
S[1.SG.PR=ABS]=COP-1.SG.S plot=L2.NH water=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-put~PL-1.SG.A
It is me who puts water in all the plots.
siki udu gan-na-kam
S [siki udu gan-=ak=]=am-
S[wool sheep bear-TL=GEN=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S
u-a mi-ni-ar-ar
u=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ar~ar-S14
hand=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-put~PL-3.SG.P
(He undid the tongue of the goad and the whip;) it was wool from lamb-bearing
sheep that he placed instead in all hands.
In ex. (163) below the constituent next to the copula is the noun phrase
udu=u= (sheep=1.SG.POSS=ABS) my sheep. From the context, however, it is
clear, that the focus is in fact its subconstituent, the enclitic possessive pronoun
=/u/ my, as Turam-ili intends to defend himself against accusations that he
has given someone elses sheep to Sulalum.
(163) NG 138 rev. 7 (Umma, 21st c.) (P200731)
udu-u-um su-la-lum-ra in-na-um
S [udu=u=]=am- sulalum=ra S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11-S12um-S14
S[sheep=1.SG.POSS=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S PN=DAT.H FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-1.SG.A-give-3.SG.P
(Turam-ili declared:) I gave MY sheep to Sulalum.
118
Further readings
For adetailed description of all uses of the copula in Sumerian see now Zlyomi
2014c.
For similative and equative constructions in Sumerian see Svegjrt 2011.
Exercises
8.3 Translate with the help of Foxvogs (2016b) or Volks (2012) glossary, and assign
morphemic segmentation and glossing to the following examples.
a) iriki-ba, du-dsuen, diir-be-em
b) da-du makim-be-em
c) (S = you)
dnin-lil-la i-li ag-ga-na-me-en
d) (S = you)
en za-e-me-en lugal za-e-me-en
e) (A = he)
mer-ra-ga-i-ir, dumu nibruki-kam,
ur-sag-ga, a-mu-na-um-mu
f) (A of the finite clause = I)
sipad-me e mu-du
g) (A of the finite clause = it [= the Eninnu temple])
dutu-am an-ag-ge im-si
h) (A of the finite clause = he [= king Shulgi])
eme zid-dam kurun kug mu-un-il
i) (A of the finite clause = I)
ab-ba-kal-la ur-me-ra e-e-me a-na-um
119
LESSON 8
8.4 Translate the following clauses into Sumerian. Provide only the morphemic
segmentation and glossing.
a) At that time Gudea was the ruler of Lagash.
b) As for Ningirsu, the ruler is aman of his heart.
c) I, the king, built the great temple of my mighty gods.
d) Who are you?
e) Ningirsu was the mighty god of Gudea, ruler of Lagash.
f) The ruler of Lagash is you.
g) They are the seven royal judges.
h) She was kind.
i) She is not my wife.
j) You are not the king of Ur.
k) He is not the king of Ur.
l) They are not the citizen of Ur either.
m) Of his temple, Ningirsu is its god.
n) Like adonkey, he carried gold.
8.5 Analyse and translate the following excerpt from aliterary text with the help of
Foxvogs (2016b) or Volks (2012) glossary. Add the missing morphemic glossing to
the lines. Explain the use of the various kinds of copular clauses and of the
independent pronouns.
za-e-me-en en ki a
S [ze=]=me-en PC [en ki= aj-
dinana-me-en
inanak=ak=]=me-en
dili-zu-ne ma-me-en
dili=zu=ne PC[ma-=]=me-en
dinana-ke ur kug-ga-ne-e zid-de-e
inanak=e ur kug=ane=e zid-=e
mu-un-pad-de-en ki a2-a2-ne-me-en
S4mu-S11n-S12pad-S14en PC[ki= a-=ane=]=me-en
sig-ta igi-nim-e en gal-be za-e-me-en
sig=ta iginim=e PC[en gal=be=] S[ze=]=me-en
e26-e us-sa-zu-me-en,
S[e=] PC[us-a=zu=]=me-en
120
a ru-a-ta gaba-ri-zu nu-me-en

a= ru-a=ta PC[gabari=zu=] S1nu-S2i-S12me-S14en
e gal za-e-me-en
PC[e gal-=] S[ze=]=me-en
e-e nu-mu-da-sa-e-en ud da-ri2-e3

S [e=] S1 nu-S4 mu- e-
S6 S8 da-S12 sa-S14 en ud dari=e
121
LESSON 9
VERBAL TENSE
This lesson describes the formal means used to distinguish the preterite and
present-future tense in Sumerian. It also discusses the prefix of anteriority /u/
in S1, because of the prefixs role in expressing the relative time of the verbal
event in Sumerian.
9.1 The formal marking of the tenses
In the indicative mood Sumerian finite verbal forms distinguish two verbal tenses:
present-future (= PF) and preterite (PT). Sumerian has arelative tense system:
the verbal form called here the present-future denotes actions that are not ante-
rior, but simultaneous or posterior, relative to agiven reference point. The verbal
form called the preterite denotes actions anterior relative to agiven reference
point. The opposition between the present-future and the preterite is neutralized
in verbal forms denoting permanent states, as verbs used in astative meaning
always use the preterite tense. The terms present-future and preterite are kept
here as convenient labels used for referring to the two tenses of Sumerian.
Formally the two tenses are distinguished either i) solely by agreement
patterns involving the affixes in S11 and S14, or ii) by acombination of i) with
either or both of the following grammatical devices: a) the form of the verbal
stem in S12, or b) the suffix -/ed/, amarker of present-future, in S13.
In exx. (165) and (166) the same verb um to give is in preterite and
present-future, respectively. In (165) the Ais expressed with apronominal prefix
in S11, while in (166) it is expressed by apronominal suffix in S14. Both the
preterite and the present-future verbal forms use the same simple stem um.
gu-ti-umki den-lil-le ma-an-um
The god Enlil has given Gutium to me.
123
LESSON 9
(166) Gudea Statue B 7:21-23 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)

gu3-de2-a, alan-e, inim im-ma-um2-mu
gudea=e alan=e inim= S2i-S4m-S5b-S6a-S12um-S14e
PN=ERG statue=DAT.NH word=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-give-3.SG.A
Gudea entrusted the statue with the (following) message: .
Exx. (167)(169) use the same verb gi to return. Exx. (167) and (168) contain
transitive verbal forms, which differ both in their agreement pattern (in the
former the Ais expressed with apronominal prefix in S11, while in the latter
with apronominal suffix in S14), and in the form of the verbal stem (the former
uses the simple stem /gi/, while the latter the reduplicated stem /gi~gi/). In
ex. (168) both the agreement pattern and the use of the reduplicated stem
signals the present-future tense.
dumu ama i-ni-gi
dumu= ama=ra S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
child=ABS mother=L2.H FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.A-return-3.SG.P
He let the child return to (his) mother.
ensi, inim bi-ib-gi-gi-a
ensik inim= S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gi~gi-S14e-S15a
ruler word=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-return~PF-3.SG.A-SUB
The ruler, who revokes these (offerings), .
Ex. (169), which is afinite relative clause, contains an intransitive verbal form
in the present-future. Its tense is marked by its agreement pattern (the Subject
is expressed with apronominal suffix in S14), by the form of the verbal stem (it
uses the reduplicated stem /gi~gi/), and by the presence of suffix -/ed/ in S13.
ni-ba-a ba-a-gi-gi-da
niba=u=a S5ba-S10e-S12gi~gi-S13ed-S14-S15a
gift=1.SG.POSS=L2.NH MID-L2-return~PF-PF-3.SG.S-SUB
who revokes my gifts,
Exx. (170), which is afinite relative clause, and ex. (171) contain the verb to
speak in the preterite and present-future, respectively. They differ both in
their agreement pattern (in the former the Ais expressed with apronominal
prefix in S11, while in the latter with apronominal suffix in S14), and in the
form of the verbal stem (the former uses the simple stem /dug/, while the latter
124
Verbal tense
the suppletive stem /e/). In ex. (171) both the agreement pattern and the use
of the suppletive stem signals the present-future tense.
inim lugal-ne, dnin-ir-su-ke
P1[inim] P2[lugal=ane ninirsuk=e

P1[word] P2[king=3.SG.H.POSS DN=ERG
e-na-dug-ga
S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14-S15a]-P5
FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P-SUB]=P5ABS
the commands, Ningirsu, his master, gave him, .
(171) Nam-mahne 6 2:6 (RIME 3/1.1.12.6) (Lagash, 21st c.) (P234696)
sizkur-u e-na-be
sizkur-u= S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12e-S14e
pray=1.SG.POSS=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.H.-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A
May it (= this statue) pray to her on my behalf (lit. tell my pray)!
The pronominal affixes which are involved in the agreement pattern of the
tenses may be arranged into three sets, see Table 9.1. below. Slot 11 contains
the final pronominal prefixes (= FPP). Slot 14 may be filled by either of two sets
of suffixes, which differ only in their 3rd ps. forms. Note that in 3rd ps. sg. only
the FPP distinguishes between human and non-human forms, while the
pronominal suffixes in S14 do not.
The 2nd ps. sg. FPP is /e/. In texts from the 3rd millennium BCE the /e/
contracts with the preceding vowel and lengthens it, whereas in texts from the
2nd millennium BCE the contraction results in an //. The exact form of the
1st ps. sg. FPP is uncertain, but its existence can be inferred from the form of
the preceding prefixes.
Sumerian is an ergative language which exhibits split ergativity in its verbal
agreement system. The pronominal cross-referencing system of the preterite
is ergative: both the S of intransitive verbal forms and the P of transitive verbal
forms are cross-referenced by the same set (Set B) of pronominal suffixes in
S14, while the Ais cross-referenced by adifferent set of affixes. The pronominal
cross-referencing system of the present-future is nominative-accusative: Aand
S are cross-referenced with the same set of suffixes (Set A) in S14, except for
the 3rd ps. forms, while P is cross-referenced with the FPPs of S11. In 3rd ps.
sg. and pl. the present-future has atripartite system: A, S, and P are all marked
with different affixes.
125
LESSON 9
Table 9.1
SLOT 11 SLOT 14
FPP SET A SET B
SG. 1 // -/en/ -/en/

SG. 2 /e/ -/en/ -/en/
SG. 3 H /n/ -/e/ -//
SG. 3 NH /b/ -/e/ -//
PL. 1 -/enden/ -/enden/
PL. 2 -/enzen/ -/enzen/
PL. 3 /nn/ -/en/ -/e/
9.2 The preterite
In the preterite S and P, the verbal participants in the absolutive, are cross-
referenced with the suffixes of Set B in S14. In other words, both the S of
intransitive verbal forms and the P of transitive verbal forms are cross-
referenced by the same set of pronominal suffixes in S14 in the preterite.
The agreement pattern of the transitive preterite forms is complex. The
singular Ais cross-referenced by the singular forms of the final pronominal
prefix in S11. The plural Ais cross-referenced by adiscontinuous construction
involving the use of two affixes: the singular forms of the FPP in S11 and the
plural forms of Set B in S14. The verbal form in ex. (172) below is, for example,
a3rd ps. pl. transitive preterite. It contains a3rd ps. sg. human FPP in S11 (/n/),
and a3rd ps. pl. pronominal suffix in S14 (-/e/). These two affixes together
cross-reference the 3rd ps. pl. A. One could say that the FPP in S11 agrees in
gender and person, while the suffix in S14 agrees in number and person with
the Agent. Note that in these plural transitive verbal forms no affix cross-
references the P.
(172) NG 99 rev. 1:34 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111162)
i-bi-la du-du-ke-ne, ka-ga-ne-ne-a ba-ni-gi-in-e
ibila dudu=ak=ene=e kag=anen=a S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12gin-S14e
heir PN=GEN=PL=ERG mouth=3.PL.H.POSS=L1 MID-L1-3.SG.H.A-confirm-3.PL
The heirs of Dudu confirmed this in their account (lit. in their mouths).
126
Verbal tense
The discontinuous construction used to cross-reference a plural A in

Sumerian transitive preterite finite verbs may seem odd for us, but asimilar
construction is also attested in Akkadian, the other main language of the area.
The 3rd ps. pl. subject of the Akkadian finite verb is cross-referenced both by
aprefix and asuffix, cf., e.g., i-kun- (3-place.PT-PL.MASC) they placed. In these
forms the prefix indicates the person, while the suffix indicates the number
and the gender of the subject.
Note that the 3rd ps. pl. FPP /nn/ is not used for cross-referencing Ain
transitive preterite verbal forms. In addition to the discontinuous construction
described in the previous paragraph, a3rd ps. pl. Amay also be cross-referenced
with the 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix /b/ in S11 as in ex. (173) below; see also
ex. (449) in Lesson 15 below.
nam-erim ib-kud
namerim= S2i-S11b-S12kud-S14
oath=ABS FIN-3.SG.NH.A-cut-3.SG.P
(Two persons) took an affirmatory oath.
The agreement pattern of the preterite forms is summarized in Table 9.2 below:
Table 9.2: The preterite agreement pattern
S11 S12 S14

INTRANSITIVE stemPT S (with set B)
TRANSITIVE (SG A) A (with a sg. IPP) stemPT P (with set B)
TRANSITIVE (PL A) A (with a sg. IPP) stemPT A (with a pl. suffix of set B)
9.3 The presentfuture
In present-future forms Aand S are cross-referenced with different sets of

suffixes in S14: Awith Set A, while S with Set B. Note that Set Aand B differs
only in the 3rd ps. forms. P is cross-referenced with an FPP in S11.
In intransitive present-future forms the suffixes of set B cross-referencing
S are preceded by the suffix /ed/ in S13 until the end of the 3rd millennium
BCE, in the 2nd millennium its use becomes less regular. Note that in verbal
forms whose verbal stem has no special present-future form, only the suffix
127
LESSON 9
/ed/ distinguishes the intransitive present-future from the intransitive

preterite as both use Set B in S14 to cross-reference S.
The 3rd ps. pl. FPP /nn/ is attested only in texts from the 24th and 23rd c.
BCE, no more than six times; one of them is ex. (174) below. For cross-
referencing a3rd ps. pl. P, /nn/ is supplanted by the 3rd ps. sg. non-human
prefix /b/ in S11.
(174) FaoS 19, Gir32 rev. 7 (Lagash, 23rd c.) (P213570)
a-mu-ra-ne-um-mu
S1a-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S11nn-S12um-S14e
MOD-VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.PL.P-give-3.SG.A
May he give them to you!
When the participant functioning as P of the transitive present-future verbal
form is a3rd ps. sg. non-human, then the presence of the cross-referencing
prefix /b/ in S11 is not obligatory, as in ex. (175) below. In this example the
participant functioning as P is not cross-referenced by any prefix, the presence
of the 3rd. ps. sg. suffix -/e/ in S14, however, can alone indicate that the verbal
form is transitive.
e-ninnu me-be an ki-a
eninnu=ak me=be=e an ki=a
TN=GEN essence=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH sky earth=L1
pa e mu-ak-ke
pa= e-= S4mu-S10n-S12ak-S14en
branch=ABS leave-TL=ABS VEN-L1.SYN-act-1.SG.A
I will make the grandeur of E-ninnu known everywhere.
This phenomenon is not restricted to transitive present-future forms, it may also
be observed in imperative forms and in forms with the modal-prefix /ga/-, see
lesson 16 below, i.e., in any form which cross-references P in S11.
The agreement pattern of the present-future forms is summarized in Table
9.3 below:
Table 9.3: The presentfuture agreement pattern
S11 S12 S13 S14

INTRANSITIVE stemPF -/ed/- S (with set B)
TRANSITIVE P (with an IPP) stemPF A (with set A)
128
Verbal tense
The present-future tense is also signalled by the form of the verbal stem
with some of the verbs. In particular, Sumerian verbs can be grouped into four
classes according to their form in the present-future:
i) Verbs belonging to the REGULAR CLASS use the same stem both in the
present-future and preterite. The great majority of the verbs belongs to this
class.
ii) Verbs belonging to the REDUPLICATING CLASS use areduplicated stem in
the present-future. If the stem ends with aconsonant, then the consonant is
either omitted in the reduplicated form, e.g.: ar PT/ar/ : a-a PF/a~a/
to put, na PT/na/ : na-na PF/na~na/ to drink, kur PT/kur/ : ku-ku
PF/ku~ku/ to enter; or it is preserved only in the first syllable: al PT/al/ :
al-a PF/al~a/ to distribute, te-en PT/ten/ : te-en-te PF/ten~te/ to cool
off. If the monosyllabic stem ends with a vowel, then the whole stem is
reduplicated, e.g.: gi PT/gi/ : gi-gi PF/gi~gi/ to return; mu2 PT/mu/ : mu-
mu PF/mu~mu/ to grow. Some bisyllabic verbs form their present-future
stem by areduplication of the first syllable with an accompanying voicing of
the consonant: tuku PT/tuku/ : du-du PF/du~du/ to have; taka PT/taka/
: da-da PF/da~da/ to leave.
iii) Verbs belonging to the EXTENDING CLASS use a stem extended with
aconsonant in the present-future: e PT/e/ : ed2 PF/ed/ to go out, te PT/te/
or ti PT/ti/ : te PF/te/ or ti PF/ti/ to approach. The presence of the
stem-final consonant is shown by the orthography only if there is an affix after
the stem.
iv) Verbs belonging to THE SUPPLETIVE CLASS use an entirely different stem
in the present-future, e.g.: dug PT/dug/ (sg.), e PT/e/ (pl.) : e PF/e/ (sg. and pl.)
to speak. See also Table 11.1 in Lesson 11 below for more verbs with
asuppletive stem; the form of these verbs also depends on the plurality of their
participant in the absolutive.
In the Sumerian texts we have at our disposal, preterite verbal forms out-
number present-future forms greatly. Only the preterite may be used with
stative verbs, and this is the most often used tense in texts narrating past
events.
In ex. (176) below the present-future is used to express an action that will
take place in the future, posterior relative to the present of the text. The
present-future is also used to express future events in the protasis part of curse
formulas see, e.g., ex. (60) in Lesson 5, and exx. (168) and (169) above.
129
LESSON 9

e ud-de ma-ra-du-e,
e= ud=e S4mu-S6r-S7a-S12du-S14e
house=ABS day=ERG VEN-2.SG-DAT-build-3.SG.A
i-e ma-ra-ab-mu-mu
i=e S4mu-S6r-S7a-S11b-S12mu~mu-S14e
night=ERG VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-grow~PF-3.SG.A
The day will build the temple for you and the night will make it rise for you.
In ex. (177) below the present-future is used to express an action that is
simultaneous with another action.
ud-ba, unugki-ge, giri-zal-a, ud mu-da-zal-zal-le
ud=be=a unug=e girizal=a ud= S4mu-S6n-S7da-S10n-S12zal~zal-S14e
day=DEM=L1 GN=ERG joy=L1 day=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L1.SYN-pass~PL-3.SG.A
urimki-e gud-gen sa an-e mu-dab-il
Ur=e gud=gen sa= an=e S4mu-S6n-S7da-S11b-S12il-S14
GN=ERG bull=EQU head=ABS sky=TERM VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.NH.A-raise-3.SG.P
At that time, while Uruk passed each and every day in joy because of him, Ur
raised his head high like abull because of him
In ex. (178) below the present-future is used to express actions that are
simultaneous with each other.
(178) Lugal-kigine-dudu 1 614 (Uruk, 24th c.) (Q001368)
nam-en, nam-lugal-da, e-na-da-tab-ba-a,
namen= namlugal=da S2i-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S11n-S12tab-S14-S15a-a
rulership=ABS kingship=COM FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-3.SG.H.A-double-3.SG.P-SUB-L1
unugki-ga, nam-en, mu-ak-ke

unug=a namen= S4mu-S10n-S12ak-S14e
GN=L1 rulership=ABS VEN-L1.SYN-act-3.SG.A
urimki-ma, nam-lugal, mu-ak-ke

urim=a namlugal= S4mu-S10n-S12ak-S14e
GN=L1 kingship=ABS VEN-L1.SYN-act-3.SG.A
(When Enlil, the king of all lands,) combined the title of en and the title of king
for him: he ruled then as en in Unug, while he ruled as king in Urim.
In ex. (179) below the verb of address introducing direct speech uses the
present-future tense. Here the act of addressing is simultaneous with the
speech, see also ex. (166) above.
130
Verbal tense

dumu iri-na-ke-ne gu mu-ne-de-e
dumu iri=ane=ak=en=ra gu= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12de-S14e
child city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=PL=DAT.H voice=ABS VEN-3.PL-DAT-pour-3.SG.A
He addressed aspeech to the citizens of his city:
In ex. (180) the present-future is used with the modal prefix /a/- to express
awish, see also Lesson 16, section 16.2 below.
bar-u-a ud e-mi-sa-za
bar=u=a ud= S1a-S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12sa-S14enzen
outside=1.SG.POSS=L2.NH prayer=ABS MOD-FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-call-2.PL.A
(O, Anuna gods,) may you pray on my behalf!
In ex. (181) below the present-future is used to express ahabitual action.
P1[gurgur kug luh-a=ak] P2[i itud=ak=
P1 [vessel silver clean- PT=GEN ] P2 [oil month=GEN=ABS
ninirsuk=e S2a-S5b-S9ta-S12gu-S14e-S15a]=P5
DN=ERG FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-eat-3.SG.A-SUB]=P5ABS
mu-na-dim
9.4 The prefix of anteriority
In addition to the formal means of the previous subsection, the prefix /u/ of
S1 is also involved in indicating the relative time of the verbal event in
Sumerian. It denotes anteriority relative to the event of afollowing clause. If
the verb of the following clause is in the present-future, it denotes anteriority
in the future, while if it is in the preterite, it denotes anteriority in the past.
Verbal forms with the prefix /u/ are as arule in the preterite.
131
LESSON 9
The prefix assimilates to the vowel of the next syllable only if it forms an
open syllable, see ex. (184) and the first verbal form in ex. (185) below. If it forms
aclosed syllable, /uC/, then it does not assimilate. Its behaviour gives further
support to the assumption that the 3rd ps. sg. human IPP is /nn/, if followed
by avowel. The different vowels of the prefix of anteriority in exx. (183) and
(184), /u/ vs. /i/, may easily be explained if one assumes that the grapheme NI
represents /nni/ in the former, but /ni/ in the latter.
(182) Iri-kagina 3 2:1618 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222610)
lu=e dam= S1u-S11n-S12taka-S14 kug gi 5==am-
ensi-ke, ba-de
If aman divorced (his) wife, the ruler received 5 shekels of silver for himself.
dnin-ir-su-ke, sa-u-gal-ne, u-ni-u
RU-lugal-ke, sa aag-ga-na-ka, pu i-ni-du,
RUlugalak=e sa aag=ane=ak=a pu= S1u-S10ni-S11n-S12du-S14
attendant=ERG head field=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=L1 well=ABS ANT-L1-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
After an attendant had built hiswell in the front part of his field ()
(185) Amar-Suena 9 3233 (RIME 3/2.1.3.9) (Ur, 21st c.) (Q000984)
lu2 e2 a-ba-sumun, u3-un-du3
lu e= u-
S1 S5 ba-S12 sumun-S14 S1u-S11n-S12du-S14
man house=ABS ANT-MID-old-3.SG.S ANT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
The man, who, after the temple has become dilapidated, rebuilds it, .
132
Verbal tense
Further readings
The most important article on the forms of the present-future stem is Krecher
1995. Apart of the sumerological literature refers to the preterite and present-
future tenses of Sumerian with the ancient Akkadian terms as am (quick)
and mar (slow) respectively, see Black 1991: 99119 on these ancient terms.
Jagersma (2010, especially 359380) posits asystem of aspects in Sumerian,
instead of asystem of tenses; he distinguishes aperfective and an imperfective
aspect. The classical account of the various stems used in present-future is
Edzard 1976. On the use of the tenses in Sumerian, see Streck 1998. On the use
of 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix /b/ in S11 with aplural reference, see Waetzoldt
1992.
On split-ergativity in general and in Sumerian, see Woods 2000: 314319.
The origin of split-ergativity in the Sumerian verbal system is the subject of
two papers. Interestingly their main conclusions are somehow contradictory.
Coghill and Deutscher (2002) argue that the ergative pattern of the preterite
arose in Sumerian when apassive structure was reanalysed as active-transitive
as it happened in many other languages. Schulze and Sallaberger (2007)
conclude that the present-future pattern derives from the grammaticalization
of the antipassive as an accusative construction (163) as it happened in many
other languages. The complexity of the issue is indicated by the fact that both
articles needed two authors, an assyriologist and alinguist.
On the function of the prefix of anteriority and on its possible Semitic origin,
see Civil 2008.
Exercises
9.3 Change the present-future forms into preterite, and the preterite forms into
present-future. You must produce only the morphemic segmentation and glossing
(2nd and 3rd line of the examples).
133
LESSON 9
a) mu-ak-ke
S4mu-S10n-S12ak-S14e
VEN-L1.SYN-act-3.SG.A
b) ma-ra-ab-mu-mu
S4mu-S6r-S7a-S11b-S12mu~mu-S14e
VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-grow~PF-3.SG.A
c) i-ni-gi
S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.A-return-3.SG.P
d) ma-ra-du-e
S4mu-S6r-S7a-S12du-S14e
VEN-2.SG-DAT-build-3.SG.A
e) ma-an-um
S4m-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
VEN-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
g) ba-ni-gi-in-e
S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12gin-S14e
MID-L1-3.SG.H.A-confirm-3.PL
h) be-ar-re-e
S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ar-S14e
3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.PL
i) gu ma-si-si-ne
gu= S4m-S7a-S12si~si-S14en
neck=ABS VEN-DAT-fill~PF-3.PL.A
j) mu-na-dim
k) sizkur mu-na-be
sizkur= S4mu-S6nn-S6a-S11b-S12e-S14e
prayer=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A
9.4 Go to the ETCSRI corpus (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/corpus) and write

V12=STEM-PF (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. You will
have all the verbal forms listed which use aspecial present-future stem. Collect
them and pair them with their preterite stem.
134
Verbal tense
9.5 Translate the text Lugal-kigine-dudu 1 (RIME 1.14.14.01) (Uruk, 24th c.) (Q001368)
with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs (2016b) glossary. Add morphological
segmentation and glossing to the text. Then go to the ETCSRI edition of the text
(http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/Q001368), click on the proofing link on
the left side of the page, and compare your glosses with ETCSRIs glossing.
1. den-lil 11. mu-ak-ke

2. lugal kur-kur-ke 12. urimki-ma
3. lugal-ki-en-ne-du-du-ra 13. nam-lugal
4. ud den-lil-le 14. mu-ak-ke
5. gu zid e-na-de-a 15. lugal-ki-en-ne-du-du-de
6. nam-en 16. nam gal ul-la-da
7. nam-lugal-da 17. den-lil lugal ki a-ne
8. e-na-da-tab-ba-a 18. nam-til-la-ni-e
9. unugki-ga 19. amu-na-ru
10. nam-en
135
LESSON 10
VERBAL PLURALITY
The alternation of the verbal stem has two main functions in Sumerian: i) to
signal the present-future tense; ii) to signal verbal number. The former was
discussed in the previous lesson. This lesson describes the formal means used
to signal verbal number in Sumerian.
10.1 Event number
Number is traditionally considered to be anominal category; in some languages,

however, the plurality of verbal events or the plurality of certain participants
may trigger alternations in the form of the verb. Sumerian also appears to be
alanguage in which verbal number plays an important role.
Two main types of verbal number can be distinguished: event number and
participant number. Event number relates to the plurality of the verbal event
manifesting itself in many different but related ways: iterative, durative, or
intensive verbal action, totality of the object (see, e.g., exx. [186], and [364]), or
the subject, distributive meaning, i.e., more than one subject or object is
involved in the verbal action simultaneously or successively (see, e.g., exx.
[187][190] below). Some of these meanings may also involve the plurality of
one of the participants, but this is only aconsequence of the verbs meaning.
Sumerian signals the plurality of verbal events by the full reduplication of the
verbal stem (plural reduplication). Both present-future and preterite forms may
undergo plural reduplication.
(186) Shulgi A91 (ETCSL 2.4.2.01)
kur u-mu-gam-gam
kur= S1a-S4mu-S11-S12gam~gam-S14
foreign.land=ABS MOD-VEN-1.SG.A-subdue~PL-3.SG.P
kalam hu-mu-ge-en-ge-en
kalam= S1a-S4mu-S11-S12gen~gen-S14
land=ABS MOD-VEN-1.SG.A-firm~PL-3.SG.P
I subdued the foreign lands completely, I secured the land fully.
137
LESSON 10
(187) Iri-kagina 5 obv. 4:14 (RIME 1.9.9.5) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222618)
kug za-gin-be, ba-ta-ke-ke,
kug zagin=be= S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12ke~ke-S14
precious.metal lapis.lazuli=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-bind~PL-3.SG.P
alan-be, i3-gul-gul
alan=be= S1i-S11n-S12gul~gul-S14
statute=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS FIN-3.SG.H.A-destroy~PL-3.SG.P
(He set fire to the temple of the goddess Gatumdug,) collected all its precious
metal and lapis lazuli from it for himself, and destroyed all its statues.
eg-ba na-ru-a, e-me-sar-sar
eg=be=a narua= S1i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12sar~sar-S14
dike=DEM=L2.NH stela=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.A-write~PL-3.SG.P
He set up inscribed stelae all over along that dike.
kisal dlugal-urubki-ka-ke,
kisal lugalurubak=ak=e
courtyard DN=GEN=L3.NH
sa i-mi-dug-dug
sa-= S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dug~dug-S14
equal-TL=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-do~PL-3.SG.P
He assigned (precious metals, lapis lazuli, 20 oxen, and 20 sheep) to Lugal-
Urubas courtyard as aregular offering.
ud-ba, unugki-ge, giri-zal-a, ud mu-da-zal-zal-le
ud=be=a unug=e girizal=a ud= S4mu-S6n-S7da-S10n-S12zal~zal-S14e
day=DEM=L1 GN=ERG joy=L1 day=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L1.SYN-pass~PL-3.SG.A
At that time, while Uruk passed each and every day in joy because of him, .
10.2 Participant number
The second type of verbal number, the participant number relates to the
number of participants involved. As in other languages displaying this
grammatical category, participant number operates on an ergative basis in
Sumerian as well: the alternation of the verbal stem reflects the plurality of the
participant in the absolutive, i.e., either that of S or that of P.
138
Verbal plurality
The set of alternating stems consists of alimited number of intransitive

verbs expressing position or motion, or transitives that indicate the causation
of motion; the verb to die is also typically involved. In the case of these verbs
the number of participants makes asemantic difference that may explain the
use of verbal number which ultimately always relates to the semantics of the
verb. Table 10.1 below shows the stem alternations of the six Sumerian verbs
involved:
Table 10.1
SINGULAR PLURAL
VERB
PT PF PT PF
to go /en/a) /du/b /ere/c) /sub/d)

to stand, to put /gub/e) /sug/ or /ug/f)
g) h)
to sit, to seat /tu/ /dur/ /durun/i)
h: /til/j)
to live /sig/l)
nh: /lug/k
to die, to kill /u/m) /ug/n)
countables: /tum/o) countables: /la/r)
to bring p) q)
mass nouns: /de/ mass nouns: /tum/
The most often used writings of the stems of Table 10.1 are: a) en; b) du; c) e-re;
d) su/sub; e) gub; f) su/sug, u; g) tu; h) dur; i) durun, durun(KU.KU);
j) ti/til; k) lu/lug, lug(LUL); l) se/sig, se, ze; m) u; n) ug, ug,
ug(U.U); o) tum; p) de, di(TI) (in Garshana); q) tum; r) la, la,
la-(e/a).
As exx. (191)(194) below show there is atendency that when the partici-
pant in the absolutive functions as S, then the verb shows a3rd ps. pl. agreement,
see exx. (191) and (193) below. When the participant in the absolutive functions
as P, then it is cross-referenced with 3rd ps. sg. pronominal suffix in S14, see
exx. (192) and (194). In the former examples, therefore, plurality is signalled by
both the verbal stem and the pronominal suffix; in the latter examples,
however, only by the verbal stem.
ummaki-a, ki-a i-durun(KU.KU)-ne-e
umma=a ki=u=a S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12durun-S14e
GN=L2.NH place=1.SG.POSS=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-sit.PL-3.PL.S
They are staying with me (lit. at my place) in Umma.
139
LESSON 10
(192) NG 120b rev. 910 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131776)

nag-suki-e a-za-num-e mu-na-an-la
nagsu=e hazanum=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12la-S14
GN=TERM mayor=ERG VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-bring.PL-3.SG.P
The mayor took them (= the sheep) for him to Nagsu.
nam-ita sag-ga gu-de-a-a-da, en dnin-ir-su-ra
namita sag-a gudea=ak=da en ninirsuk=ra

entreaty friendly-PT PN=GEN=COM lord DN=DAT.H
mu-na-da-u-ge-e
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S12ug-S14e
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-stand.PL-3.PL.S
They stepped forward to Lord Ningirsu with friendly entreaties on behalf of
Gudea.
The use of the suppletive plural stems is triggered by the plurality of
participants, and not by the plurality of event as in the case of plural
reduplication. The difference in function of suppletive plural stems and plural
reduplication is also implied by the phenomenon that plural stems may also
undergo plural reduplication:
e-a mi-ni-u-u
e=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ug~ug-S14
temple=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-stand.PL~PL-3.SG.P
He had each of them (= stone basins) stand in the temple.
There exist some examples mainly from the 3rd millennium BCE, in which the
plurality of the participant in the absolutive (P or S) apparently is signalled by
an /en/ suffix. The suffix -/en/ appears to be the vestige of an older,
supplanted grammatical system. The traces of this system may also be detected
in the plural stem of tu to sit: /durun/ < */dur-en/; and probably in the 1st
and 2nd ps. pl. suffixes of S14: -/enden/ < */en-den/, -/enzen/ < */en-zen/.
All examples involve the verb kur to enter, bring in, except for the last
example, ex. (197), which comes from aliterary text dated to the first part of
the 2nd millennium BCE.
140
Verbal plurality
(195) VS 14, 179 rev. 5:3 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020190)

mu-na-kurx(DU)-re6-na-am6
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S10n-S12kur-en-S14-S15a==am-
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1.SYN-enter-PL-3.SG.S-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
These [= various animals] are (gifts) brought in for (Baragnamtara).
(196) UET 3, 1410 34 (Ur, 21st c.) (P137735)

a-wi-li3 nu-banda4 ba-ni!-in-kur9-re-en3
awili nubanda=e S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12kur-en-S14
PN overseer=ERG 3.SG.NH-L1-3.SG.H.A-enter-PL-3.SG.P
Awili, the overseer brought them (= 8 troops) in.
(197) The Death of Gilgamesh, Me Turan Version Segment F 168 (ETCSL 1.8.1.3)
e2 nin-a-ta nin me-i-du-un
e nin=ak=ta nin= S4mu-S6e-S9i-S12du-en-S14
house sister=GEN=ABL sister=ABS VEN-2.SG-TERM-go-PL-3.SG.S
From the sisters house the sisters will come to you.
Further reading
The linguistic description of this lesson is informed by Mithun 1988 and Corbett
2000.
Verbal plurality and full reduplication of the preterite stem is discussed by
Edzard 1971: 226232. B. Tanoss unpublished dissertation (2012) is the most
comprehensive work on verbal plurality in Sumerian. He also published along
article on the semantics of verbal plurality (2014).
The two most important articles about the forms of the suppletive verbal
stems are Krecher 1967/8 and Steinkeller 1979.
Since almost all forms of the verb to bring are written with the sign DU,
the reading and interpretation of its various forms remained an unsolved
problem. The breakthrough in this issue was made by Walther Sallaberger
(2005), mainly with the help of the Garshana texts in which the form /de/ is
written not with the DU sign (= de) but with the TI (= di). Meyer-Laurin (2010)
examined the 3rd millennium BCE occurrences of the verb in detail, using
Sallabergers insights as astarting point.
This textbook assumes that the various forms of the verb to bring depend
on whether the P of the verb is countable or mass noun. Sallaberger assumes
141
LESSON 10
that the form of the verb depends on whether the P can move on his/its own
(persons, herd animals, boats) (kann sich selbst bewegen [Personen,
Herdentiere, Boote] or must be carried (muss getragen werden) (2005:
573). Meyer-Laurin assumes that we have in fact two lexemes: tum to lead
(geleiten) and de / tum to deliver (liefern) (2010: 11) until the end of
the 3rd millennium BCE. In my view, the distinction between countable and
mass nouns explains better that the plural form /la/ may not be used with
things which must be carried or delivered. As amatter of fact, none of the
accounts of the various forms of the verb to bring may explain all
occurrences, especially when 2nd millennium examples are also taken into
consideration.
For the plural suffix -/en/, see Jagersma 2010: 322323. For atypologically
similar language in which an affix does not show person agreement, but which
indicates the plurality of participants, object or subject, depending on the case
frame of the verb, see Sandawe, a language spoken in Central Tansania
(Kieling 2002).
Exercises
write V12=STEM-RDP (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box.
Select at least 10 verbal forms and try to explain the meaning of the plural
reduplication.
write V12=STEM-PL (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Pair
the plural stems with the singular stems.
10.5 Create the plural or singular version of the following examples. You must produce
only the morphemic segmentation and glossing (2nd and 3rd line of the examples).
142
Verbal plurality
a) kug da-tum-dug-ra mu-na-en,

He went to holy Gatumdug.
b) ummaki-a, ki-a i-durun(KU.KU)-ne-e
They are staying with me (lit. at my place) in Umma.
c) ensi-be, mu-u
ensik=be= S4mu-S11n-S12u-S14
ruler=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-die-3.SG.P
He killed its ruler.
d) gud-be nu-mu-da-tum
gud=be= S1nu-S4mu-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tum-S14
ox=DEM=ABS NEG-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P
He was not able to bring that ox.
e) lugal-keki-da, e-da-se
lugalke=da S2i-S6n-S8da-S12se-S14e
PN=COM FIN-3.SG.H-COM-live.PL-3.PL.S
They live by Lugal-Ke.
f) nag-suki-e a-za-num-e, mu-na-an-la
nagsu=e hazanum=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12la-S14-
g) inim-ba a-mu-da-gub
inim=be=a S1a-S4mu-S6-S8da-S10n-S12gub-S14
word=DEM=L1 MOD-VEN-1.SG-COM-L1.SYN-stand-3.SG.S
May she stand with me in this matter!
h) nam-ita sag-ga gu-de-a-da
namita sag-a gudea=ak=da
entreaty good-PT PN=GEN=COM
en dnin-ir-su-ra mu-na-da-u-ge-e
en ninirsuk=ra S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S12ug-S14e
lord DN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-stand.PL-3.PL.S
(Baus septuplets) stepped forward to lord Ninirsu one by one with friendly
entreaties on behalf of Gudea.
143
LESSON 10
10.6 Transliterate the text FaoS 19, Gir32 (Lagash, 23rd c.) (P213570) with the help of
Volks sign list (2012). A copy of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.
edu/P213570. Translate the text with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs (2016b)
glossary.
10.7 Add morphemic segmentation and glossing to the following text, and translate it
with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Westenholz (2014: 131)
assumes that e-ma in obv. l. 6 means prison.
CUSAS 26, 156 (Umma?, cca. 23rd c.) (P214949)

obv.
1. mdnin-mug-an-dul
2. arad mug-ge-[si]
3. mur-dnin-mug
4. dumu mug-ge-si
5. e-ma-a e-se-am
6. nin-tur ama mug-ge-si-ke
7. ba-la-e
8. ur-dnin-tu sagi-ma
rev.
1. makim-be
144
LESSON 11
THE PREFIXES OF SLOTS 26
This lesson describes the function of the morphemes that may occupy S26 of
the finite verbal from. The grammatical functions expressed by the finite-marker
prefixes in S2, by the ventive in S4, and by the prefix /ba/- in S5 are controversial
in Sumerology. The reason for this is that they express functions that are not
easily recoverable from the entirely written corpus of an ancient extinct lan-
guage. The finite-marker prefixes are the vestige of an obsolete system expressing
adifference in verbal tense and adifference between dynamic and stative verbs.
The ventive is an allative deictic morpheme, and the prefix /ba/- is amarker of
middle voice. The prefix /nga/- in S3 functions as clause coordinator. The lesson
concludes with the description of the final pronominal prefixes in S6 that func-
tion as the pronominal part of the composite adverbial prefixes.
The modal prefixes, except for the prefix /a/-, also occupy S2: they cannot
co-occur with afinite marker. They will, however, be discussed in Lesson 16,
section 16.2, not in this lesson.
11.1 The finitemarker prefixes (Slot 2)
This prefix has two allomorphs: i) /i/ and ii) /a(l)/-; and the second allomorph
has again two allomorphs: a) /al/- when there is no other prefix between it and
the verbal stem, see ex. (203) below; b) /a/- in all other environments, see, e.g.,
ex. (206) below. The /i/- prefix assimilates to the vowel of the following syllable
with respect to vowel height around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE, see
Lesson 2, section 2.2. above.
In verbal forms containing amorpheme in any of S311 the occurrence of
the finite-marker prefix is constrained by arule which is clearly phonological
by nature: it occurs only in verbal forms that would start with aconsonant
cluster without the finite-marker prefix. In ex. (198) below, for example, the
verbal form would start with ageminated consonant, /mm/, without the finite-
marker. The verbal form in ex. (199) has no finite-marker, and its starts with
asingle consonant.
145
LESSON 11

e-e im-ma-en
e=e S2i-S4m-S5b-S7a-S12en-S14
house=DAT.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-go-3.SG.S
He went to the temple.
He (= Gudea) went to holy Gatumdug.
In ex. (200) below the finite-marker is present, without it the verbal form would
again start with ageminated consonant, /nn/. And the verbal form starting
with asingle consonant in ex. (201) has no finite marker either.
(200) MVN 3 36 obv. 3:27 (Isin, ca. 2524th c.) (P222204)
1/2 kug ma-na, mair, dumu amar-uba(MU.KUR.ZA)-ra,
1/2 kug mana= mair dumu amaruba=ra
1/2 silver unit=ABS PN child PN=L3.H
a-pa-e azlag, sam-e, i-ni-gu
apae azlag=e sam=e S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gu-S14
PN fuller=ERG price=TERM FIN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-eat-3.SG.P
Apa-e, the fuller, made Mahir, the son of Amar-uba, receive (lit. eat) half
amana of silver as the price.
kar niinki-na-ke ma bi-us
kar niin=ak=e ma= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12us-S14
quay GN=GEN=L3.NH boat=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-be.next-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) moored the boat at the quay of Nigin.
In verbal forms in which the finite-marker prefix is the only prefix before the
verbal base in S12 the rule just described does not hold. In ex. (202) below the
presence of the finite-marker has no phonological reason, it is apparently only
there to indicate that the verbal form functions as a predicate but not as
amodifier.
gu-de-a i-zig
gudea= S2i-S12zig-S14
PN=ABS FIN-rise-3.SG.S
Gudea woke up.
146
The prefixes of Slots 26
The phonological nature of the rule that predicts the presence of the finite-
marker suggests that the system we know is the outcome of alinguistic change
that resulted in the disappearance of the finite marker in many
morphophonological environments. In verbal forms containing amorpheme in
any of S311, the finite-marker is preserved only in environments where its
disappearance would result in aconsonant cluster at the beginning of aword,
which is, however, not allowed by the rules of Sumerian phonotactics.
Our texts consequently only preserved the remnants of an old system in
which the prefix /i/- and /a(l)/- had a complementary distribution and
probably occurred in all finite verbal forms. In this system, the finite-marker
/i/- was used in preterite verbal forms expressing an action. Verbal forms
expressing astate, see exx. (203) and (204), astate resulting from aprevious
action, see ex. (205), or present-future verbal forms expressing an action, see
exx. (206), (207) below, were prefixed with /a(l)/-.
(203) CUSAS 26, 45 rev. 1:3 (unknown, 23rd c.) (P427623)
inim-be al-til
inim=be= S2al-S12til-S14
word=DEM=ABS FIN-complete-3.SG.S
This case is finished.
(204) E-ana-tum 1 obv. 4:2022 (RIME 1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c. BCE) (P222399)
e-an-na, dinana, eb-gal-ka-ka a-tum
eana inanak ebgal=ak=ak=a S2a-S5b-S10(i>)-S12tum-S14
TN DN TN=GEN=GEN=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2-worthy-3.SG.S
He is worthy of the E-ana of Inana of the Ebgal
u-ni-al-dugud, kindagal, nam-nu-banda3 e2-ag4-ga,
P1 unialdugud kindagal namnubanda eag=ak=
P1 PN chief.barber overseership inner.room= GEN=ABS
an-na-ta-a, KIB mu-dim2-dim2

a-
S2 S6 nn- a-
S7 S12 ta- -
S14 S15 a=e KIB= S4mu-S11n-S12dim~dim-S14
FIN-3SG.H-DAT-add-3.SG.S-SUB=ERG nail=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-create~PL-3.SG.P
Shuni-aldugud, the chief barber, who has been assigned to the office of the
personal quarters overseer, fashioned numerous inscribed clay nails.
(206) Rimush 18 2022 (RIME 2.1.2.18) (Agade, 23rd c.) (Q000842)
lu, im-sar-ra-e, ab-ha-lam-me-a
lu imsara=e= S2a-S11b-S12halam-S14e-S15a=
person inscription=DEM=ABS FIN-3.SG.NH.P-obliterate-3.SG.A-SUB=ABS
Whoever obliterates this inscription, .
147
LESSON 11

gurgur kug luh-a=ak i itud=ak=
vessel silver clean-PT=GEN oil month=GEN=ABS
ninirsuk=e S2a-S5b-S9ta-S12gu-S14e-S15a=P5
DN=ERG FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-eat-3.SG.A-SUB=P5ABS
mu-na-dim
This reconstructed original system almost completely disintegrated in the
Sumerian used in the South (preserved mainly in texts from Lagash) by the end
of the 3rd millennium BCE. Here the the prefix /i/- replaced the prefix /a(l)/-
in almost all verbal forms, except for the imperative, see ex. (208), and ex. (392)
in Lesson 14, section 14.3, exx. (481) and (482) in Lesson 16, section 16.2 below.
kiib-u zi-ra-ab
kiib=u= S1zir-S2a-S11b
seal=1.SG.POSS=ABS break-FIN-3.SG.NH.P
Destroy my sealed tablet!
In the North (preserved mainly in texts from Nippur and Adab) the original
distribution and functions of the two finite-marker prefixes remained more or
less intact; and the verbal forms with the prefix /a(l)/- acquired even an
additional function compared to texts from the South: the finite-marker prefix
/a(l)/- came to be used as amarker of passive verbal forms, see ex. (209) below,
corresponding to verbal forms with the middle prefix /ba/- in Sumerian in the
South, see section 11.3 below.
(209) OSP 2, 58 34 (Nippur, 23rd c.) (P216212)
den-lil-le-ma-ba-ra, an-na-la
enlilemaba=ra S2a-S6nn-S7a-S12la-S14
PN=DAT.H FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-weigh-3.SG.S
(16 shekels of silver, (which is) the value of the corve obligation,) were paid to
Enlile-maba.
148
Exx. (210) and (211) below show that passive forms expressed with the
middle marker /ba/- in Ur, may be expressed with the finite-marker /a(l)/- in
Nippur.
(210) MS 4096 rev. 6 (Ur, 21st c.) (P253193)
igi-be-e mu lugal ba-pad
igi=be=e mu lugal=ak= S5ba-S12pad-S14
face=3.SG.NH.POSS=TERM name king=GEN=ABS MID-call-3.SG.S
The promissory oath was sworn before them.
(211) MVN 3, 330 obv. 9 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P113890)
mu lugal-be al-pad
mu lugal=ak=be= al-pad-
name king=GEN=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS FIN-call-3.SG.S
The promissory oath concerning it was sworn.
The old function of the /a(l)/- finite-marker to mark present-future forms was
apparently also known to the Nippurian compilers of the so called Old
Babylonian Grammatical texts, which date to the first part of the 2nd
millennium BCE. In OBGT VII (MSL 4 8889), for example, which is an Akkadian-
Sumerian paradigm of the verb en = alkum, to go, the present-future
Akkadian verbal forms are translated with present-future Sumerian verbal
forms containing the finite-marker /a(l)/-:
(212) OBGT VII 3133 (= A24189) (Nippur)
31. al-du i-il-lak
32. al-du-un a-al-lak
33. al-du-un tal-lak
11.2 The coordinator prefix (Slot 3)
The prefix /nga/- functions as clause coordinator, prefixed, as arule, to the

verbal form of the last one of the coordinated clauses. Its meaning is usually
conjunction: A, and also B; but when the coordinated clauses are negated it may
also mean disjunction: neither A, nor B.
149
LESSON 11
(213) Shulgi C 9 (ETCSL 2.4.2.03)

ni-erim-ma usan bar-u-be
nierim=ak usan baru=be=
evil=GEN scourge stick=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS
e in-ga-me-en3
e= S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14en
1S.G.PR =ABS FIN-COOR-COP-1.SG.S
As for all evil, their scourge and stick are also me.
(214) Sargon 1 3841 (RIME 2.1.1.1) (Agade, 24th c., in Old Babylonian copies)
(Q000834)
iri-ne, e-ul!,
iri=ane= S2i-S11n-S12ul-S14
city=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS FIN-3.SG.H.A-raid-3.SG.P
bad-be, e-ga-sig
bad=be= S2i-S3nga-S11n-S12sig-S14
wall=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS FIN-COOR-3.SG.H.A-demolish-3.SG.P
He raided his city and also demolished its city-walls.
(215) Gudea Statue B 7:49-50 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)
alan-e, u kug nu
alan=e= u kug= nu
statue=DEM=ABS and silver=ABS NEG
za-gin nu-ga-am
zagin= S1nu- S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14
lapis.lazuli=ABS NEG-FIN-COOR-COP-3.SG.S
This statue is of neither of silver nor lapis lazuli
The conjunction of noun phrases is expressed most often with the conjunction
particle u, which is aloan from Early Semitic *wa.
(216) Shu-Suen 12 78 (Ur, 21st c.) (Q000996)
nam-sipad kalam-ma, u an-ub-da limmu-ba-e
namsipad kalam=ak u anubda limmu=be=ak=e
shepherdship land=GEN and quarter four=3.SG.NH.POSS=GEN=TERM
as the shepherd of the land and of the four quarters
150
11.3 The ventive prefix (Slot 4)
The ventive (called cislocative in linguistics) has two functions in Sumerian:

i) it functions as an allative deictic element, indicating motion towards the
location of the speech event and/or by implication towards one of the speech
act participants, the speaker or the addressee; ii) it functions as a1st ps. sg.
pronominal prefix before the dative as well as the locative2 and locative3
prefix.13
In practice these functions are not always easily separated as both uses
mentioned may indicate motion towards an entity. Nevertheless, when the
ventive functions as a 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix then there is nothing
between it and the adverbial prefix, so the two morphemes together form
acomposite adverbial prefix as in ex. (217) below. When the ventive functions
only as adeictic element, then apronominal prefix occurs in S5 or S6 between
it and the adverbial prefix, should there be any in the prefix-chain. In ex. (218)
below, for example, the 2nd ps. sg. initial pronominal prefix in S6 separates the
ventive and the dative prefix.
diir gal-gal lagaki-a-ke-ne,
diir gal~gal- laga=ak=en=e
god big~PL-TL GN=GEN=PL=ERG
gu ma-si-si-ne
gu= S4m-S7a-S12si~si-S14en
neck=ABS VEN-DAT-fill~PF-3.PL.A
(In the E-bagara, my dining place,) the great gods of Lagash gather around me.
an-ta e-al a-mu-ra-ta-en
an=ta eal= S1a-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S9ta-S12en-S14
sky=ABL abundance=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-DAT-ABL-go-3.SG.S
Abundance comes down to you from heaven.
13 The pronominal use is secondary, developed from its function to indicate amotion towards
the location of the speech event, see Mithun 1996 for similar developments in other languages.
151
LESSON 11
The prefix has two basic allomorphs:

i) /m/ before avowel, see ex. (217) above, or before /b/, see ex. (225), or
immediately next to the verbal base, see ex. (219) below. The /b/ assimilates to
the /m/, see ex. (225), and the resulting sequence /mm/ is reduced to /m/ if
followed by another consonant, see ex. (229);
ii) /mu/- in other environments, see, e.g., ex. (224), but its vowel may assimilate
to the vowel of the next syllable (although not always shown in the writing), if
the syllable starts with an ungeminated consonant, see exx. (226) and (227),
but not if the syllable starts with ageminated consonant, see ex. (228) below.
The reference to the here, the location of the speech event, explains the use
of the ventive in verbal forms describing the movement of people or goods
towards the city of the scribe who created the document as in ex. (219) below.
(219) Nisaba 15, 873 obv. 1012 (Irisagrig, 21st c.) (P387957)
2 sila tu 2 ku, a-lu-um luki-gi-a lugal,
2 sila tu 2 ku= alum kigia lugal=ak=
2 unit soup 2 fish=ABS PN messenger king=GEN=ABS
ud udu ur-de im-en-na-a
ud udu= ur-ed=e S2i-S4m-S12en-S14-S15a-a
day sheep=abs pluck=PF=DAT.NH FIN-VEN-go-3.SG.S-SUB-L1
2 liters of soup, 2 fishes: Salum, the royal messenger, when he came to pluck the
sheep.
In the verbal form describing the opposite movement there is no ventive prefix.
The verbal form in ex. (220) below contains the middle prefix /ba/- in its
separative function, see below in section 11.4.
(220) Nisaba 15, 873 obv. 79 (Irisagrig, 21st c.) (P387957)
1 sila tu 1 ku, nu-hi-AN luki-gi-a lugal,
1 sila tu 1 ku= nuhiilum kigia lugal=ak=
1 unit soup 1 fish=ABS PN messenger king=GEN=ABS
ud BAD.ANki-e ba-en-na-a
ud dr=e S5ba-S12en-S14-S15a-a
day GN=term MID-go-3.SG.S-SUB-L1
1 liter of soup, 1 fish: Nuhi-ilum, the royal messenger, when he left for Der.
Since the ventive indicates amovement towards the place of the speech event,
it may also be used to indicate amovement to aperson in the 3rd ps., if his or
her location is construed as here by the speaker, i.e., the scribe. In ex. (221)
152
below the scribe uses the ventive with the verb to bring, whose destination
is Barag-namtara, the wife of the ruler. The verbal form used to describe the
opposite transaction in ex. (222) does not contain the ventive.
(221) Nik 1, 300 obv. 2:2rev. 1:2 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222069)
ur-e-mu, gal dam-gar e-mi-ke, barag-nam-tar-ra [dam]
uremuak gal- damgar emi=ak=e baragnamtara dam
PN gal-TL merchant GN=GEN=ERG PN spouse
lugal-an-da, ensi, lagaki-ka-ra, mu-na-de
lugalanda ensik laga=ak=ak=ra S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12de-S14
PN ruler GN=GEN=GEN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P
Ur-Emusha, the chief merchant of the Emi, brought (various cosmetics) to Barag-
namtara, spouse of Lugal-Anda, ruler of Lagash.
(222) Nik 1, 300 rev. 2:33:4 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222069)
ur-e-mu-ra, barag-nam-tar-ra, dam lugal-an-da
uremuak=ra baragnamtara dam lugalanda
PN=DAT.H PN spouse PN
ensi, lagaki-ka-ke, e-na-la
ensik laga=ak=ak=e S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12la-S14
ruler GN=GEN=GEN=ERG FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-weigh-3.S.G.P
Barag-namtara, spouse of Lugal-Anda, ruler of Lagash, payed (with acertain
amount of wool) to Ur-Emusha.
One should not assume that the scribe and the wife of the ruler stay at the same
location, rather it is akind of subjective alignment between the two that is
expressed using the ventive. Here one of the two participants of the transaction
is identified as belonging to here from the point of view of the scribe.
In the trial records from the end of the 3rd millennium BCE the expression
to come forward as witness is regularly used with ventive, indicating that the
witness occurs at the trial, construed as here by the scribe who wrote the
text, see e.g., ex. (223) below.
(223) BPOA 1, 382 obv. 7 rev. 2 (Umma, 21st c.) (P339042)
mda-a-ga, mgeme-danan, mnin-en-sag
dayaga gemeananak ninensag=

PN PN PN=ABS
nam-lu-inim-ma-e im-ta-e-e
namluinimak=e S2i-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S12e-S14e
witness=TERM FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-leave-3.PL.S
Dayaga, Geme-Ashnan, and Nin-ensag came forward as witnesses.
153
LESSON 11
Apparently, the use of the ventive divides the deictic space into ahere
and athere in Sumerian, and the association with the here may be based
not only on considerations of physical proximity. When the ventive refers to
neither the speaker nor the addressee, but to a3rd ps. participant, then its use
seems to be extended metaphorically to function as an emphatetic deictic
element. Linguistic empathy is described as the speakers attitude with respect
to who, among speech event participants (the speaker and the hearer) and the
participants of an event or state that he describes, the speaker takes sides with.
(Kuno 1978: 174).
This use of the ventive is alogical extension of its basic deictic function to
refer to ahere-ness, or hither-ness: its use therefore may imply emotional
closeness, an evaluative or subjective alignment between the writer or narrator
and the participant(s) of an event he describes.
It is expected that in texts of an administrative nature the allative deictic
use of the ventive is the typical. In literary texts, however, its more metaphoric,
emphatetic use may also play arole. In exx. (224) and (225) below, for example,
the reference to here-ness is more intangible than in an administrative text,
but still understandable, as the movement here is directed towards Gudea and
the main temple in Girsu respectively, the leader and the symbol of the political
community the scribe must have belonged to.
PN=DAT.H city=3.SG.H.POSS GN=TERM neck=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-fill~PF-3.SG.A
(Magan and Meluhha) gathered for Gudea at his city Girsu.
mu-be-e an-zag-ta
mu=be=e anzag=ta
name=3.SG.NH.POSS=DAT.NH horizon=ABL
kur-kur-re gu im-ma-si-si
kur~kur=e gu= S2i-S4m-S5b-S7a-S12si~si-S14e
mountain~PL=ERG neck=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-fill~PF-3.SG.A
In response to its fame all lands will gather from as far as heavens borders.
But then we also have numerous examples where no movement is involved and
the use of the ventive may only express some kind of alliance or involvement
with participants of the verbal event as in the examples below.
154

e ud-de ma-ra-du-e,
e= ud=e S4ma-S6r-S7a-S12du-S14e
i-e ma-ra-ab-mu-mu
i=e S4ma-S6r-S7a-S11b-S12mu~mu-S14e
night=ERG VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-build~PF-3.SG.A
The day will build the temple for you and the night will make it rise for you.
e-a mi-ni-u-u
e=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ug~ug-S14
temple=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-stand.PL~PL-3.SG.P
He had each of them (= stone basins) stand in the temple.
den-lil-ra, dnin-mah mu-ni-us
enlil=ra ninmah= S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12us-S14
DN=L3.H DN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-be.next-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) seated Ninmah next to Enlil.
e-da lugal im-da-hul
e=da lugal= S2i- S4m-S5b-S8da-S12hul-S14
house=COM owner=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-COM-rejoice-3.SG.S
The owner rejoiced over the temple.
The exact determining factors affecting the emphatetic deictic use of the
ventive are impossible to discover in the case of an extinct language. One can
only speculate that the very frequent use of the ventive in votive and royal
inscriptions reflects the alignment that the composers of these texts felt
between them and the royal and divine participants. One may mention as
support for this assumption the text Iri-kagina 5, where ex. (230) below comes
from.14 This text narrates from the point of view of Iri-kagina, ruler of Lagash,
how Lugal-zagesi, king of Uruk, loots and destroys many of the temples of
Lagash. Remarkably all verbal forms in this 105 line long narrative text are
without ventive, indicating probably the sense of alienation the composer felt
towards the events described.
14 For an online transliteration and translation of the text, see http://oracc.museum.

upenn.edu/etcsri/Q001133.
155
LESSON 11
alan-be, i3-gul-gul
(He set fire on the temple of the goddess Gatumdug,) collected all its precious
11.4 The middle prefix (Slot 5)
Slot 5 accommodates the prefix /ba/-, which functions as the marker of middle
voice in Sumerian. Its basic function is to mark that the verbal action or state
affects, mentally or physically, the grammatical subject (A or S) or his interests.
The middle marker may occur with the verb i) to signal the inherently
middle semantic of the verb; or ii) to add the property of subject affectedness
to averb that is not inherently middle, so that the event will be construed as
affecting the subject.
Spontaneous events belong to the inherently middle semantic verbs. In
these verbal events the grammatical subject exercises little control or volition,
it is, however, highly affected by the event as in exx. (231)(232) and (234)
(235). Ex. (233) demonstrates that when the verb u is used in the meaning to
kill, then the /ba/- prefix does not occur.
(231) NG 80 1314 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111313)
mu lu-gi-gun-na e gu-li gudu ba-u,
mu lugigunak e guli gudu=ak= S5ba-S12u-S14
name PN brother PN priest=GEN=ABS MID-die-3.SG.S
i-bi-la nu-u-tuku-a-e
ibila= S1nu-S2i-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a=ak=e
heir=ABS NEG-FIN-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM
Because Lu-giguna, the brother of Guli, the priest, died, and had no heir, .
156
(232) NG 138 obv. 5 (Umma, 21st c.) (P200731)

na-ba ba-u
naba= S5ba-S12u-S14
PN=abs MID-die-3.SG.S
Naba died.
(233) E-ana-tum 6 4:1819 (RIME 1.9.3.6) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001058)
ensi-be, mu-u
ensik=be= S4mu-S11n-S12u-S14
ruler=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-die-3.SG.P
He killed its ruler
lu2 e2 a-ba-sumun, u3-un-du3
lu e= S1u-S5ba-S12sumun-S14 S1u-S11n-S12du-S14
man house=ABS ANT-MID-old-3.SG.S ANT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
The man, who, after the temple has become dilapidated, rebuilds it, .
(235) Gilgamesh and Huwawa A113 (ETCSL 1.8.1.5)
ud ema ma-ganki ba-su-a-ba
ud ma magan= S5ba-S12su-S14-S15a=be=a
day boat GN=ABS MID-sink-3.SG.S-SUB=3.SG.NH.POSS=L1
When the Magan boat sank, .
(236) OIP 115, 126 rev. 5 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P123715)
iti-ta ud 8 ba-ra-zal
itid=ta ud 8= S5ba-S9ta-S12zal-S14
month=ABL day 8=ABS MID-ABL-pass-3.SG.S
8 days elapsed from the month.
Verbs of grooming, exx. (237), (238), and (239b), and verbs of motion without
a change in the location, ex. (239a), (240), and (241), also belong to the
inherently middle verbs.
(237) Gilgamesh, Enkidu and the Netherworld 206 (ETCSL 1.8.1.4)
tug dan-dan-na-ne im-ma-an-mu
tug dan~dan-a=ane= S2i-S4m-S5ba-S11n-S12mu-S14
cloth clean~PL-PT=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS FIN-VEN-MID-3.SG.H.A-dress-3.SG.P
He put on his cleanest garments.
157
LESSON 11
(238) Dumuzi-Inana E1 6 (ETCSL 4.08.31)

a im-ma-tu
a= S2i-S4m-S5ba-S11n-S12tu-S14
water=abs FIN-VEN-MID-3.SG.H.A-wash-3.SG.P
She washed herself.
(239) Inanas descent to the netherworld 308 (ETCSL 1.4.1)
saar-ra ba-da-an-tu tug mu-dur7-ra ba-an-mu
saar=a S5ba-S8da-S10n-S12tu-S14 tug mudur=ak= S5ba-S11n-S12mu-S14
dust=L1 MID-COM-L1.SYN-sit-3.SG.S cloth dirt=GEN=ABS MID-3.SG.H.A-dress-3.SG.P
She had sat in the dust and clothed herself in afilthy garment.
u-a lagaki-<ke> gud gal-gen a ba-il-il
ua laga=ak=e gud gal-=gen a= S5ba-S11n-S12il~il-S14
provider GN=GEN=ERG bull big-TL=EQU horn=ABS MID-3.SG.H.A-lift~PL-3.SG.P
The provider of Lagash lifted his horns like amighty bull.
(241) Dumuzis Dream 164 (ETCSL 1.4.3)
uru-e dutu-ra an-e u-ne ba-ni-in-zig3
uru=e utu=ra an=e u=ane= S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12zig-S14
man=ERG DN=DAT.H sky=TERM hand=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MID-L1-3.SG.H.A-raise-3.SG.P
The lad raised his hands heavenward to Utu among them.
In indirect reflexive middle verbs, the prefix /ba/- marks that a single
participant functions both as grammatical subject and either i) as indirect
object, or ii) as benefactive, or, iii) with motion verbs, as goal. If these functions
were distributed between two participants, the second one would be in the
dative.
Verbs of obtaining and receiving are inherently indirect reflexive middle,
see exx. (242) and (243) below. Here the participant in question functions both
as Aand as recipient.

lugal-a-ne sizkur ra-zu-ne gu-de-a-a,
lugal=ane=e sizkur arazu=ane= gudea=e
king=3.SG.H.POSS=ERG prayer supplication=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS PN=TERM
en dnin-ir-su-ke u ba-i-ti
en ninirsuk=e u=e S5ba-S6n-S9i-S11n-S12ti-S14
lord DN=ERG hand=L3.NH MID-3.SG.H-TERM-3.SG.H.A-approach-3.SG.P
His master, Lord Ningirsu, accepted from Gudea his prayer and supplication.
158

il-le, nam-ensi, ummaki-a,
il=e namensi umma=ak=
PN=ERG rulership GN=GEN=ABS
u e-ma-ti
u=e S2i-S4m-S5ba-S11n-S12ti-S14
hand=L3.NH FIN-VEN-MID-3.SG.H.A-approach-3.SG.P
Il claimed the rulership of Umma for himself.
With verbs of motion, the indirect reflexive use of /ba/- may result in
aseparative meaning, here the /ba/- prefix marks that the distant goal of the
motion and the eventual location of the 3rd ps. subject are the same.
ne-te-ni-ta, kar-da-iki-e, ba-en
nete=ane=ta kardai=e S5ba-S12en-S14
self=3.SG.H.POSS=ABL GN=TERM MID-go-3.SG.S
He left on his own for Kardahi.
(245) AUCT 3, 84 obv. 24 (Drehem 21st c.) (P104315)
ud ur-dikur ensi, a-ma-ziki-ke,
ud urikurak ensik amazi=ak=e
day PN ruler GN=GEN=ERG
e-gi-a-ne ba-an-tum-ma-a
egia=ane= S5ba-S11n-S12tum-S14-S15a=a
bride=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MID-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
When Ur-Ishkur, the ruler of Hamazi, left with his daughter-in-law.
ud e-gal-e ba-ab-tum-ma-ta
ud egal=e S5ba-S11b-S12tum-S14-S15a=ta
day palace=ERG MID-3.SG.NH.A-bring-3.SG.P-SUB=ABL
Since the palace took him away, .
The indirect reflexive /ba/- may also be used to indicate that the grammatical
subject does something for his own benefit. Here the participant in question
functions both as the grammatical subject (A or S) and as the beneficiary.
159
LESSON 11
alan-be, i3-gul-gul
(He set fire to the temple of the goddess Gatumdug,) collected all its precious
ensi-ke da-tum-dug-e ki-nu-a-ne ba-gub
ensik=e atumdug=e kinu=ane= S5ba-S11n-S12gub-S14
ruler=ERG DN=TERM bed=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MID-3.SG.H.A-stand-3.SG.P
The ruler set up his bed for himself near to Gatumdug.
lu=e dam= u- n-
S1 S11 S12 taka- S14 kug gi 5==am-
ensi-ke, ba-de
If aman divorced (his) wife, the ruler took 5 shekels of silver for himself.
ki-gub-ba-be, lu nu-zi-zi,
kiguba=be= lu=e S1nu-S2i-S12zi~zi-S14e
pedestal=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS man=ERG NEG-FIN-rise~PF-3.SG.A
sa-dug-be, lu la-ba-ni-la-e
sadug=be= lu=e S1nu-S5ba-S10ni-S11b-S12lal-S14e
offering=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS man=ERG NEG-MID-L1-3.SG.NH.P-small-3.SG.A
No one should lift its (= the statue of Gudea) pedestal, no one should curtail its
regular offerings for his own benefit!
As in several other languages the middle marker is also used in verbs with
a passive meaning, where the grammatical subject is by definition the
participant affected by the verbal event. The middle marker does not directly
express passive meaning; rather, the semantic function or functions it encodes
happen to be compatible with the meaning of the passive (Klaiman 1991: 84).
Exx. (251) and (252) show the active and passive, i.e., middle, version of the
same year name. In the middle version, the Ais left unmentioned.
160
(251) BPOA 7, 1948 rev. 3 (Umma, 21st c.) (P291162)

mu damar-dsuen lugal-e ur-bi-lum mu-ul
mu amarsuenak lugal=e urbilum= S4mu-S11n-S12ul-S14
year PN king=ERG GN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-raid-3.SG.P
The year: Amar-Suena, the king, raided Urbilum
(252) BPOA 6, 1287 rev. 1 (Umma, 21st c.) (P292490)
mu ur-bi-i-lumki ba-ul
mu urbilum= S5ba-S12ul-S14
year GN=ABS MID-raid-3.SG.P
The year: Urbilum was raided.
usan la-ba-sag
usan= S1nu-S5ba-S12sag-S14
whip=ABS NEG-MID-hit-3.SG.S
No one was whipped.
(254) Shulgi D 219 (ETCSL 2.4.2.04)
ni ki-en-gi-ra ba-a-gu-la
ni kengir=a S5ba-S10e-S12gul-S14-S15a=
thing homeland=L2.NH MID-L2-destroy-3.SG.S-SUB=ABS
kur-ra ga-am-mi-ib-gu-ul
kur=a S2ga-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gul
foreign.land=L2.NH MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-destroy
Whatever has been destroyed in the homeland, I shall destroy in the foreign
lands!
mu gu-li ba-gaz-e, eir-a-ne u dam
mu guli= S5ba-S12gaz-S14-S15a=ak=e eir=ane u dam
name PN=ABS MID-kill-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM estate=3.SG.H.=POSS and spouse
dumu-ne, dumu ba-ba-u-ke-ne, ba-ne-um-ma
dumu=ane= dumu babau=ak=en=ra S5ba-S6nn-S7a-S12um-S14-S15a=ak
child=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS child PN=GEN=PL=DAT.H MID-3.PL-DAT-give-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN
(Lu-Girsu was the commissioner when) Gulis estate, his wife and child were
given over to the children of Babagu, because he had been killed (as
apunishment).
The middle /ba/ may also mark the emotional affectedness of the grammatical
subject. In ex. (256) below it is Gudea who is affected by what he has seen,
161
LESSON 11
namely, he likes it. In contrast, in exx. (257) and (258) the divine approval affects
the participant in the terminative.
ka-al-be-e igi zid ba-i-bar
kalak=be=e igi zid-= S5ba-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14
trench=3.SG.NH.POSS=TERM face right-TL=ABS MID-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) looked at the clay pit with satisfaction.
den-lil-e en dnin-ir-su-e
enlil=e en ninirsuk=e
DN=ERG lord DN=TERM
igi zid mu-i-bar
igi zid-= S4mu-S6n-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14
face right-TL=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P
The god Enlil looked at lord Ningirsu with approval.
ud dnin-ir-su-ke, iri-ne-e
ud ninirsuk=e iri=ane=e
day DN=ERG city=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM
igi zid im-i-bar-ra
igi zid-= S2i-S4m-S5b-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14-S15a
face right-TL=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P-SUB
When Ningirsu had looked favourably upon his city,
S5 also accommodates apronominal prefix /b/ that functions as the 3rd ps.
non-human pronominal prefix before the adverbial prefixes of S710. It may
occur only when S5 is not used by amiddle prefix /ba/-. For the writings and
functioning of the 3rd ps. non-human pronominal prefix of S5, see the lessons
on the adverbial cases, Lesson 1214 below.
11.5 The initial pronominal prefixes (Slot 6)
The initial pronominal prefix (= IPP) occupies S6 of the finite verbal form. The
IPP functions as the pronominal prefix of the composite adverbial prefixes in
S710. It specifies the person, gender, and number of the referent of the first
prefix in the sequence of the adverbial prefixes, see Lesson 6 section 6.3 above.
162
Before the dative, the locative2, and the locative3 prefix an allomorph of
the ventive prefix in S4 functions as the 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix.
Table 11.1: The initial pronominal prefixes
SINGULAR PLURAL
1st 2nd 3rd 1st 2nd 3rd

// /r/ or /e/ /nn/ or /n/ /m/ /en/ /nn/
The 3rd ps. sg. prefix refers only to human participants. Non-human partici-
pants are referred to by the prefix /b/ in S5. The allomorph /nn/ occurs before
avowel, while /n/ occurs before aconsonant.
The 2nd ps. sg. prefix has two allomorphs: i) /r/ before avowel; ii) /e/ before
aconsonant. In texts from the 3rd millennium BCE the /e/ contracts with the
preceding vowel and lengthens it, whereas in texts from the 2nd millennium
BCE the contraction results in an //.
The exact form of the 1st ps. sg. IPP is uncertain, but its existence can be
inferred from the form of the preceding prefixes.
Instead of /en/, adiscontinuous construction -S6r-S7a/S10i--S12stem-
S14enzen (= -2.SG-DAT/L2--stem-2.PL) is also attested in literary texts from the
first part of the 2nd millennium BCE, referring to a2nd ps. pl. participant.15
This construction apparently follows the pattern of 3rd ps. pl. forms of the
preterite conjugation, see Lesson 9, section 9.2 above.
For the writings and functioning of the initial pronominal prefixes, see the
lessons on the adverbial cases, Lesson 1214 below.
Further readings
The only detailed description of the finite-marker prefixes in S2 is Jagersmas

(2010: 526549) lengthy account, amasterpiece of linguistic reconstruction.
Earlier descriptions discuss the finite-marker, the ventive, and the /ba/- prefix
under the label conjugation prefixes. As this lesson demonstrated, the use of
this term is not justified.
Civil 2008 discusses nominal and verbal conjunction in Sumerian.
15 See Attinger 1993: 231, 237.
163
LESSON 11
The most detailed description of the functions of the middle voice in

Sumerian can be found in Woodss monograph (2008: 8797, 163212, 225267).
His survey of the linguistic background of the middle voice is very useful and
illuminating.
On the ventive prefix Foxvog 1974 and Krecher 1985 are still the most
important studies. Woods 2008 also extensively discusses the function of the
ventive prefix; see, however, Keetman 2015 who points out the inherent flaws
in Woodss approach, which does not recognize morphological variants
conditioned by the morphological context, and assigns functions to the ventive
(namely the expression of control to the allomorph /mu/) that characterize in
fact the conditioning morpheme (the pronominal prefix /n/, the 3rd. ps. sg.
marker of Ain S11), but not the ventive. See also Keetman 2015b. Kouwenberg
2008 discusses the use of the ventive in Akkadian, providing an interesting and
illuminating comparison with the Sumerian ventive.
Exercises
11.3 Try to create the passive version of the following Sumerian clauses by leaving out
the A, adding the /ba/- prefix, and transforming the verbal form. You must
produce only the morphemic segmentation and glossing (2nd and 3rd line of the
examples). Note that two verbal forms are impossible to form, i.e., the prefix /ba/-
prefix and one of their prefixes are incompatible!
a) en-me-er-kara-ra den-ki-ke etug mu-na-an-um
enmerkar=ra enkik=e etug= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
b) nam-lu-lu ag iri-na-ka, a-ne-gaz-ze(AB.A.GE)

namlulu=e ag iri=ane=ak=a S1a-S10ni-S11n-S12gaz-S14e
people=ERG heart city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=L1 MOD-L1-3.SG.H.P-kill-3.SG.A
c) dnin-ir-su-ke, sa-u-gal-ne u-ni-u
164
d) gu-ti-umki den-lil-le ma-an-um

e) e ud-de ma-ra-du-e
e= ud=e S4ma-S6r-S7a-S12du-S14e
f) ensi-ke e mu-du
ensik=e e= S4mu-S11n-S12du-S14
ruler=ERG house VEN-3.SG.H.A.-build-3.SG.P
g) lu2 ummaki-ke, e-ki-sur(ERIN)-ra-ke, izi ba-um

lu umma=ak=e ekisurak=e izi= S5b-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
man GN=GEN=ERG TN=DAT.NH fire=ABS 3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
11.4 Transliterate the text RTC 19 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221416) with the help of Volks
sign list (2012). Translate the texts using Foxvogs (2016b) glossary. Acopy and
photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P221416. Concentrate on the
verbal forms and the human participants, the various goods mentioned are less
important. Explain the presence and the lack of the ventive in the verbal forms
based on what you have learnt in this lesson.
11.5 Compare the verbal forms in exx. (224) and (225) above and explain the difference
between them based on what you learnt about the finite marker and the
allomorphs of the ventive in this lesson.
write V2=FIN (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Select at
least 10 verbal forms and try to explain the presence of the finite-marker based on
what you have learnt in this lesson.
write V5=MID (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. Select at
least 10 verbal forms and try to explain the function of the middle prefix based on
what you have learnt in this lesson.
165
LESSON 12
THE DATIVE AND THE COMITATIVE CASE
This lesson describes the verbal and nominal marking of the dative and the
comitative together with their most important uses. We start with the dative
case.
12.1 The dative case (Slot 7)
The verbal prefix of the dative case is /a/. The form of the nominal case-marker
depends on the grammatical gender of the participant: human verbal
participants are case-marked with the enclitic =/ra/; while non-human verbal
participants are case-marked with the enclitic =/e/. When the human case-
marker is preceded by an open syllable, then the enclitic =/ra/ may be reduced
to /r/; and the syllable closing /r/ of the resulting closed syllable /CVr/ will
not be written until the end of the 3rd millennium BCE, see, e.g., exx. (269) and
(272) below.
The co-occurrence of the noun phrase with adative case-marker and the
dative prefix is very strict: anoun phrase in the dative always occurs together
with acorresponding dative prefix in the verbal prefix-chain.
In the verbal prefix-chain the dative is always cross-referenced by
acomposite adverbial prefix, as its slot (S7) is the nearest to the IPP. The 1st ps.
sg. pronominal prefix is expressed by an allomorph of the ventive prefix in S4,
and the composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme MA, see, e.g.,
ex. (265) below. The 2nd ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP /r/ in S6, and the
composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme RA, see, e.g., ex. (266)
below. The 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, and the
composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme NA, see, e.g., ex. (274)
below. The 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/ in S5.
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human composite prefix is written as a rule with the
grapheme BA, see, e.g., ex. (278) below. When, however, preceded by aventive
prefix, the /b/ of the 3rd ps. sg. non-human composite prefix assimilates to /m/,
and then it is written as arule with the grapheme MA, see, e.g., ex. (261) below.
167
LESSON 12
The 1st ps. pl. pronominal prefix is the IPP /m/ in S6, and the composite
prefix is written as arule with the grapheme ME, see, e.g., ex. (259) below. The
3rd ps. pl. pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, and the composite prefix
is written as arule with the grapheme NE, see, e.g., ex. (272) below. Both in 1st
and 3rd ps. pl. the long vowel of the IPP and the dative prefix are fused to an
//.
When followed by asimple locative2 prefix /e/ in the verbal prefix-chain,
the dative and the locative2 are fused to // in the 2nd millennium BCE, see ex.
(277) below.
The three most important functions of the dative case are to denote the
indirect object, the beneficiary, or the goal of the verbal event. With verbs of
giving the dative denotes the recipient of the verb:
(259) FaoS 19, Gir23 obv. 7rev. 1 (Lagash, 23rd c.) (P217056)
lugal-ka, e-me-um-mu
lugalka=e S1a-S6m-S7a-S12um-S14e
PN=ERG MOD-1.PL-DAT-give-3.SG.A
May Lugalka hand it over to us!
lu2 ummaki-ke, e-ki-sur(ERIN)-ra-ke, izi ba-um
lu umma=ak=e ekisurak=e izi= S5b-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
man GN=GEN=ERG TN=DAT.NH fire=ABS 3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
The Ummaite set fire (lit. give fire) to the Ekisura.
kalam-e zi-ag-al u-ma-um
kalam=e ziagal= S1u-S4m-S5b-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14
land=DAT.NH vigour=ABS ANT-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.NH.A-give-3.SG.P
This will give vigour to the Land, .
(262) Enmerkar and the lord of Aratta 420 (ETCSL 1.8.2.3)
en-me-er-kara-ra den-ki-ke etug mu-na-an-um
enmerkara=ra enkik=e etug= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
Enki gave wisdom to Enmerkara.
With verbs of speaking the dative denotes the addressee of the verb:
168
The dative and the comitative case

kug da-tum-dug-ra mu-na-en,
sizkur mu-na-be
sizkur= S4mu-S6nn-S6a-S11b-S12e-S14e
prayer=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A
He went to holy Gatumdug and prayed to her.
ur-sa ma-a-dug
ursa= S4m-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14
hero=ABS VEN-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P
Hero, you have commanded me.
e-a-ne du-da ma-an-dug
e=ane= du-ed=a S4m-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14
house=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS build-PF=L2.NH VEN-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
He ordered me to build his temple.
(266) Gudea Cyl. A 5: 18 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (ETCSL 2.1.7)
e e-ninnu-na du-ba
e eninnu=ane=ak du=be=a
shrine TN=3SG.H.POSS=GEN build=3.SG.NH.POSS=L2.NH
za-ra ma-ra-an-dug
za=ra S4ma-S6r-S7a-S11n-S12dug-S14
you=DAT.H VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
He spoke to you about the building of his shrine, the E-ninnu.
dumu iri-na-ke-ne gu mu-ne-de-e
dumu iri=ane=ak=en=ra gu= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12de-S14e
child city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=PL=DAT.H voice=ABS VEN-3.PL-DAT-pour-3.SG.A
He addressed aspeech to the citizens of his city: .
(268) Inanas descent to the netherworld 332 (ETCSL 1.4.1)
gal-la-ne kug dinana-ra gu mu-na-de-e
galla=en=e kug inana=ra gu= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12de-S14e
demon=PL=ERG holy DN=DAT.H voice=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-pour-3.SG.A
The demons say to holy Inana: .
169
LESSON 12
The dative may denote the participant affected by the event either benefactively or
adversatively, for the latter, see ex. (273) below:
(269) Gudea 2 18 (RIME 3/1.1.7.2) (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P431937)
dba-u, dumu an-na, nin-a-ne, gu-de-a, ensi
bau dumu an=ak nin=ane=ra gudea ensik
DN child DN=GEN lady=3.SG.H.POSS=DAT.H RN ruler
lagaki-ke, e iri-kug-ga-ka-ne, mu-na-du
laga=ak=e e irikug=ak=ane= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12du-S14
GN=GEN=ERG house GN=GEN=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
For Bau, the child of An, his lady, Gudea, ruler of Lagash, built her temple in Iri-kug.
dub-en kug-ga-ne, mu-na-dim
duben kug==ane= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12dim-S14
treasury.chest holy=TL=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-create-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) manufactured her holy treasury chest for her (= Inana).
dnin-ir-su e-zu mu-ra-du
ninirsuk= e=zu= S4mu-S6r-S7a-S11-S12du-S14
DN=ABS house=2.SG.POSS=ABS VEN-2.SG-DAT-1.SG.A-build-3.SG.P
Ningirsu, I have built you your temple!
(272) Gudea Statue I 3:46 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232282)
diir gal-gal lagaki-ke-ne,
diir gal~gal= laga=ak=en=ra
god great~PL=TL GN=GEN=PL=DAT.H
e-ne-ne, mu-ne-du
e=anen= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12du-S14
house=3.PL.POSS=ABS VEN-3.PL-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
He built all the great gods of Lagash their temples.
lu inim=ak sa= sa-a=ak=e S4mu-S6nn-S8a-S9ta-S12e-S14
man word=GEN head=ABS buy-PT=GEN=TERM VEN-3.PL-DAT-ABL-leave-3.SG.S
bought.
With verbs of motion the dative denotes the goal of the motion without, however,
implying contact:
170

He (= Gudea) went to holy Gatumdug.

e-e im-ma-en
He went to the temple.

elam elam-ta mu-na-en
elam= elam=ta S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12en-S14
elamite=ABS GN=ABL VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-go-3.SG.S
The Elamites came to him (= Gudea) from Elam.
The dative may denote the participant who is considered to be the cause of
asituation:
(277) Iddin-Dagan B 56 (ETCSL 2.5.3.2)
kur-kur u-sal-la mu-e-re-nu
kur~kur= usal=a S4mu-S6r-S7a-S10e-S12nu-S14
land~PL=ABS meadow=L2.NH VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-lie-3.SG.S
All the foreign lands rest on the meadows thanks to you.
The dative may denote the participant that experiences asensation or feeling:
nam-lugal-zu u-e ba-sag
namlugal=zu= u=e S5b-S7a-S12sag-S14
kingship=2.SG.POSS=ABS people=DAT.NH 3.SG.NH-DAT-good-3.SG.S
Your kingship is good for the people. = The people like your kingship.
(279) Enki and Ninhursaga 262 (ETCSL 1.1.1)
e-u a-na-zu a-ra-gig
e=u= ana=zu= S2a-S6r-S7a-S12gig-S14
brother=1.SG.POSS=ABS what=2.SG.POSS=ABS FIN-2.SG-DAT-sick-3.SG.S
ka-u ma-gig
kag=u= S4m- S7a-S12gig-S14
mouth=1.SG.POSS=ABS VEN-DAT-sick-3.SG.S
My brother, what part of you hurts? My mouth hurts.
171
LESSON 12

en kul-abaki-a-gen nu-mu-na-sag
en kulaba=ak=gen S1nu-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12sag-S14
lord GN=GEN=EQU NEG-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-good-3.SG.S
(The lord of Aratta placed on his head the golden crown for Inana.) But he did
not please her (= Inana) like the lord of Kulaba.
The semantic object of the frequently attested compound verb ki place a
to measure = to love, i.e., the verbal participant loved, is in the dative:
(281) Shulgi A23 (ETCSL 2.4.2.01)
ni-si-sa-e ki a-ba-a-a-am
nisisa=e ki= S1a-S5b-S6a-S11-S12a-S14-S15a==am-
justice=DAT.NH place=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-DAT-1.SG.A-measure-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
I do like righteousness.
(282) Iri-kagina 14p 12 (RIME 1.9.9.14p) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222652)
dba-u barag iri-kug-ga-ka tum-ma,
bau barag irikug=ak=a tum-a=e
DN dais GN=GEN=L2 worthy-PT=ERG
iri-ka-gi-na-ra ki mu-na-a
irikaginak=ra ki= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12a-S14
PN=DAT.H place=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-measure-3.SG.P
Bau, who is worthy of the dais of Irikug, loves Iri-kagina.
12.2 The comitative case (Slot 8)
Both the nominal case-marker and the verbal prefix of the comitative case are
/da/, written as arule by the grapheme DA. When the nominal case-marker is
preceded by an open syllable, then the enclitic =/da/ may be reduced to /d/,
in which case the comitative case-marker is often not present graphemically,
especially in 3rd millennium BCE. When followed by alocative1 prefix /ni/ in
the verbal prefix-chain, the comitative prefix may assimilate to /di/, and then
it is written as arule with the grapheme DI (= TI), see, e.g., ex. (294) below.
When followed by asimple locative2 prefix /e/ in the verbal prefix-chain, the
comitative and the locative2 are fused to /d/ in the 2nd millennium BCE, see
ex. (292) below. When followed by aprefix /b/ in S11, the closed syllable /dab/
172
is written with the grapheme DAB (= URUDU) in the 3rd millennium, see, e.g.,
ex. (291) below.
The co-occurrence of the noun phrase with acomitative case-marker and
the comitative prefix is very strict: anoun phrase in the comitative almost
always occurs together with acorresponding comitative prefix in the verbal
prefix-chain.
In the verbal prefix-chain, the participant in the comitative may be cross-
referenced either by acomposite or by asimple adverbial prefix, for the latter
see, e.g., ex. (285) below. The simple prefix always cross-references a3rd ps. sg.
non-human participant. The 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP // in S6,
see, e.g., exx. (287) and (310) below. The 2nd ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP
/e/, see, e.g., exx. (290) and (298) below. The 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal
prefix is the IPP /n/ in S6, see, e.g., exx. (286) and (315) below. The 3rd ps. sg.
non-human prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/ in S5, see, e.g., ex. (289)
below.
The 1st ps. pl. pronominal prefix is the IPP /m/ in S6, see, e.g., ex. (307)
below. The 3rd ps. pl. composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme
PI, which is assumed to have areading neda and is used for writing -/S6nn-
S8da/-, see, e.g., ex. (309) below.
The comitative in its basic function marks the participant that accompanies
another participant in averbal event. The accompanying participant may be
another human or god with the ability to act on his own, see, e.g., ex. (283); an
object, see ex. (285); an abstract entity, see, e.g., ex. (288); or even an action
expressed by anon-finite verbal noun, see ex. (289) below.
en-a-kal-le, ensi ummaki-da ki e-da-sur
enakale ensik umma=ak=da ki= S2i-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12sur-S14
PN ruler GN=GEN=COM place=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-press-3.SG.P
(E-ana-tum) marked out the boundary together with Enakale, ruler of Umma.
(284) Inana B 30 (ETCSL 4.07.2)
dikur-da eg(KALI) mu-da-an-gi-gi-in
ikur=da eg= S4mu-S6n-S8da-S10n-S12gi~gi-S14en

DN=COM noise=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L1.SYN-return~PF-2.SG.A
You continually thunder with the god Ikur.
173
LESSON 12

e-ninnu anzudmuen babbar-ra u-mu-na-da-kur-re
eninnu anzud babbar=a S1u-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S10n-S12kur-S14en
TN eagle white=L1 ANT-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-L1.SYN-enter-2.SG.S
After you have entered the E-ninnu-the-white-Anzud-bird temple with it
(= adrum) before him (= Ningirsu),
(286) RTC 380 rev. 2 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P128533)
elam dab-ba-da mu-da-en-na-me
elam dab-a-da S4mu-S6n-S8da-S12en-S14-S15a==me-e
GN seize-PT=COM VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-go-3.SG.S-SUB=ABS=COP-3.PL.S
They are the ones who came with the captured Elamite.
inim-ba a-mu-da-gub
May she stand with me in this matter.
nam-ita sag-ga gu-de-a-da,
namita sag-a gudea=ak=da
entreaty good-PT PN=GEN=COM
en dnin-ir-su-ra mu-na-da-u-ge-e
en ninirsuk=ra S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S12ug-S14e
lord DN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-stand.PL-3.PL.S
(Baus septuplets) stepped forward to lord Ninirsu with friendly entreaties on
behalf of Gudea.
e-a u ki ar-ra-be-da,
e=u=ak u ki= ar-a=be=da
house=1SG.POSS=GEN foundation place=ABS put-PT=3.SG.NH.POSS=COM
e-al e-da-en
heal= S1a-S2i-S5b-S8da-S12en-S14
plenty=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-COM-go-3.SG.S
With laying the foundations of my temple abundance will come.
In ex. (289) above the verbal event expressed by the non-finite verbal noun in
the comitative functions as acondition of the event in the main clause. This use
of the comitative anticipates its function to denote the participant which is
174
considered to be the cause of the verbal situation. This use is based on

ametonymic extension of accompaniment by implicature: the presence of an
accompanying participant is interpreted as aprecondition of the verbal event.
ki-en-gi-ra i dirig mu-da-de
kiengir=a i dirig-= S4mu-S6e-S8da-S10n-S12de-S14
GN=L1 oil surplus-TL=ABS VEN-2.SG-COM-L1.SYN-pour-3.SG.S
Under you more oil will be poured than ever in Sumer.
nam-lu-ulu, u-im-gen,
namlulu=e uim=gen
mankind=ERG greenery=EQU
u daal a-mu-dab-dug
u daal= S1a-S4mu-S6e-S8da-S11b-S12dug-S14
hand wide=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-COM-3.SG.NH.A-do-3.SG.P
Under you the people do spread as abundantly as grass.
(292) Ur-Ninurta D 33 (ETCSL 2.5.6.4)
u u-sal-la hu-mu-un-de-nu
u= usal-a S2hu-S4mu-S6n-S8da-S10e-S12nu-S14
people=ABS meadow=L2.NH MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L2-lie-3.SG.S
May the people rest on the meadows under his rule!
The comitative may denote one of the acting participants in a naturally
reciprocal verbal event:
ummaki-da, dam-a-ra, e-da-ak
umma=da damhara= S2i-S6b-S8da-S11n-S12ak-S14
GN=COM battle=ABS FIN-3.SG.NH-COM-3.SG.H.A-make-3.SG.P
(Ningirsu) made abattle with Umma.
den-ki-da e-an-gur-ra-ka, ag mu-di-ni-ib-ku-u
enki=da eangurak=a ag= S4mu-S6n-S8da-S10ni-S11b-S12kuu-S14e
DN=COM TN=L1 heart=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L1-3.SG.NH.P-be.tired-3.SG.A
(Its abzu foundation pegs, big mooring stakes, he drove into the ground so deep,)
they could take counsel with the god Enki in the E-engurak.
175
LESSON 12

ama-a dumu-da gu3 nu-ma-da-de
ama=e dumu=da gu= S1nu-S4mu-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12de-S14
mother=ERG child=COM voice=ABS NEG-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-pour-3.SG.P
No mother conversed with her child.
With the verbs expressing emotion the comitative denotes the participant that
causes emotion. This usage is based on a metonymic extension of
accompaniment by implicature: the presence of an accompanying participant
is interpreted as the cause of the emotion expressed by the verbal form.
sig u-ub-ba mi-ni-ar-ra-ne,
sig= uub=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ar-S14-S15a=ane=da
brick=ABS mould=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P-SUB=3.SG.H.POSS=COM
dutu im-da-ul
utu= S2i-S4m-S5b-S8da-S12ul-S14
DN=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-COM-rejoice-3.SG.S
The god Utu rejoiced over his (= Gudea) putting the brick into the mould.
e-da lugal im-da-ul
e=da lugal= S2i- S4m-S5b-S8da-S12ul-S14
The owner rejoiced over the temple.
(298) Ishme-Dagan J 1718 (ETCSL 2.5.4.10)
nu-u-gig ama-a kur-ra-zu-ne,
nugig= ama=a kur-a=zu=ne
mistress=ABS sheepfold=L1 enter-PT=2.SG.POSS=LOC4
dinana ama a-mu-u-da-hul-le
inanak= ama= S2a-S4mu-S6e-S8da-S12hul-S13ed-S14
DN=ABS sheepfold=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-COM-rejoice-PF-3.SG.S
Mistress, when you enter the sheepfold, Inana, the sheepfold will indeed rejoice
over you.
(299) E-ana-tum 8 5:96:4 (RIME 1.9.3.8) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222411)
e2-an-na-tum, mu pad-da, dnin-ir-su-da
eanatum mu= pad-a ninirsuk=ak=da
PN name=ABS call-PT DN=GEN=COM
176
kur-kur-re sa e-dab-sig
kur~kur=e sa= S2i-S6n-S8da-S11b-S12sig-S14
land~PL=ERG head=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.NH.A-beat-3.SG.P
All the lands trembled before Eanatum, called by name by Ningirsu.
The comitative may express alocation next to, at, or by someone or something:
ear-ur-be uru gal-gen lagaki-da
arur=be= uru gal-=gen laga=da
weapon=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS standard big-TL=EQU GN=COM
im-da-sig
S2i- S5m-S5b-S8da-S11n-S12sig-S14
FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-COM-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
He embedded its Shar-ur weapon beside Lagash like abig standard.
lugal-keki-da, e-da-se
lugalke=da S2i-S6n-S8da-S12se-S14e
They live by Lugal-Ke.
lugal-e-ni-e, e-da-se
lugalenie=da S2i-S6n-S8da-S12se-S14e
They live by Lugalenie.
With the verb tuku to have the comitative denotes the participant who owes
something to someone. This use of the comitative originates in the local
meaning near to, at of the comitative: X has something which is at Y = Y
owes something to X.
(303) Nik 1, 297 2:24 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222066)
sag-sag-da, igal-si, e-da-tuku
sagsag=da igalsi=e S2i- S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14
PN=COM PN=ERG FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P
Sagsag owes this (= some wool) to Gishgalsi.
(304) MAD 4, 17 rev. 58 (Umma, 23rd c.) (P215179)
8 siki ma-na, ama-e-e, barag-nita-da
8 siki mana= amae=e baragnita=da
8 wool unit=ABS PN=ERG PN=COM
177
LESSON 12
ud-be-ta, i-da-tuku-am
ud=be=ta S2i- S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a==am-
day=DEM=ABL FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
Barag-nita owed 8 mina wool to Ama-e from earlier.
(305) TSU 12 obv. 14 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P135183)
11 udu bar-al, ur-egigir-da,
11 udu baral= urgigir=da
11 sheep hairy=ABS PN=COM
arad-e, i-da-tuku-am
arad=e S2i-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a==am-
PN=ERG FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
It was the case that Urgigir owed 11 hairy sheep to Arad.
(306) NATN 571 obv. 7 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P121269)
kug nu-mu-da-a-tuku
kug= S1nu-S4mu-S6-S8da-S11e-S12tuku-S14
silver=ABS NEG-VEN-1.SG-COM-2.SG.A-have-3.SG.P
I do not owe you silver.; lit. You do not have silver with me.
(307) NATN 626 obv. 6 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P121324)
me-da-tuku-a
S6m-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a=
1.PL-COM-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS
(all the silver what) we owe him.; lit. he has with us.
In ex. (308) below the locative2 case-marker of the debtor (Nagamu) probably
reflects the influence of the corresponding Akkadian idiom i to have, which
construes the debtor with the preposition eli on, over. Note that the verbal
form retained the original comitative prefix.
(308) NRVN 1, 65 obv. 14 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P122278)
64 gu-la gi izi
64 gula gi izi=
64 sheaf reed fire=ABS
ur-dnusku-ke, na-ga-mu-ur, an-da-tuku
urnuskuk-e nagamu=ra S2a-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tuku-S14
PN=ERG PN=L2.H FIN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P
Nagamu owes 64 sheaf of reed for burning to Ur-Nusku.
With the verb al to be somewhere the comitative denotes the participant that
possesses something. This use of the comitative originates in the local meaning
near to, at of the comitative: Something is at X = X possesses something.
178
(309) UET 3, 744 rev. 5 (Urim, 21st c.) (P137068)

simug-ne in-neda(PI)-al
simug=en=da S2i-S6nn-S8da-S12al-S14
simug=PL=COM FIN-3.PL-COM-exist-3.SG.S
The smiths have it.; lit. This is with the smiths.
(310) MVN 11, 168 rev. 8 (Umma, 21st c.) (P116181)
e e-a nu-mu-da-al
e= e=a S1nu-S4mu-S6-S8da-S10n-S12al-S14
grain=ABS house=L1 NEG-VEN-1.SG-COM-L1.SYN-exist-3.SG.S
I have no grain in the house.; lit. There is no grain in the house with me
The comitative may express ability. In these verbal forms the grammatical
subject (A or P) is also cross-referenced by acomitative prefix in the verbal
prefix-chain:
(311) NG 132 rev. 1 (Umma, 21st. c.) (P101690)
gud-be nu-mu-da-tum
gud=be= S1nu-S4mu-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12tum-S14
ox=DEM=ABS NEG-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P
He was not able to bring that ox.
(312) Nebraska 19 rev. 22 (Umma, 21st. c.) (P121704)
kiib3 lu2 nu-ub-da-su-su-da-ne
kiib lu S1nu-S2i-S5b-S8da-S12su~su-S13ed-S14-S15a=en=ak=
seal man NEG-FIN-3.SG.NH-COM-repay~PF-PF-3.SG.S-SUB=PL=GEN=ABS
The sealed tablet of the people who cannot pay back.
bar e-be nu-da-su-su-da-ka
bar e=be= S1nu-S2i-S5b-S8da-S12su~su-S13ed-S14-S15a=ak=a
outside grain=DEM=ABS NEG-FIN-3.SG.NH-COM-repay~PF-PF-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=L2.NH
As this (amount of) barley cannot not be repaid, .
With the compound verb a arm a to measure = to instruct the
comitative denotes the participant who is instructed.
dnin-zag-ga-da a mu-da-a
ninzaga=da a= S4mu-S6nn-S8da-S11n-S12a-S14
DN=COM arm=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-measure-3.SG.P
He commanded Ninzaga.
179
LESSON 12
With the verb za to be away, to run away the comitative denotes the
participant from whom someone runs away.
(315) ECTJ 50 14 (Nippur, 23rd c.) (P020464)
mlugal-a-zid-da, arad lugal-ki-gal-la, ensi-da, in-da-za
lugalazida arad lugalkigal=ak= ensik=da S2i-S6n-S8da-S12za-S14
PN servant PN=GEN=ABS ruler=COM FIN-3.SG.H-COM-flee-3.SG.S
Lugal-azida, the servant of Lugal-kigal, ran away from the ruler.
Further readings
For both cases one may consult the corresponding sections of Gragg 1973, Balke
2006, and Jagersma 2010, whose descriptions, however, differ in their approach
to cases in Sumerian. The approach of the present textbooks author is
explained in Zlyomi 2010.
The comitative prefix expressing ability is discussed in detail by Gragg 1973:
5355.
Exercises
12.3 Compare exx. (301) and (302) above. How could you explain the graphemic
presence of the comitative in the former and its absence in the latter?
write N3=ani.N5=ra (without the quotation marks) in the Search Oracc box. What
orthographic change can be recognized? Can you identify the ruler under which
the change started?
12.5 Transliterate the text Gudea 4 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232332) (Volk 2012 no. 10)
Volks sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of either Volks (2012)
180
or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to all

words. Then go to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.
edu/etcsri/Q000890), click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and
12.6 Transliterate the text Gudea Statue H (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232281) (Volk 2012 no.
18) (a photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P232281) with the help
of Volks sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of either Volks (2012) or
Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to all
words. Then go to the ETCSRI edition of the text (http://oracc.museum.upenn.
edu/etcsri/Q001547), click on the proofing link on the left side of the page, and
181
LESSON 13
THE ABLATIVE AND THE TERMINATIVE CASE
Slot 9 of the verbal prefix-chain may be filled by either an ablative or

a terminative prefix. This distribution may be explained by their converse
meaning: the participant in the ablative denotes the source of the verbal event,
while the participant in the terminative denotes its goal. This lesson describes
the verbal and nominal marking of these cases together with their most
important uses. We start with the ablative case.
13.1 The ablative case (slot 9)
Both the nominal case-marker and the verbal prefix of the ablative case are
/ta/, written as arule by the grapheme TA. Between two vowels the /t/ of the
verbal prefix may have been rhotacised to atap [], and then the prefix was
written with the grapheme RA as in exx. (321) and (326) below.
The co-occurrence of the noun phrase with an ablative case-marker and the
ablative prefix is rather loose: adverbially used verbal participants in the
ablative may occur regularly without any corresponding prefix in the verbal
prefix-chain, see, e.g., exx. (316) and (322) below. The ablative prefix may also
occur without cross-referencing any verbal participant; in this case the prefixs
function is to modify the meaning of the verb, as in ex. (321) below.
The ablative as arule is used only with non-human verbal participants;
human participants may be referred to with the circumfixal construction ki
PN=ak=ta (place PN=GEN=ABL), see ex. (322) below. In the verbal prefix-chain the
participant in the ablative may be cross-referenced either by acomposite or by
asimple adverbial prefix, for the latter see, e.g., ex. (330) below. The 3rd ps. sg.
non-human pronominal prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/. When S5 is
occupied by the middle prefix /ba/-, then the pronominal prefix /b/ may not
be used and the ablative prefix occurs in its simple form without apronominal
prefix, see, e.g., ex. (318) below.
183
LESSON 13
The ablative may be used both as an adverbial and as an adnominal case.

Used as an adverbial case its basic function is to denote the source or origin of
the verbal event.
(316) SACT 1, 154 obv. 6 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P128909)
ud ummaki-ta i-im-en-na-a
ud umma=ta S2i-S4m-S12en-S14-S15a=a
day GN=ABL FIN-VEN-go-3.SG.S-SUB=L1
When she came from Umma.
lu e-ninnu-ta im-ta-ab-E.E-a
lu eninnu=ta S2i-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S11b-S12ed-S14e-S15a
lu TN=ABL FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.P-leave-3.SG.A-SUB
The one who takes it (= the statue) out of the Eninnu.
bisa u-ub-ba-ta sig ba-ta-il
bisa uub=ak=ta sig= S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12il-S14
basket brick.mold=GEN=ABL brick MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-raise-3.SG.P
He lifted the brick out of the frame of the mould.
eg-be id-nun-ta, gu-eden-na-e, ib-ta-ni-e
eg=be= idnun=ta guedenak=e S2i-S5b-S9ta-S10ni-S11n-S12e-S14
dike=DEM=ABS GN=ABL GN=TERM FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-L1-3.SG.H.A-leave-3.SG.P
He made the dike lead from the Id-nun until the Gu-edena.
(320) Gudea Statue A 3:64:1 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232274)
kur ma-ganki-ta, naesi im-ta-e
kur magan=ta esi= S2i-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S11n-S12e-S14
mountain GN=ABL diorite=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.H.A-go.down-3.SG.P
He brought down diorite from the mountain of Magan.
lu inim=ak sa sa-a=ak=e S4mu-S6nn-S8a-S9ta-S12e-S14
man word=GEN head buy-PT=GEN=TERM VEN-3.PL-DAT-ABL-leave-3.SG.S
bought.
184
The ablative and the terminative case
(322) AUCT 1, 942 rev. 56 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P103787)

ki puzur-er-ra-ta, ba-zig
ki puzurera=ak=ta S5ba-S12zig-S14
place PN=GEN=ABL MID-raise-3.SG.S
These were deducted from Puzur-Era.
(323) DP 339, rev. 2:33:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220989)
iri-ka-gi-na, lugal, lagaki-ke, e-gal-ta e-ta-ed-de
irikaginak lugal laga=ak=e egal=ta S2i-S5b-S9ta-S11b-S12ed-S14e
RN king GN=GEN=ERG palace=ABL FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.NH.P-leave-3.SG.A
Irikagina, king of Lagash, will supply them from the palace.
(324) DP 512 rev. 2:14 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221162)
ul-me, agrig-ge, e-gal-ta, e-ta-ar
ulme agrig=e egal=ta S2i-S5b-S9ta-S11n-S12ar-S14
PN steward=ERG palace=ABL FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
ulme, the steward, supplied them from the palace.
When the participant in the ablative is aset of similar entities, then the ablative
may have aseparative meaning. In ex. (325) Gudea is selected out of agroup of
people. In ex. (326) the month (iti) is considered as aset of days. In ex. (327) the
word ab cow refers to agroup of cows.
ag lu 216.000-ta, u-ne
ag lu 216.000=ak=ta u=ane=
heart man 216.000=GEN=ABL hand=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS
ba-ta-an-dab-ba-a
S5ba-S9ta-S11n-S12dab-S14-S15a=a
MID-ABL-3.SG.H.A-seize-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
(When) he selected him out of 216.000 people, .
(326) OIP 115, 126 rev. 5 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P123715)
iti-ta ud 8 ba-ra-zal
itid=ta ud 8= S5ba-S9ta-S12zal-S14
month=ABL day 8=ABS MID-ABL-pass-3.SG.S
8 days elapsed from the month.
(327) SAT 1, 189 rev. 2 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P131298)
ab-ta niin-na
ab=ta niin-a
cow=ABL encircle-PT
(these animals are) separated from the cows
185
LESSON 13
The adverbial ablative may also denote the participant that functions as the
tool or instrument with which an action is carried out as in exx. (328)(330)
below.
(328) JCS 10, 28 no. 5 obv. 6 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P111899)
1 udu niga lugal-e iri-ta in-gaz
1 udu niga= lugal=e iri=ta S2i-S11n-S12gaz-S14
1 sheep fattened king=ERG dagger=ABL FIN-3.SG.H.A-kill-3.SG.P
One fattened sheep killed by the king with adagger.
me-salim, lugal kiki-ke, inim ditaran-na-ta,
mesalim lugal ki=ak=e inim itaran=ak=ta
RN king GN=GEN=ERG word DN=GEN=ABL
e-gana be-ra,
egana= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ra-S14
measuring.line=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-hit-3.SG.P
ki-ba na bi-du
ki-be-a na= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12du-S14
ki=DEM=L2.NH stone=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
By the order of the god Ishtaran, Mesalim, king of Kish, laid the measuring line
on it, and set up astela on that place.
nam e-na-ta-kud
nam= S2i-S6nn-S8a-S9ta-S11n-S12kud-S14
fate=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-ABL-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
(E-ana-tum gave the great battle-net of Enlil to the Ummaite, and) let him swear
apromissory oath by it.16
In ex. (331) below the adverbial ablative is used in the meaning apart from, in
addition.
(331) E-ana-tum 5 6:25 (RIME 1.9.3.5) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222400)
nam-ensi, lagaki-ta, nam-lugal kiki,
namensik laga=ak=ta namlugal ki=ak=
rulership GN=GEN=ABL kingship GN=GEN=ABS
16 On the causative interpretation of this example, see Lesson 15, section 15.4 below.
186
mu-na-ta-um
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S9ta-S11n-S12um-S14
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-ABL-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
In addition to the rulership of Lagash, she also gave him the kingship of Kish.
The ablative may also be used in atemporal sense: noun phrases in the ablative
answer the question since when? as in exx. (332) and (333) below.
(332) TCS 1, 148 obv. 6 (Umma, 21st c.) (P141927)
mu du-dsuen lugal-ta
mu usuen lugal=ta
year RN king=ABL
Since the year: u-Suen (became) king
(333) Nik 1, 156 rev. 1:4 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221925)
eir gurum-ma-ta
eir gurum=ak=ta
back inspection=GEN=ABL
After stock-taking
When used as an adnominal ablative, the noun phrase in the ablative is in an
attributive relation to another noun, i.e., it functions as its modifier. The most
common function of the adnominal ablative is to denote the origin or location
of an entity.
The noun phrase in the ablative may relate syntactically to the modified
noun in three different ways:
i) the noun phrase in the ablative may be part of the noun phrase whose head
is the modified noun. In ex. (334), it occupies P2 of the noun phrase whose head
it modifies, and is followed by a possessive pronominal enclitic in P3 and
a case-marker in P5. In ex. (344), the noun phrase kug-babbar 8 gi-ta
functions as the modifier of ar, and is followed by acase-marker in P5. In ex.
(347), it occupies P2 of anoun phrase that itself functions as the possessor of
another noun phrase. The analysis of exx. (335) and (336) is corroborated by
the verbal form in ex. (335). Here the finite verb is in the 3rd ps. pl., which
indicates that Dudu with his wife and child(ren) function together as the
subject of the verb.
ii) the noun phrase in the ablative is outside the noun phrase whose head it
modifies. In exx. (337)(340) the noun phrase in the ablative is unlikely to be
part of the noun phrase whose head it modifies. Syntactically it is aseparate
noun phrase that nevertheless functions as the attribute of the noun phrase in
the ergative in exx. (337), (338), and (340), and in the locative2 in ex. (339).
187
LESSON 13
iii) Both the noun phrase in the ablative and the noun phrase whose head it
modifies function as separate arguments of the same verb. Consequently, the
noun phrase in the ablative has double case-markers: the inner, ablative case-
marker signifies its function as amodifier, the outer case-marker signifies its
function as averbal argument. In ex. (343) each of the women of former days is
characterized by having married two men; the former noun phrase functions
as the Aof the verb, signalled by the ergative case-marker, while the latter
functions as the patient of the verb signalled by the absolutive. In ex. (342) each
of the ten bulls is to be replaced with two cows (signalled by the ablative); and
the cows are also in the absolutive as the S of the non-finite verbal form.
dnane nin diir sirara-ta-u,
P1 nane P1 nin P1diir P2[sirara=ta]=P3u=P5e
P1DN P1sister P1god P2[GN=ABL]=P31.SG.POSS=P5ERG
ag-be a-ma-pad-de
ag=be= S1a-S4m-S8a-S12pad-S14e
heart=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS MOD-VEN-DAT-find-3.SG.A
May my Nanshe, the sister, the goddess from Sirara, reveal its meaning to me!
du-du, saa, dam dumu-ne-ta,
P1dudu P1saa P2[dam dumu=ane=ta]=e
P1 PN P1 official P2[wife child=3.SG.H.POSS=ABL]=ERG
e ki-sal-la-ka, i-gu-ne
e kisal=ak=a S2i-S10n-S12gu-S14en
house GN=GEN=L1 FIN-L1.SYN-eat-3.PL.A
Dudu, the temple administrator, together with his wife and child(ren), will
consume them in the temple of Kisal.
(336) VS 27, 47 rev. 1:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020363)
[u]-niin 119 u sila-be-ta
uniin 119 P1u P2[sila=be=ta]=P5
total 119 P1ewe P2[lamb=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABL]=P5ABS
ud ma-be-ta
P1ud P2[ma=be=ta]=P5
P1 goat P2[kid=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABL]=P5ABS
Total: 119 ewes together with their lambs, and goats with their kids
188
(337) Gudea Statue H 3:15 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232281)

nin dumu ki a an kug-ga-ke,
P1 nin P1 dumu P2 [ki= a-] P3 [an kug=ak]= P5e
P1 lady P1 child P2 [place=ABS measure- TL] P3 [DN holy=GEN ]=P5ERG
ama dba-u, e-tar-sir-sir-ta,

P1ama P1bau=P5e P1etarsirsir=P5ta
P1 mother P1DN=P5ERG P1TN=P5ABL
gu-de-a nam-til mu-na-um

gudea=ra namtil= S4mu-S6nn-S8a-S11n-S12um-S14
PN=DAT.H life=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
The lady, beloved daughter of the holy An, mother Bau of the Etarsirsir gave
Gudea life.
(338) Gudea Statue F 1:122:1 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232279)
da-tum-dug, nin-a-ne,
P1atumdug P1nin=P3ane=P5e
P1 DN P1lady=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ERG
lagaki, iri ki a-a-ne-ta

P1 laga P1 iri P2 [ki= a-]=P3ane=P5ta
P1GN P1city P2[place=ABS measure-TL]=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABL
unu uba-a, mu-ni-tud-da-a

unu uba=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12tud-S14-S15a=a
dwelling shining=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
, to whom Gatumdug, his lady from Lagash, her beloved city, gave birth in the
shining sanctuary.
sa2-dug4-na, e2 dnin-irsu-ka-ta,
P1sadug=P3ane=P5a P1e P3[ninirsuk=ak]=P5ta

P1 offering=P3 3 SG .POSS =P5 L 2. NH P1house P3[DN=GEN]=P5ABL
inim e-eb2-gi4
inim= S1a-S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12gi-S14
word=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-return-3.SG.S
May his regular offering in the temple of Ningirsu be withdrawn!
hur-sa uruda-ke ki-ma-ta,
P1 hursa P3 [uruda=ak]=P5 e P1kima=P5ta
P1mountain P3[copper=GEN]=P5ERG P1GN=P5ABL
189
LESSON 13
ni-be mu-na-ab-pad
ni=be= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12pad-S14
self=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.A-find-3.SG.P
The copper mountain in Kimash revealed itself to him.
The adnominal ablative may have a distributive use: the expression in the
ablative then denotes an attribute that characterizes each individual member
of aset, as in exx. (341)(344) below. In ex. (341) each package is characterized
by containing 15 bundles; in ex. (342) each bull of agroup of 10 bulls is to be
replaced with two cows; and in ex. (343) each woman is said to have married
two men. In ex. (344) each of the persons mentioned received 2 rings, and each
ring is of 8 shekels of silver.
(341) SA 149 12 (Umma, 21st c.) (P128727)
720 sa gi, gu-kilib-ba 15 sa-ta
720 sa gi=ak P1gukilib=P5a 15 P1sa=P5ta
720 bundle reed=GEN P1package=P5L1 15 P1bundle=P5ABL
720 bundles of reed, in each packages (there are) 15 bundles.
(342) AUCT 1, 181 12 (Drehem, 21st. c.) (P103027)
10 gud niga, ab 2-ta ki-ba a-a
10 gud niga P2[P1ab P22=P5ta=P5 ki=be=a a~a-ed]=P5
10 ox fat P2[P1cow P22=P5ABL=P5ABS place=3.SG.NH.POSS=L2.NH put~PF-PF]=P5ABS
Ten fattened bulls: to be replaced with 2 cows each
munus ud-be-ta-ke-ne, nita 2-ta,
P1munus P3[ud=be=ta=ak]=P4en=P5e P1nita P22=P5ta=P5
P1 woman P3 [day=DEM =ABL =GEN ]=P4 PL=P5ERG P1man P22=P5ABL=P5ABS
i-tuku-am
S2i-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a==am-
FIN-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
The women of old days married two men each.
(344) AUCT 1, 942 obv. 58 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P103787)
2 ar kug-babbar 8 gi-ta-ta,
2 P1ar P2[kugbabbar 8 gi=ta]=P5ta
2 P1ring P2[silver 8 unit=ABL]=P5ABL
dul-gi-nu-ri nar munus, ba-la-la dumu a-ga-lum,
ulginuri nar munus balala dumu agalum
PN singer woman PN child PN
190
ud ma-ri-tum mu-ni-kur-re-a
ud maritum= S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12kur-S14e-S15a-a
day instrument=ABS VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-enter-3.PL-SUB-L1
Each person 2 silver rings of eight shekels of silver each: ulgi-nuri, female
singer, and Balala, son of Agalum: when they brought in the maritum-instrument.
13.2 The terminative case (slot 9)
The nominal case-marker of the terminative is /e/ written the sign E. The
verbal prefix is /i/, written with the sign I.
Around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE the vowel of the terminative
prefix /i/ assimilated to the vowel of the following syllable in respect of
vowel height (the so-called vowel harmony of the literature). The high
form was written with the grapheme I, transliterated as i-; while the low form
was written with grapheme E, transliterated as e-, see, e.g., ex. (356) below.
When the nominal case-marker is preceded by an open syllable, then the
enclitic =/e/ may be reduced to //, in which case the terminative case-marker
is often not present graphemically, especially in the 3rd millennium BCE, see,
e.g., ex. (358) below.
The co-occurrence of the noun phrase with aterminative case-marker and
the terminative prefix is rather loose: adverbially used verbal participants in
the terminative often occur without any corresponding prefix in the verbal
prefix-chain, see, e.g., exx. (348) and (375) below.
The terminative may be used with both human and non-human verbal
participants. In the verbal prefix-chain the participant in the terminative may
be cross-referenced either by acomposite or by asimple adverbial prefix, for
the latter see, e.g., ex. (356) below. The simple prefix always cross-references
a3rd ps. sg. non-human participant.
The 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP // in S6, see, e.g., ex. (373)
below. The 2nd ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP /e/ in S6, see, e.g., ex. (372)
below.
The 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal is expressed with the prefix /n/ in S6.
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human pronominal prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/
in S5 of the verbal template. When S5 is occupied by the middle prefix /ba/-,
then the pronominal prefix /b/ may not be used and the terminative prefix
occurs in its simple form without apronominal prefix, see, e.g., ex. (377) below.
191
LESSON 13
The 3rd ps. pl. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, see, ex. (351)
below.
The basic function of the terminative is to denote the destination or goal of
the verbal event.
(345) En-ana-tum I 2 rev. 4:105:2 (RIME 1.9.4.2) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222496)
eg ki-sur-ra, dnin-ir-su-ka-e, mu-gaz
eg kisura=ak ninirsuk=ak=e S4mu-S11n-S12gaz-S14-
dyke border DN=GEN=TERM VEN-3.SG.H.A-kill-3.SG.P
(En-ana-tum) drove (Urluma, ruler of Umma) back until the border canal of
Ningirsu.
iri-ne niinki-e id-niinki-du-a
iri=ane niin=e idniindua=a
city=3.SG.H.POSS GN=TERM WN=L1
ma mu-ni-ri
ma= S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ri-S14
boat=ABS VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-impose-3.SG.P
He directed the boat on the canal Id-Niin-dua towards her city Niin.
ensi-ke kisal diir sirara-ta-ka
ensik=e P1 kisal [
P3 P1 diir P2[sirara=ta]=P5ak]=P5a
ruler=ERG P1courtyard P3[P1god P2[GN=ABL]= P5GEN]=P5L1
sa an-e mi-ni-il
sa= an=e S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12il-S14
head=ABS sky=TERM VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-raise-3.SG.P
The ruler raised his head high (lit., towards the sky) in the courtyard of the
goddess from Sirara.
PN=DAT city=3.SG.H.POSS GN=TERM neck=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-fill~PF-3.SG.A
(Magan and Meluhha) gathered for Gudea at his city Girsu.
ur-sa e-a-na ku-ku-da-ne,
ursa= e=ane=a ku~ku-ed-a=ane=e
hero=ABS house=3.SG.H.POSS=L1 enter~PF-PF-SUB-3.SG.H.POSS=L3.NH
192
ud me-e gu aar-am
ud me=e gu= ar-==am-

storm battle=TERM sound=ABS put-TL=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
As the warrior entered his temple, he was astorm roaring into battle.
(350) NG 120b rev. 910 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131776)
nag-suki-e a-za-num-e, mu-na-an-la
nagsu=e hazanum=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12la-S14
(351) SNAT 125 obv. 47 (unknown, 21st c.) (P129886)
ur-dnin-tur-ke, ur-dsuen u, nin-dub-sar dam-ne-e,
urninturak=e ursuen u nindubsar dam=ane=e
PN=ERG PN and PN wife=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM
in-ne-i-sa
S2i-S6nn-S9i-S11n-S12sa-S14
FIN-3.PL-TERM-3.SG.H.A-buy-3.SG.P
Ur-Nintura bought (a maiden) from (lit. bartered [a maiden] towards) Ur-Suen
and Nindubsar, his wife, (for 2 and 2/3 shekels of silver ).
(352) HSS 3, 42 rev. 2:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221351)
e-zi e-muhaldim-e, al-la
ezi emuhaldim=e al-a
wall kitchen=term exist-PT
wall that lies towards the kitchen
The destination of the verbal event may also be an abstract entity but not
alocality. The noun phrase in the terminative may then denote the result, see
exx. (353)(355), purpose, see exx. (357)(362), or the reason of the verbal event,
see exx. (363)(366).
Abstract destination = result

ku hab-e ak-de, amar-giridki mualdimra,
ku= hab=e ak-ed=e amargirid mualdim=ra
fish=ABS fish.oil=TERM make-PF=DAT.NH PN cook=DAT.H
en-ig-gal, nu-banda, e-na-um
en-ig-gal nubanda=e S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
PN overseer=ERG FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
En-iggal, the overseer, has given the fish to Amar-Girid, the cook, so that he (= A.)
makes them into fish-oil (?).
193
LESSON 13

alan-na-ne-e, mu-tud
alan=ane=e S4mu-S11n-S12tud-S14
statue=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM VEN-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P
He made it (= block of diorite) into his own statue.
eeren-be, ig gal-e, mu-dim
eren=be= ig gal-=e S4mu-S11n-S12dim-S14
cedar=DEM=ABS door great-TL=TERM VEN-3.SG.H.A-make-3.SG.P
He manufactured the cedar-beams into big doors.
Abstract destination = purpose
(356) Aya-Ane-pada 6 15 (RIME 1.13.6.6) (Ur, 24th c.) (P222841)

dnin-a-zu, lu-dug-[ga], nam-til, aya-an-ne-pad-da-e,
ninazu=ra luduga=e namtil ayaanepada=ak=e

DN=DAT.H PN=ERG life PN=GEN=TERM
a mu-na-e-ru
a= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S9i-S11n-S12ru-S14
water=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-TERM-3.SG.H.A-impose-3.SG.P
To Nin-azu, Luduga dedicated this for the well-being of Aya-Ane-pada.
Note that in the following example there are two verbal participants in the
terminative:
(357) Anonymous Nippur 6 17 (Nippur, 24th c.) (P222761)
dnin-lil, den-lil(E)-la, dumu ad-da-ke,
ninlil=ra enlilak dumu adda=ak=e

DN=DAT.H PN child PN=GEN=ERG
ga-til-la-e, nam-til, dam dumu-na-e,
gatila=e namtil dam dumu=ane=ak=e
offering=TERM life wife child=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=TERM
a mu-na-ru
a= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12ru-S14
water=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-impose-3.SG.P
To Ninlil, Enlila, child of Adda, dedicated this (vessel) as avotive offering for the
well-being of his spouse and child.
194
(358) E-ana-tum 1 obv. 4:2023 (RIME 1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222399)
e-an-na, dinana, eb-gal-ka-ka a-tum,
eana inanak ebgal=ak=ak=a S2a-S5b-S10(i>)S12tum-S14
TN DN TN=GEN=GEN=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-worthy.of-3.SG.S
mu mu-ne-e
mu=e S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12e-S14
name=TERM VEN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-call-3.SG.P
(Inana) named (lit. called as name) him (= E-ana-tum) He is worthy of the E-
ana of Inana of the Ebgal.
(359) Ishme-Dagan 7 17 (RIME 4.1.4.7) (Isin, 20th c.) (Q001951)
di-me-dda-gan, lugal ki-en-gi ki-uri-ra, ud den-lil-le, dnin-urta,
imedagan lugal kengir kiuri=ak=ra ud enlil=e ninurta

PN king GN GN=GEN=L3.H day DN=ERG DN
ur-sa kalag-ga-ne, makim-e,
ursa kalag=ane= makim=e
hero strong=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS deputy=TERM
mu-ni-in-tuku-a
S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a=a
VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
When the god Enlil appointed Ninurta, his powerful warrior, as commissioner
to Ishme-Dagan, king of Sumer and Akkad.
(360) Iri-kagina 14q 12 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222653)
iri-ka-gi-na, nam-sipad-e mu-tud
irikaginak= namsipad=e S4mu-S11n-S12tud-S14
PN=ABS shepherdship=TERM VEN-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P
(Bau) gave birth to Iri-kagina so that he becomes ashepherd.
(361) En-ana-tum I 3 1516 (RIME 1.9.4.3) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P431100)
ur a-lu-ub, i-du-e mu-na-durun(TU.TU)-na
ur alub idu=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12durun-S14-S15a=a
lion halub.tree doorkeeper=TERM VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-sit.PL-3.SG.P-SUB=L2.NH
on the halub-tree lions which he seated for him as doorkeepers.
(362) AUCT 1, 328 obv. 56 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P103173)
1 gud u-gid, e-muhaldim-e
1 gud ugid emuhaldim=e
1 bull supply kitchen=TERM
1 bull, supply for the kitchen
195
LESSON 13
Abstract destination = reason

a-ne sa-a-ne-e diir-ra-am
ane= sa=ane=e diir==am-
3.SG.PR=ABS head=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM god=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
He, because of his head, was agod.

lugal mu-ne-e kur tuku-tuku-e
lugal mu=ane=e kur= tuku~tuku-=e
king name=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM mountain=ABS rock~PL-TL=ERG
The king, at whose name (lit. because of whose name) all foreign countries
tremble.
With the compound verb u hand ti to approach = to receive the

terminative denotes the participant from whom something is received:

lugal-a-ne sizkur ra-zu-ne gu-de-a-a,
lugal=ane=e sizkur arazu=ane= gudea=e
king=3.SG.H.POSS=ERG prayer supplication=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS PN=TERM
en dnin-ir-su-ke u ba-i-ti
en ninirsuk=e u=e S5ba-S6n-S9i-S11n-S12ti-S14
lord DN=ERG hand=L3.NH MID-3.SG.H-TERM-3.SG.H.A-approach-3.SG.P
His master, Lord Ningirsu, accepted from Gudea his prayer and supplication.
The terminative is used in the construction mu name/bar outside

NP=ak/possessive pronoun=e, which means because of (see also ex. [81] in
Lesson 5, section 5.3. above):
(366) LEM 178 7 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P112521)
bar-u-e u e-bar-re
bar=u=e u= S1a-S2i-S5b-S10(i>) -S12bar-S14e
outside=1.SG.POSS=TERM hand=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-open-3.SG.A
May he release it because of me!
196
(367) OIP 121, 470 11 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P124200)

mu agina ibun(KI.BI) tu-a-ne-e
mu agina ibun= tu-a=en=ak=e
name general meal=ABS sit-PT=PL=GEN=TERM
because of the generals who are having ameal
The terminative may also be used in atemporal sense: noun phrases in the
terminative answer the question until when, how long:
(368) TCS 1, 56 rev. 5 (Umma, 21st. c.) (P145646)
ud-te-ta i-ba-e
udten=ta iba=e
evening=ABL midnight=TERM
from evening until midnight
The terminative is used in the construction igi NP=ak/possessive pronoun=e,
which means before, in the presence of:
(369) Sargon 11 3637 (RIME 2.1.1.11) (Agade, 23rd c.) (Q001403)
igi-ne-e, ninda i-gu-e
igi=ane=e ninda= S2i-S11b-S12gu-S14e
face=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM bread=ABS FIN-3.SG.NH.P-eat-3.SG.A
(5400 people) eat (daily) before him (= Sharrukin)
Verbs of seeing may construe their perceptual target with the terminative as
in the following examples:
DN=ERG lord DN=TERM
igi zid mu-i-bar
Enlil looked at lord Ningirsu with approval.
ud dnin-ir-su-ke, iri-ne-e
ud ninirsuk=e iri=ane=e
day DN=ERG city=3.SG.H.POSS=TERM
igi zid im-i-bar-ra
igi zid-= S2i-S4m-S5b-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14-S15a
face right-TL=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P-SUB
When Ningirsu had looked favourably upon his city, .
197
LESSON 13
(372) Shulgi R 2 (ETCSL 2.4.2.18)

[a]-a den-lil-le igi zid mu-u-i-bar
aja enlil=e igi zid-= S4mu-S6e-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14
father DN=ERG face right-TL=ABS VEN-2.SG-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P
Father Enlil looked at you with approval.
(373) Ishme-Dagan ASegment A103 (ETCSL 2.5.4.01)
igi nam-til-la-ka-ne u-mu-i-in-bar
igi namtil=ak=ane= S1a-S4mu-S6-S9i-S11n-S12bar-S14
face life=GEN=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MOD-VEN-1.SG-TERM-3.SG.H.A-direct-3.SG.P
She indeed looked at me with her life-giving look.
ab amar-be-e igi al-la-gen
ab amar=be=e igi= al-a=gen
cow calf-3.SG.NH.POSS=TERM eye=ABS exist-PT-EQU
Like acow keeping an eye on its calf,
In some cases, the terminative appears to express not destination, but location
next to something, as in the following examples:
(375) En-ana-tum I 3 11 (RIME 1.9.4.3) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P431100)
e-e mu-na-si-si-ga
e=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12sig~sig-S14-S15a
house=TERM VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-fill~PL-3.SG.P-SUB
(when ) he set them (= cedar trees) up around the temple.
ensi-ke da-tum-dug-e ki-nu-a-ne ba-gub
ensik=e atumdug=e kinu=ane= S5ba-S11n-S12gub-S14
ruler=ERG DN=TERM bed=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MID-3.SG.H.A-stand-3.SG.P
The ruler set up his bed for himself near to Gatumdug.
pisa u-ub-ba-e ma ba-i-nu
pisa uub=ak=e ma= S5ba-S9i-S11n-S12nu-S14
frame mould=GEN=TERM kid=ABS MID-TERM-3.SG.H.A-lie-3.SG.P
At the brick-mould he had akid lie down.
198
Further readings
For both cases one may consult the corresponding sections of Gragg 1973, Balke
2006, and Jagersma 2010, whose descriptions, however, differ in their approach
to cases in Sumerian. The approach of the present textbooks author is
The constructions used with the compound verb igi bar are discussed in
Zlyomi 2007b. This study also discusses the changes in these constructions on
the influence of Akkadian.
The interpretation of ex. (338) above and the function of the adnominal
ablative are discussed in Bauer 2005.
On the different constructions used with the adnominal ablative, see
Svegjrt 2011: 3132, who convincingly argues in connection with the equative
case that anoun phrase in an adnominal case may not be part of the noun phrase
whose head it modifies.
Exercises
13.3 Transliterate the text of NG 1 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111896) (a handcopy of the text
can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P111896) with the help of Volks sign list
(2012), the text is no. 32 in Volks (2012) chrestomathy. Translate the text with the
help of either Volks (2012) or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic
segmentation and glossing to the verbal forms.
13.4 Transliterate the text of NG 69 (Umma, 21st c.) (P101688) (a handcopy of the text
can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P101688) with the help of Volks sign list
(2012). Translate the text with the help of either Volks (2012) or Foxvogs glossary
(2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to the verbal forms.
13.5 Transliterate the text VS 14, 35 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020049) with the help of Volks
sign list (2012). Acopy and photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.
edu/P020049. The text is no. 42 in Volks (2012) chrestomathy. Translate the text
with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs (2016b) glossary. For the numerical
199
LESSON 13
expression used in them you may consult ORACCs preliminary description of

metrological expressions (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/doc/downloads/
numref.pdf), or Powells entry in the Reallexikon der Assyriologie (198790).
200
LESSON 14
THE LOCATIVE CASES
Slot 10 of the verbal prefix-chain is the last of the slots containing an adverbial
prefix. It may be filled with the verbal marker of either of three cases: locative1
locative2, and locative3. This lesson describes the verbal and nominal marking
of these three cases together with their most important uses.
14.1 The adverbial cases of Slot 10
The verbal marking of the adverbial cases of S10 shows a variety of forms
depending on the morphological environment. These forms can be classified
into various groups based on i) whether the prefixes have a simple or
acomposite form and ii) whether S11 is empty.
There may be several reasons why S11 is empty: i) the verbal form is
intransitive, see. e.g., ex. (403) below; ii) in atransitive present-future verbal
form no prefix cross-references the non-human P, see, e.g., ex. (416) below;
iii) in verbal forms containing the modal-prefix /ga/- no prefix cross-references
the non-human P, see, e.g. ex. (423) below; or iv) in imperative forms no prefix
cross-references the non-human P, see, e.g., ex. (413) below.
For asummary of the forms of the verbal markers of the three locative cases
see Table 14.1 below; for the detailed description of the various forms listed in
this table see the subsections on the respective cases below (note that Table
14.1 lists only attested forms). For asummary of their nominal markers and
functions, see Table 14.2 below.
Table 14.1 below shows that there are important differences among the
verbal markings of the locative cases. The locative1 is only cross-referenced by
simple prefixes. The locative3 has no syncopated and simple forms; when S11
is not used for cross-referencing another verbal participant, it is cross-
referenced by afinal pronominal prefix in S11, see section 14.4 below for the
details.
201
LESSON 14
Table 14.1: The verbal marking of the locative cases
COMPOSITE FORM SIMPLE FORM FPP
S11 filled S11 empty S11 S11 empty

filled
L1 /ni/a)
S10 S10/n/
b)
(L1) (L1.SYN)
L2 S4 /mu/-S10/e/c) S4 /mu/-S10/e/h)
(VEN-L2) (VEN-L2)

S6 /r/-S10/i/d) S6 /r/-S10/i/ S6/?/-S10//i)
(2.SG-L2) (2.SG-L2) (2.SG-L2.SYN)
S6 /nn/-S10/i/e) /nn/-S10/i/ S6/n/-S10//j)

S6
(3.SG.H-L2) (3.SG.H-L2) (3.SG.H-L2.SYN)
/b/-S10/i/f)
S5 S5/b/-S10/i/ S5/b/-S10//
k)
/e/m)
S10
(3.SG.NH-L2) (3.SG.NH-L2) (3.SG.NH-L2.SYN) (L2)
/nn/-S10/e/g) S6 /nn/-S10/e/l)
S6
(3.PL-L2) (3.PL-L2)
L3 S4 /mu/-S10/e/n) //s)
S11
(VEN-L3) (1.SG)
S6 /r/-S10/i/o) S11//t)
(2.SG-L3) (2.SG)
S6 /nn/-S10/i/p)
(3.SG.H-L3)
/b/-S10/i/q)
S5 S11/b/u)
(3.SG.NH-L3) (3.SG.NH)
S6 /nn/-S10/e/r)
(3.PL-L3)
[a) exx. (378), (380), (381); (382), (383a), (384), (439); b) exx. (379), (383b), (385);
c) ex. (405), (410); d) ex. (392); e) exx. (167), (389), (393), (395), (401), (408),
(411b); f) exx. (168), (386), (390), (402), (404), (409), (412), (424); g) ex. (396);
h) exx. (394), (413); i) ex. (407); j) ex. (388), (417), (418); k) exx. (391), (397),
(411a), (415), (420); l) ex. (416); m) exx. (169), (398a), (399), (400), (403), (414),
(419), (422), (423); n) (433); o) ex. (406), (440); p) exx. (426), (434), (441); q) exx.
(427), (430), (435), (442), (445), (446); r) ex. (443); s) ex. (425); t) ex. (438); u) exx.
(429); (432), (436), (437), (439), (444)]
202
The locative cases
The locative2 and locative3 both differ from the locative1 in implying
movement to or location outside an entity; the locative1 implies movement into
or location inside an entity. The difference between the locative2 and Locative3
encodes adifference in relative orientation: both patterns imply proximity and
contact from outside, but the locative2 implies horizontal direct contact (= above),
while the locative3 implies anon-horizontal direct contact (= beside). The local
meanings of the three locative cases of S10 are summarized in Table 14.2 below:
Table 14.2: The meaning of the locative cases
FUNCTION NOMINAL MARKERS

CASE LOCATION DESTINATION HUMAN NON-HUMAN
at to
LOCATIVE1 inessive illative =/a/
LOCATIVE2 superessive sublative =/ra/ =/a/
LOCATIVE3 adessive allative =/ra/ =/e/
14.2 The locative1
The locative1 is used only with non-human verbal participants. The locative1
prefix /ni/ has no composite form, only asimple form: it always occurs without
apronominal prefix, and always refers to a3rd ps. non-human participant. The
nominal case-marker of the locative1 is =/a/.
If S11 contains no morpheme and consequently the locative1 prefix forms
an open unstressed syllable, then the vowel of the prefix /ni/ becomes synco-
pated, and the prefix is reduced to /n/. Instructive about this phenomenon are
the two forms of the same verb in ex. (383) below: the first verbal form is
transitive, S11 is filled with the morpheme /n/ and the locative1 prefix has the
form /ni/; the second verbal form is intransitive in which S11 is empty, and the
locative1 prefix has the syncopated form /n/. The prefix /ni/, the non-synco-
pated form of the locative1 prefix, is written as arule with the grapheme NI.
The syncopation of the locative1 prefix results in the compensatory
lengthening of the finite marker, indicated by plene-writing from the end of
the 3rd millennium BCE, see ex. (379) below.
The vowel of the locative1 prefix /ni/ assimilates to the vowel of the
following syllable in respect to vowel height (the so-called vowel harmony of
the literature) around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE. Both forms were
203
LESSON 14
written with the grapheme NI, but it is assumed in this textbook that the high
and the low forms were /ni/ and /ne/ respectively, reflected by the
transliteration ni- and ne-.
In its basic function the locative1 indicates alocation inside something, see,
e.g., ex. (335) above, exx. (378) and (379) below; or a movement inside
something, see exx. (380)(382) below. The location may also be within an
abstract entity like astatement, as in ex. (383) below.
ag iri-na-ka, a-ne-gaz-ze(AB.A.GE)
ag iri=ane=ak=a S1a-S10ni-S11n-S12gaz-S14e
heart city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=L1 MOD-L1-3.SG.H.P-kill-3.SG.A
May (the people) kill him in the middle of his city!
(379) MVN 3, 363 rev. 35 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P113923)
kiib ur-dul-pa-e-ka, bee ur-dba-u-ka
kiib urulpaek=ak bee urbauk=a
seal PN=GEN basket PN=L1
i-in-al-la-ta, tur-re-dam
i- n-
S2 S10 S11 al- -
S14 S15 a=ta tur-ed==am-
FIN-L1.SYN-exist-3.SG.S-SUB=ABL small-PF=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
These (various animals) are to be subtracted from the sealed tablet of Ur-Shulpae
that is in the basket of Ur-Bau.
The locative1 may be the very first prefix of averbal form. Illuminating about
this phenomenon are the two forms of the same verb in exx. (380) and (381)
below: both forms are transitive and must contain alocative prefix, ex. (381)
differs only in the presence of aventive prefix.
Verbal forms like the one in ex. (380) were earlier transliterated as i-ar
(S2i-S11n-S12ar-S14 = FIN-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P). Verbal forms like the one in ex.
(382), however, suggest that the form should start with aprefix /ni/: because
of the vowel harmony, aform like S2i-S11n-S12ar-S14 would be written as e-
ar around the middle of 3rd millennium BCE. In the context of ex. (382) the
graphemes NI GAR may therefore only be transliterated as ne-ar (S10ni-S11n-
S12ar-S14 = L1-3.SG.H.A-put-3.SG.P), but not as i-ar.

gu-de-a im u-ub-ba ni-ar
gudea=e im= uub=a S10ni-S11n-S12ar-S14
PN=ERG clay=ABS mould=L1 L1-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
Gudea put clay into the mould.
204
The locative cases

sig u-ub-ba mi-ni-ar-ra-ne,
sig= uub=a S4mu-S10ni-S11n-S12ar-S14-S15a=ane=da
brick=ABS mould=L1 VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-put-3.SG.P-SUB=3.SG.H.POSS=COM
dutu im-da-hul
utu= S2i- S4m-S6b-S8da-S12hul-S14
DN=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-COM-rejoice-3.SG.S
The god Utu rejoiced over his (= Gudea) putting the brick into the mould.
(382) DP 601 obv. 1:32:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P221251)
a-ne-kur-ra, sa apin-ke, numun ne-ar
anekura sa apin=ak=e numun= S10ni-S11n-S12ar-S14
PN head plough=GEN=ERG seed=ABS L1-3.SG.H.A-PLACE-3.SG.P
Anekura, the chief ploughman sowed it with seeds; lit. put the seeds in (the
earth)
(383) NG 99 rev. 1:35 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111162)
i-bi-la du-du-ke-ne, ka-ga-ne-ne-a ba-ni-gi-in-e,
ibila dudu=ak=en=e kag=anen=a S5ba-S10ni-S11n-S12gin-S14e
heir PN=GEN=PL=ERG mouth=3.PL.POSS=L1 MID-L1-3.SG.H.A-confirm-3.PL
mu inim i-bi-la-ne-ka ba-an-gi-na-e
mu inim ibila=en=ak=a S5ba-S10n- S12gin-S14- S15a=ak=e
name word heir=PL=GEN=L1 MID-L1.SYN-confirm-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM
The heirs of Dudu confirmed this in their account (lit. in their mouths). Since
it has been verified in the statement of the heirs, .
The locative1 may denote the verbal participant which functions as the material
with which averbal action is carried out:
nam-nun-da-ki-ar-ra, ur-be
namnundakiara=ak ur=be=
CN=GEN base=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS
na-a mu-na-ni-du
na=a S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S10ni-S11n-S12du=S14
stone=L1 VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
He built the fundaments of the Namnunda-kigara-canal from stone for him.
sipad-de e kug-ga mu-du-e
sipad=e e= kug=a S4mu-S10n-S12du-S14e
shepherd=ERG house=ABS silver=L1 VEN-L1.SYN-build-3.SG.A
The shepherd was going to build the temple from silver.
205
LESSON 14
14.3 The locative2
The locative2 may be used both with human and non-human verbal
participants. In the verbal prefix-chain the participant in the locative2 may be
cross-referenced either by acomposite or by asimple adverbial prefix. The form
of the nominal case-marker of the locative2 depends on the grammatical gender
of the participant: human verbal participants are case-marked with the enclitic
=/ra/; while non-human verbal participants are case-marked with the enclitic
=/a/.
The locative2 prefix has two allomorphs: i) /i/ after aconsonant; ii) /e/ after
avowel.
In the 1st ps. sg. composite form the 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix is
expressed by the /mu/ allomorph of the ventive prefix in S4, see, e.g., ex. (405)
below. The 2nd ps. sg. pronominal prefix is the IPP /r/ in S6, see, e.g., ex. (406)
below.
The 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, and the
composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme NI, see, e.g., ex. (389)
below. However, around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE the vowel of the
composite locative2 prefix /nni/ assimilates to the vowel of the following
syllable in respect to vowel height (the so-called vowel harmony of the
literature). Both the high and the low forms were written with the grapheme
NI, but it is assumed in this textbook that the high and the low forms were
/ni/ and /ne/ respectively, reflected by the transliteration ni- and ne-; for the
latter, see, e.g., ex. (395) below.
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/ in S5, and
the composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme NE, transliterated
as bi-, see, e.g., ex. (402) below. However, around the middle of the 3rd
millennium BCE the vowel of the composite locative2 prefix /bi/ assimilates to
the vowel of the following syllable in respect of vowel height (the so-called
vowel harmony of the literature). The high form was written with the
grapheme NE, transliterated as bi-; while the low form was written with
grapheme BI, transliterated as be-, see, e.g., ex. (404) below.
The 3rd ps. pl. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, see, e.g.,
ex. (396) below.
If S11 contains no morpheme and consequently the composite locative2
prefix forms an open unstressed syllable, then the vowel /i/ of the 2nd ps. sg,
3rd sg. human, and 3rd ps. sg. non-human locative2 prefix becomes syncopated.
The 3rd ps. sg. human composite prefix is reduced to /n/, see ex. (388) below.
206
The locative cases
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human composite prefix is reduced to /b/, see, e.g., exx.
(391) and (397) below. In case of the 2nd ps. sg composite prefix, it may not be
decided on the basis of the attested forms which allomorph of the 2nd ps. sg.
IPP is used; thus, in Table 14.1 and in ex. (407) below aquestion mark indicates
the uncertainty of the form.
The syncopation of the locative2 prefix results in the compensatory
lengthening of the finite marker, indicated by plene-writing from the end of
the 3rd millennium BCE, see ex. (397) below. Compare this example with ex.
(429) below. In ex. (429) a3rd ps. sg. non-human locative3 is cross-referenced
by the final pronominal prefix /b/ in S11. Here no syncopation took place,
consequently there is no lengthening of the finite marker either.
The simple locative2 prefix always cross-references a3rd ps. sg. non-human
participant. If S11 contains no morpheme, then the simple prefix /e/ contracts
with the preceding vowel and lengthens it in the 3rd millennium BCE, see, e.g.,
ex. (403) below, whereas in texts from the 2nd millennium BCE the contraction
results in an //, see exx. (399) and (400) below.
It is unclear what happens with the simple locative2 prefix, when S11 is
filled with a morpheme, as the orthography as a rule does not suggest its
presence. The problem can be demonstrated by acomparison between exx.
(386) and (387). Both sentences are about the building of atemple on aritually
clean place, and contain atransitive preterite verbal form. Ex. (387) differs in
the presence of aparticipant in the dative. Consequently, asimple locative2
prefix should occur in the verbal form, yet nothing indicates in the writing of
the verbal form that there is an /e/ between the dative prefix and the FPP. Since
verbal forms like the one in ex. (387), do not change to *mu-ne-du (S4mu-S6nn-
S7a-S10e-S11n-S12du-S14 = VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L2-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P) in the 2nd
millennium BCE, one cannot but assume that the simple locative2 prefix /e/ is
not present in these forms.
In its basic function the locative2 indicates alocation above or on top of
someone or something, or amovement to the top of someone or something:
e dnin-ir-su-ka, eridugki-gen,
e ningirsuk=ak= eridug=gen
house DN=GEN=ABS GN=EQU
ki sikil-la bi-du
ki sikil==a S5b-S10i-S11n-S12du-S14
place pure=TL=L2.NH 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) has built the temple of Ningirsu in aplace as pure as Eridu.
207
LESSON 14
(387) Gudea Statue F 3:67 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232279)

iri-kug-ga ki dadag-ga-a,
irikug=a ki dadag-a=a
GN=L1 place bright-PT=L2.NH
e mu-na-du
e= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12du-S14
house=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
He built the temple for her in apurified place in Irikug.
mu dnanna, e-en-ar
mu nanna=ak= S1a-S2i-S6n-S10(i>)-S12ar-S14
snake DN=GEN=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-L2-place-3.SG.S
May the snake of Nanna fall upon him!
dnin-ir-su-ke, sa-u-gal-ne, u-ni-u
inim den-lil-la-ta, sa-u-gal bi-u
inim enlil=ak=ta saugal= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12u-S14
word DN=GEN=ABL battle.net=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-cover-3.SG.P
By the order of Enlil, he (= Ningirsu) threw hisbattle net on it (= the city Umma).
ummaki-a, an-ta e-u
umma=a an=ta S1a-S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12u-S14
GN=L2.NH sky=ABL MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-cover-3.SG.P
May (the battle net of Ninhursaga ) be thrown on Umma from above!
(392) Ninurta G 6668 (ETCSL 4.27.07)
kug ama dnane dug-ga-na-ab,
kug ama nane S1dug-S2a-S6nn-S7a-S11b

holy mother DN speak-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.P
dutu-gen a bad u-mu-ri-in-gub
utu=gen a bad-= S2a-S4mu-S6r-S10i-S11n-S12gub-S14
DN=EQU arm open-TL=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-L2-3.SG.H.A-put-3.SG.P
Ask the holy mother Nanshe to cast her protecting arms over you as if she were
the god Utu!
208
The locative cases
(393) Iri-kagina 14f 1 (RIME 1.9.9.14f) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222642)

dnin-ir-su-ke iri-ka-gi-na-ra anzudmuen-gen
ninirsuk=e irikaginak=ra anzud=gen

DN=ERG PN=L2.H anzud.bird=EQU
a bad mu-ni-gub
a bad-= S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gub-S14
arm open-TL=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-put-3.SG.P
Like the Anzud bird, Ningirsu has placed his outstretched arms over Iri-kagina.
nin-u da-tum-dug a-ra a-mu-u-ub
nin=u gatumdug= a=ra S1a-S4mu-S10e-S12ub-S14
lady=1.SG.POSS DN=ABS 1.SG.PR=L2.H MOD-VEN-L2-fall-3.SG.S
Gatumdug, my lady, may (your hand) fall on ME!
(395) VS 14, 121 (= AWL 184) rev. 1:3 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020137)17
gu-na, e-ne-ar
gu=ane=a S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12ar-S14
neck=3.SG.H.POSS=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
(En-iggal, the overseer) has entered it as his debt (lit. put him on his neck).
(396) VS 14, 20 (= AWL 183) rev. 1:14 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020007)18
ubur, nu-banda, gu-ne-ne-a, e-ne-ar
ubur nubanda=e gu=anen=a S2i-S6nn-S10e-S11n-S12ar-S14
PN overseer=ERG neck=3.PL.POSS=L2.NH FIN-3.PL-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
Shubur, the overseer, has entered it (= agiven amount of silver) as their (= 3
fishermen) debt (lit. put them on their neck).
(397) MVN 9, 85 obv. 56 (Umma, 21st c.) (P115728)
ugu ur-egigir-ka-ka, i-ib-al
ugu urgigirak=ak=a S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12al-S14
skull PN=GEN=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-exist-3.SG.S
They are on the account (lit. on the skull) of Ur-gigira.
17 The composite L2 prefix agrees in person and number with the possessor of the neck, acase
of external possession, see Lesson 15 below.
18 The composite L2 prefix agrees in person and number with the possessor of the neck, acase
of external possession, see Lesson 15 below.
209
LESSON 14
(398) Shulgi D 219 (ETCSL 2.4.2.04)

ni ki-en-gi-ra ba-a-gu-la
lands!

kur-kur u-sal-la mu-e-re-nu
kur~kur= usal=a S4mu-S6r-S7a-S10e-S12nu-S14
land~PL=ABS meadow=L2.NH VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-lie-3.SG.S
All the foreign lands rest on the meadows thanks to you.
u u-sal-la hu-mu-un-de-nu
u= usal-a S2hu-S4mu-S6n-S8da-S10e-S12nu-S14
people=ABS meadow=L2.NH MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-L2-lie-3.SG.S
May the people rest on the meadows under his rule!
migi-sag-ga urdu ma-gu-la-ra, i-bi-la ma-gu-la-ke-ne,
igisaga urdu magula=ak=ra ibila magula=ak=en=e
PN slave PN=GEN=L2.H heir PN=GEN=PL=ERG
inim in-ni-aarar-e
inim= S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12ar-S14e
word=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.PL
The heirs of Mash-gula raised aclaim for (lit. put aword on) Igi-saga, the slave
of Mash-gula
(402) NG 194 31 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P110833)
lu-ge-na ab-ba inim bi-ar
lugena=e ab=be=a inim= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12gar-S14
PN=ERG cow=DEM=L2.NH word=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
(Ur-Ninmarki has bought acow from Abakala.) Lugena raised aclaim for (lit.
put aword on) this cow.
210
The locative cases
(403) NG 212 obv. 1:2 (Umma, 21st c.) (P142272)

kug-ba inim ba-a-a-ar
kug=be=a inim= S5ba-S10e-S12ar-S14
silver=DEM=L2.NH word=ABS MID-L2-put-3.SG.S
(It was established that Dinili has bought Agi for 6 shekels of silver.) Aclaim has
been raised for this silver.
e gal ti-ra-a-ka, u be-bad
e gal- tira=ak=a u= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12bad-S14
house big-TL GN=GEN=L2.NH hand=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-open-3.SG.P
He looted (lit. opened the hand on) the great temple of Tira.
With the compound verb nam fate tar to cut = to determine the fate,
the locative2 denotes the participant for whom afate was determined:
nam sag-ga, mu-tar-re-e-a
nam sag-a= S4mu-S10e-S11n-S12tar-S14e-a=a
fate good-PT=ABS VEN-L2-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.PL-SUB=L1
The good fate they have determined for me .
(406) Shulgi D 384 (ETCSL 2.4.2.04)
nam dug gu-mu-ri-ib-tar
nam dug-= S2ga-S4mu-S6r-S10i-S11b-S12tar
fate good-TL=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-L2-3.SG.NH.P-cut
I will determine agood fate for you!
sig e-ninnu nam e-tar
sig eninnu= nam= S1a-S2i-S6?-S10(i>)-S12tar-S14
brick TN=abs fate=ABS MOD-FIN-2.SG-L2.SYN-cut-3.SG.S
O brickwork of E-ninnu, may afate be determined for you!
(408) Gudea Statue D 5:47 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232277)
dnin-ir-su-ke, gu-de-a-ar, lu e du-a-ra,
ninirsuk=e gudea=ra lu e= du-=ak=ra
DN=ERG PN=L2.H man house=ABS build-TL=GEN=L2.H
nam dug mu-ni-tar
nam dug-= S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12tar-S14
fate good-TL=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
Ningirsu, has determined agood fate for Gudea, the temple-builder.
211
LESSON 14
(409) Shulgi F 30 (ETCSL 2.4.2.6)

ud-ba an-ne ki-en-gi-ra nam bi-in-tarar
ud=be=a an=e kiengir=a nam= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12tar-S14
day=DEM=L1 DN=ERG GN=L2.NH fate=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
On that day An determined afate for Sumer.
With the compound verb mu name e to call = to name, the locative2
denotes the participant who is given aname:
an lugal diir-re-ne-ke, dnin-ir-su lugal iib an-na,
an lugal diir=en=ak=e ninirsuk lugal= iib an=ak=
DN king god=PL=GEN=ERG DN king=ABS priest DN=GEN=ABS
mu-e mu-e
mu=e S4mu-S10e-S11n-S12e-S14
name=TERM VEN-L2-3.SG.H.A-call-3.SG.P
An, king of the gods, called me Ningirsu, the king, is the ishib priest of An.
(411) E-ana-tum 1 obv. 4:2023 (RIME 1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th. c.) (P222399)
e-an-na, dinana, eb-gal-ka-ka a-tum,
eana inanak ebgal=ak=ak=a S2a-S5b-S10(i>)S12tum-S14
TN DN TN=GEN=GEN=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-worthy.of-3.SG.S
mu mu-ne-e
mu=e S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12e-S14
name=TERM VEN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-call-3.SG.P
(Inana) named him He is worthy of the E-ana of Inana of the Ebgal.
(412) Sargon 16 1213 (Ur, 24th c.) (Q000835)
barag banur an-na, mu-e be-e
barag= banur an=ak= mu=e S5b-S10i-S11n-S12e-S14
altar=ABS table DN=GEN=ABS name=TERM 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-call-3.SG.P
She named (the altar) The altar is Ans table.
With the compound verb u hand bar to open = to release the locative2
denotes the participant released:
(413) Dumuzi-Inana D 19 (ETCSL 4.08.04 )
u ba-mu-u
u= S1ba-S4mu-S10e
hand=ABS open-VEN-L2
(My sister,) release me!
212
The locative cases
(414) MVN 15, 218 obv. 4rev. 1 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131033)
ur-dendur-sa-ga!, e-na
urendursa=ak e=ane=a
PN=GEN grain=3.SG.H.POSS=L2.NH
u a-mu-na-a-ba-re
u= S1a-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S10e-S12bar-S14e
hand=ABS MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-L2-open-3.SG.A
May he release Ur-Hendursagas grain for him!
(415) TCS 1, 72 obv. 6 (unknown, 21st c.) (P145657)
ane-ba u e-eb-bar-e
ane=be=a u= S1a-S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12bar-S14e
donkey=DEM=L2.NH hand=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-open-3.SG.A
May this donkey be released!
(416) TCS 1, 240 rev. 3 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P145739)
u a-mu-ne-bar-re
u= S1a-S4mu-S6nn-S10e-S12bar-S14e
hand=ABS MOD-VEN-3.PL-L2-open-3.SG.A
May he release them!
With the verb du to hold on, to detain the locative2 denotes the participant
detained:
(417) MVN 6, 1 obv. 45 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P217677)
ur-lum-ma-ra, lu ba-ra-ba-du
urlummak=ra lu= S2bara-S5ba-S6n-S10(i>)-S12du-S14
PN=L2.H person=ABS MOD-MID-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-hold-3.SG.S
Definitely no one detained Ur-Lumma.
(418) TCS 1, 48 obv. 3rev. 2 (Lagash, 21st. c) (P145641)
ur-dnane dumu-dab lu-dna-ru-a-ka-ra,
urnane dumudab lunaruak=ak=ra
PN worker PN=GEN=L2.H
e-giri-e, na-ba-du
egiri=e S2nan-S5ba-S6n-S10(i>)-S12du-S13ed-S14
nose.rope=ADV MOD-MID-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-hold-PF-3.SG.S
He should not detain Ur-Nanshe, the worker of Lu-Narua by (lit. in the manner
of) anose-rope.
213
LESSON 14
(419) TCS 1, 229 rev. 34 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P145730)

a-ag in-dab-ba-na, na-ba-a-du
aag S2i-S11n-S12dab-S14-S15a=ane=a S2nan-S5ba-S10e-S12du-S13ed-S14
field FIN-3.SG.H.A-seize-3.SG.P-SUB=3.SG.H.POSS-L2.NH MOD-MID-L2-hold-PF-3.SG.S
He should not retain the field he has seized for himself.
With the compound verb inim word gi to return = to withdraw, cancel
the locative2 denotes the participant withdrawn:
sa-dug-na, e dnin-irsu-ka-ta,
sadug=ane=a e ninirsuk=ak=ta
offering=3.SG.NH.POSS=L2.NH house DN=GEN=ABL
inim e-eb-gi
With verbs of speaking the locative2 denotes the participant about which
someone speaks, see also exx. (265) and (266) above:
(421) BM 24108 obv. 3rev. 1 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P145596)
ma-gu-la-ra, 1(ge) e gur,
magula=ra 60 e gur=
PN=DAT.H 60 barley unit=ABS
um-mu-da, e-na-dug
um-ed-a S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11-S12dug-S14
give-PF-L2.NH MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-1.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P
I did tell him to give 60 gurs of barley to Mash-gula!
e-a du-ba mul kug-ba,
e=ak du=be=ak mul kug=be=a
house=GEN building=3.SG.NH.POSS=GEN star holy=3.SG.NH.POSs=L2.NH
gu ma-ra-a-de
gu= S4mu-S6r-S7a-S10e- S12de-S14e
voice=ABS VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-pour-3.SG.A
She (= goddess Nisaba) will announce to you the holy stars auguring the building
of the temple.
214
The locative cases

arza-a mul an kug-ba
arza=u=ak mul an kug-=be=a
regulation=1.SG.POSS=GEN star sky holy-TL=3.SG.NH.POSs=L2.NH
gu ga-mu-ra-a-de
(424) NRVN 1, 115 rev. 34 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P122331)
i-la nu-la, 3 gi kug-babbar
i- n- la-
S2 S11 S12 S14 S1 nu- i- n- la-
S2 S11 S12 S14 3 gi kugbabbar=
FIN-3.SG.H.A-weight-3.SG.P NEG-FIN-3.SG.H.A-weight-3.SG.P 3 unit silver=ABS
la-da bi-dug
la-ed=a S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dug-S14
weight-PF=L2.NH 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
He said that if he paid it back (by the agreed time, it would be all right); if he did
not, he would pay 3 shekels of silver.
14.4 The locative3
The locative3 may used both with human and non-human verbal participants.
The form of the nominal case-marker of the locative3 depends on the
grammatical gender of the participant: human verbal participants are case-
marked with the enclitic =/ra/; while non-human verbal participants are
case-marked with the enclitic =/e/.
The verbal marking of the locative3 differs in one important respect from
the verbal marking of the locative1 and locative2: when the IPP in S11 is not
used for cross-referencing another verbal participant, then locative3 is cross-
referenced not by asyncopated composite prefix, but by afinal pronominal
prefix in S11.
Similarly to the locative2 prefix, the locative3 prefix in S10 probably also
has two allomorphs: i) /i/ after aconsonant; ii) /e/ after avowel, for the latter,
see ex. (443) below.
In the 1st ps. sg. composite form the 1st ps. sg. pronominal prefix is
expressed by the /mu/ allomorph of the ventive prefix in S4, see, e.g., ex. (433)
below. In the 2nd ps. sg. composite form of the locative3 prefix, the pronominal
prefix is the IPP /r/ in S6, see, e.g., ex. (440) below.
215
LESSON 14
The 3rd ps. sg. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, and the
composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme NI, see ex. (426) and
(441) below. However, around the middle of the 3rd millennium BCE the vowel
of the composite locative2 prefix /nni/ assimilates to the vowel of the following
syllable in respect of vowel height (the so-called vowel harmony of the
literature). Both the high and the low forms were written with the
grapheme NI, but it is assumed in this textbook that the high and the low
forms were /ni/ and /ne/ respectively, reflected by the transliteration ni- and
ne-; for the latter, see, ex. (434) below.
The 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix is expressed with the prefix /b/ in S5, and
the composite prefix is written as arule with the grapheme NE, transliterated
as bi-, see, e.g., ex. (430) below. However, around the middle of the 3rd
millennium BCE the vowel of the composite locative3 prefix /bi/ assimilates to
the vowel of the following syllable in respect of vowel height (the so-called
vowel harmony of the literature). The high form was written with the
grapheme NE, transliterated as bi-; while the low form was written with
grapheme BI, transliterated as be-, see, ex. (446) below.
The 3rd ps. pl. human pronominal prefix is the IPP /nn/ in S6, see, e.g.,
ex. (443) below.
When S11 is filled with amorpheme and the verbal form contains another
adverbial prefix, then no locative3 prefix may occur in the prefix-chain. We
have a number of contrasting examples ([427] vs. [428] and [430] vs. [431]
below), which differ only in the presence of adative prefix. In the forms with
the dative, the orthography does not indicate the presence of asimple locative3
prefix. The locative3 may therefore only be cross-referenced by acomposite
adverbial prefix or by afinal pronominal prefix in S11, but not by asimple
adverbial prefix in the verbal prefix-chain.
In its basic function the locative3 indicates alocation next to someone or
something, or amovement to someone or something. The verb us to be next
to is construed always with the locative3, see exx. (425)(430) below.
(425) Gudea Cyl. A 3:11 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (ETCSL 2.1.7)19
za-u mu-us
zag=u=e S4mu-S11-S12us-S14
side=1.SG.POSS=L3.NH VEN-1.SG.L3-be.next-3.SG.S
It attaches to my side.
19 The L3 prefix agrees in person and number with the possessor of the side, acase of external
possession, see Lesson 15 below.
216
The locative cases

den-lil-ra, dnin-mah mu-ni-us
enlil=ra ninmah= S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12us-S14
DN=L3.H DN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-be.next-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) seated Ninmah next to Enlil.
kar niinki-na-ke ma bi-us
kar niin=ak=e ma= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12us-S14
quay GN=GEN=L3.NH boat=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-be.next-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) moored the boat at the quay of Nigin.
(428) Ur-Ningirsu II 3 2:67 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (Q000929)
abul-inim-si-sa-a-ke, e dnane mu-na-us
abulinimsisak=e e nane=ak= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12us-S14
Inimsisa.gate=L3.NH house DN=GEN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-be.next-3.SG.P
He made the temple of Nanshe adjacent to the Inimsisa-gate for him.
(429) Gudea Statue G 2:910 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232280)
dnin-e-zid-da eer-be ib-us
ninezida= eer=be=e S1i-S11b-S12us-S14
DN=ABS back=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH FIN-3.SG.NH.L3-be.next-3.SG.S
Nin-geshzida followed them.
na-ru-a, me-salim-ma, ki-be bi-gi
narua mesalim=ak= ki=be=e S5b-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
stele PN=GEN=ABS place=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-return-3.SG.P
He restored the stele of Mesalim (lit. returned it to its place).
ki-be mu-na-gi
ki=be=e S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12gi-S14
place=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-return-3.SG.P
He restored it for him (lit. returned it to its place).
(432) TUT 105 obv. 2:5' (Lagash, 21st c.) (P135678)
2 sila eig lugal-ke ba-ab-ak
2 sila= ig lugal=ak=e S5ba-S11b-S12ak-S14
2 unit door king=GEN=L3.NH MID-3.SG.NH.L3-make-3.SG.S
2 sila (oil) were applied to the door of the king.
217
LESSON 14
(433) NG 202 rev. 9 (Umma, 21st c.) (P131781)

ka-li-am igi-e gebaba mu-ra
kali==am- igi=e geba= S4mu-S10e-S11n-S12ra-S14
PN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S face=TERM fist=ABS VEN-L3-3.SG.H.A-hit-3.SG.P
(Durgarni killed Kali. Durgarni was questioned, and he said:) It was Kali who
first punched me.
e-an-na-tum-ra lu ti mu-ne-ra
eanatum=ra lu=e ti= S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12ra-S14
PN=L3.H man=ERG arrow=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-hit-3.SG.P
Someone shot an arrow at E-ana-tum.
With the compound verb si horn sa to be equal = to be straight, proper,
ready the locative3 denotes the participant made straight, ready, or proper:
(435) Gudea Statue R 1:6-7 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232290)
lu2 bi-lu-da diir-re-ne-ke,
lu biluda diir=en=ak=e
man rite god=PL=GEN=L3.NH
si bi-sa-sa-a
si= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14-S15a=e
horn=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-equal~PL-3.SG.P-SUB=ERG
(Gudea,) the man who performed the rites of the gods properly
ubur an-na-ke, si a-mu-dab-sa
ubur an=ak=e si= S1a-S4mu-S6-S8da-S11b-S12sa-S14
udder heaven=GEN=L3.NH horn=ABS MOD-VEN-1.SG-COM-3.SG.NH.L3-equal-3.SG.S
Under my rule the heavenly udder will certainly be ready!
With the compound verb mi woman dug to do = to care for, to praise
the locative3 denotes the participant cared for:
e-e mi im-e
e=e mi= S2i-S4m-S11b-S12e-S14e
wood=L3.NH woman=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH.L3-do-3.SG.A
(Gudea checked the wood piece by piece), taking great care of the wood.
218
The locative cases
(438) Nanna C Segment B 16 (ETCSL 4.13.03)

mi ga-e-dug
mi= S2ga-S11e-S12dug
woman=ABS MOD-2.SG.L3-do
I shall praise you!
In verbal forms, where the IPP in S11 is not used for cross-referencing a non-
human P, the locative3 is cross-referenced not with aprefix in S10, but with an FPP
in S11. In ex. (439) below the prefix /b/ in S11 cross-references the non-human
participant, the boat, in the locative3. In S14 the pronominal suffix cross-refer-
ences the word erkan ornament, which functions as S; the Agent of the verbal
activity is not present in the clause. S10 is used by the locative1 prefix. The verbal
form ex. (439) thus contains the markers of more than one locative cases.
(439) Shulgi D 360 (ETCSL 2.4.2.04)
an-gen mul-a e-er-ka-an mi-ni-ib-dug
an=gen mul=a erkan= S4mu-S10ni-S11b-S12dug-S14
sky=EQU star=L1 ornament=ABS VEN-L1-3.SG.NH.L3-do-3.SG.S
It (= the boat) was decorated with stars like the sky.
Examples like exx. (432), (436), and (439) above, in which the verbal marker of
locative3 in S11 is preceded either by another adverbial prefix (comitative in
ex. [436], locative1 in ex. [439]) or by amiddle prefix (in ex. [432]), provide
further evidence that the prefix /b/ before the stem in alocative3 function
may only be an IPP and not the syncopated form of the composite prefix /bi/-
(S5b-S10i- = 3.SG.NH-L3-).
An important secondary function of the locative3 is to denote the causee in
causative constructions of transitive verbs. The verb gu to eat provides
several examples demonstrating this function of the locative3. This verb is often
used in the meaning to make someone eat = to feed someone. The
participant who does the actual eating (= the eater) is in the locative3 case,
the feeder, who causes someone to eat is in the ergative, and the food
consumed is in the absolutive. The feeder may be missing from the clause,
and then verbal form is the passive form of acausative, as in ex. (444) below.
(440) Lipit-Eshtar D 6 (ETCSL 2.5.5.4)
ga nam-ul-la mi-ri-in-gu
ga namul=ak= S4mu-S6r-S10i-S11n-S12gu- S14
milk manliness=GEN=ABS VEN-2.SG-L3-3.SG.H.A-eat-3.SG.P
She (= the goddess Nintur) has fed you with the milk of vigour.; lit. She made
you consume the milk of vigour.
219
LESSON 14
(441) MVN 3, 36 obv. 3:27 (Isin, ca. 2524th) (P222204)

1/2 kug ma-na, ma-ir, dumu amar-uba(MU.KUR.ZA)-ra,
1/2 kug mana= mair dumu amaruba=ra
1/2 silver unit=ABS PN child PN=L3.H
a-pa-e azlag, sam-e, i-ni-gu
apae azlag=e sam=e S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gu-S14
PN fuller=ERG price=TERM FIN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H-eat-3.SG.P
Apa-e, the fuller, made Mahir, the son of Amar-shuba, receive (lit. eat) half
mana of silver as the price.
(442) Shulgi H Segment D 19 (= Ni 2275 iv 19) (ETCSL 2.4.2.08)
u-e u nir-al a-bi-ib-gu-e
u=e u niral= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gu-S14e
people=L3.NH food fine=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-eat-3.SG.A
a dug a-bi-na-na
a dug= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12na~na-S14e
water sweet=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-drink~PF-3.SG.A
May he (= Shulgi) make the people eat fine food, may he make them drink sweet
water!
(443) MVN 3, 1 obv. 3:4 (Isin, 24th c.) (P215676)
in-ne-gu
S2i-S6nn-S10e-S11n-S12gu-S14
FIN-3.PL-L3-3.SG.H-eat-3.SG.P
He made them receive (lit. eat) (a certain amount of silver).
(444) OIP 121, 54 obv. 3 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P123784)
ad-be ur-gir-re ba-ab-gu
ad=be= urgir=e S5ba-S11b-S12gu-S14
carcass=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS dog=L3.NH MID-3.SG.NH.L3-eat-3.SG.S
The dogs were fed with their carcasses; lit. The dogs were made to eat their
carcasses.
When the causee is anon-human inanimate, or dead participant without the
ability to act on its own, the causee may be interpreted as the instrument with
which the verbal action is carried out:
eeren-be tun gal-e im-mi-kud
eren=be= tun gal-=e S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12kud-S14
cedar=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS axe great-TL=L3.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
He cut down its cedars with great axes.; lit. He made the great axes cut its cedars.
220
The locative cases
(446) Ur-Nanshe 17 3:36 (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222363)

ur-nimin, dam, dnane,
urnimin dam nane=ak=

PN spouse DN=GEN=ABS
ma be-pad
ma=e S5b-S10i-S11n-S12pad-S14
goat=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-find-3.SG.P
He chose Ur-nimin (as) the spouse of Nane with agoat (i.e., by extispicy) (lit.
made the goat choose).
Further readings
For the cases of S10 one may consult the corresponding sections of Gragg 1973,
Balke 2006, and Jagersma 2010, whose descriptions, however, differ in their
approach to cases in Sumerian; and in fact, none of them assume the existence
of three locative cases. The approach of the present textbooks author is
The most important paper is Jagersma 2006 on the verbal marking of the
locative3; note, however, that he discusses it under the name oblique object.
Acritical discussion of Jagersmas oblique object is Zlyomi 2014b.
Zlyomi 2014 discusses in detail the system of local cases in Sumerian and
its changes under the influence of Akkadian in the first part of the 2nd
millennium BCE.
Exercises
14.3 Transliterate the text of NG 99 obv. 2:15rev. 1:31 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111162) (a
handcopy of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P111162) with the help
of Volks sign list (2012), the text is no. 38 in Volks (2012) chrestomathy. Translate
the text with the help of either Volks (2012) or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign
morphemic segmentation and glossing to the verbal forms.
221
LESSON 14
14.4 Transliterate the text of NG 17 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P110828) with the help of Volks
sign list (2012). Acopy of the text can be found in Volks (2012) chrestomathy; the
text is no. 37 in the chrestomathy. Translate the text with the help of either Volks
(2012) or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing
to the verbal forms.
14.5 Transliterate the text VS 14, 94 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P020109) with the help of Volks
sign list (2012). Acopy and photo of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.
edu/P020109. The text is no. 44 in Volks (2012) chrestomathy. Translate the text
with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs (2016b) glossary. For the numerical
expressions used in them you may consult ORACCs preliminary description of
metrological expressions (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/doc/downloads/
numref.pdf), or Powells entry in the Reallexikon der Assyriologie (198790).
222
LESSON 15
CONSTRUCTIONS INVOLVING
AN EXTRA VERBAL PARTICIPANT
The constructions discussed in this lesson are characterized by the presence of

averbal participant that may be considered additional from acertain point of
view. In causative constructions, there is a further participant, the causer
present. In compound verb constructions, the participant functioning as P is non-
referential and forms a semantic unit with the verb. The meaning of the
compound verbs often requires another verbal participant which is affected by
the verbal action. This participant functions then as akind of semantic object
in addition to the grammatical object. In the case of external possession, anoun
phrase is syntactically encoded as a verbal participant but semantically
understood as the possessor of another participant of the same verb. The
semantic possessor is expressed as aseparate constituent outside the noun
phrase whose head is the possessum. It therefore represents an additional
verbal participant compared to possessive constructions in which both the
possessor and the possessum are within the same noun phrase. In the case of
dative promotion, two of the participants of a finite verb should be cross-
referenced by incompatible prefixes in the verbal prefix-chain. One of these
participants will therefore be promoted to the status of indirect object marked
with the dative case. This lesson will describe the most important
characteristics of these four constructions.
15.1 The causative construction
Sumerian is a language without a morphologically marked causative. The

causative verbal form differs from the corresponding non-causative form only
in the increased number of participants.
223
LESSON 15
In causatives of intransitive verbs, the underlying S becomes P:

Table 15.1
INTRANSITIVE CAUSATIVE
A
S P
Ex. (447) below is ahypothetical intransitive clause that may form the basis of
the actual ex. (448). In ex. (447) the person I is the verbal participant who
steps on abed. In ex. (448) the same person does the actual stepping, but the
clause has an additional verbal participant, the goddess Inana, who causes me
to step on the bed. The causer functions as the Aof ex. (448) and is marked
accordingly in S11 with a3rd ps. sg. human FPP. The S of ex. (447) functions as
the P in ex. (448). Since in the preterite the pronominal suffix in S14 cross-
references the participant in the absolutive, both the S in ex. (447) and the P in
ex. (448) is cross-referenced with the same morpheme. In other words, the two
verbal forms in exx. (447) and (448) differ only in the presence of afurther
verbal participant, the causer; and no other morpheme indicates its causative
meaning.
(447) *enu gi-rin-na e-ib-gub-en
nu girin-=a S1a-S2i-S5b-S10(i>)-S12gub-S14en
bed flowery-TL=L2.NH MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-stand-1.SG.S
I indeed stepped onto the flowery bed.
(448) Ishme-Dagan A105 (ETCSL 2.5.4.01)
enu gi-rin-na he-bi-in-gub-en
nu girin-=a S1a-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12gub-S14en
bed flowery-TL=L2.NH MOD-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-stand-1.SG.P
She (= Inana) indeed made me step onto the flowery bed.
In causatives of transitive verbs, the underlying Awill be marked with the
locative3 case:
Table 15.2
TRANSITIVE CAUSATIVE
A
A L3
P P
224
Constructions involving an extra verbal participant
In ex. (449) the predicate is the transitive form of the verb gu to eat: the
overseers (= the eaters) function as the A, the consumed bread (= the food)
as the P. In ex. (450) the eaters, the people, the participants who does the
actual eating, are in the locative3 case. The function of Ais taken over by the
causer, here Shulgi, who makes the people eat (and drink). The two verbal forms
in exx. (449) and (450) differ only in the presence of afurther verbal participant,
the causer; and no other morpheme indicates its causative meaning. In contrast
to the causative of intransitive verbs, however, one of the participants of the
underlying transitive form cannot retain its original case in the causative form:
the eater, the causee, i.e., the underlying A, will become an adverbial
participant in the locative3.
(449) CUSAS 3, 385 obv. 6 (Garshana, 21st c.) (P323799)
5 sila ninda ugula lu-u-a-e-ne ib-gu
5 sila ninda= ugula luua=en=e S2i-S11b-S12gu-S14
5 measure bread=ABS overseer hireling=PL=ERG FIN-3.SG.NH.A-eat-3.SG.P
Five liters of bread: the overseers of the hirelings consumed it.
(450) Shulgi H Segment D 19 (ETCSL 2.4.2.08)
u=e u niral-= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gu-S14e
people=L3.NH food fine-TL=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-eat-3.SG.A
a dug a-bi-na-na
a dug-= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12na~na-S14e
water sweet-TL=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-drink~PF-3.SG.A
water!
The causer may be missing from the clause, and then verbal form is the passive
form of acausative, as in ex. (451) below. In this example the middle prefix
indicates that the verbal participant cross-referenced in S11 functions as
acausee, someone who was made to eat by an unspecified A, the causer. This
example may be contrasted with ex. (452), in which the Ais also unspecified,
but here the missing participant must be interpreted as the eater.
In other words, both exx. (451) and (452) are passive verbal forms (signalled
by the presence of the middle prefix), but the former is the passive of
acausative (similar to ex. [450]), signalled by the presence of the /b/ in S11;
while the latter is the passive of atransitive form (similar to ex. [449]), signalled
by the emptiness of S11.
225
LESSON 15
(451) OIP 121, 54 obv. 3 (Drehem, 21st c.) (P123784)

ad-be ur-gir-re ba-ab-gu
ad=be= urgir=e S5ba-S11b-S12gu-S14
carcass=POSS.3.SG.NH=ABS dog=L3.NH MID-3.SG.NH.L3-eat-3.SG.S
The dogs were fed with their carcasses; lit. The dogs were made to eat their
carcasses.
ki-a-na-a, ba-gu
kiana=a S5ba-S10n-S12gu-S14
place.libation=L1 MID-L1.SYN-eat-3.SG.S
(Two sheep) were consumed at the place of libations.
15.2 The compound verbs
A compound verb is the combination of averb and anoun phrase where the
noun phrase is non-referential and consequently forms asemantic unit with
the verb. The combination of igi eye and bar to direct, for example, is used
in the meaning to look at, literally to eye-direct. Here the word igi eye
does not refer to an existing entity; rather, it modifies the meaning of the verb.
The syntactic function of the noun phrase is typically P, but occasionally the
noun phrase may be aparticipant in the locative3 case.
Functionally these constructions compensate for the lack of derivational
affixes deriving verbs from nouns. Two verbs, dug to do and ak to act, are
used especially often as light verbs, i.e., as the verbal part of compound verbs
functioning as verbalizers: inim word and dug means, for example, to say,
and nam-lugal kingship and ak means to rule as aking.
The meaning of the compound verbs often requires another verbal
participant which is affected by the verbal action. This participant functions as
akind of semantic object in addition to the grammatical object. The case of
this semantic object varies; it appears to depend idiosyncratically on the verb.
The locative3 (e.g., igi eye du open = to look) and the locative2 (e.g.,
inim word ar to place = to claim) are the cases most often attested in
this use, but there are compound verbs also with the dative (ki place a
to measure (?) = to love), the terminative (igi eye bar to direct = to
look at), and the comitative (a arm a to measure (?) = to instruct).
226
Here are some instances involving compound verbs, but the reader may find
many more examples in the previous lessons on adverbial cases.
en arattaki-ke gig-e igi bi-in-du
en aratta=ak=e gig=e igi= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12du-S14
lord GN=GEN=ERG wheat=L3.NH eye=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-open-3.SG.P
The lord of Aratta looked at the wheat.
(454) Utu-hegal 1 68 (RIME 2.13.6.1) (Uruk, 22nd c.) (Q000876)
ki-sur-ra lagaki-ka, lu urim-ka-ke,
kisura laga=ak=a lu urim=ak=e
territory GN=GEN=L2.NH person GN=GEN=ERG
inim bi-ar
inim= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ar-
word=ABS 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
The man from Urim raised aclaim on the territory of Lagash.
(455) Iri-kagina 14p 12 (RIME 1.9.9.14p) (Lagash, 24th c.) (P222652)
dba-u barag iri-kug-ga-ka tum-ma
bau barag irikug=ak=a tum-a=e

DN seat GN=GEN=L2.NH be.suitable-PT=ERG
iri-ka-gi-na-ra ki mu-na-a
irikaginak=ra ki= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12a-S14
PN=DAT.H place=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-measure-3.SG.P
The goddess Bau, who is worthy of the seat of the city Irikug, loves Irikagina.
DN=ERG lord DN=TERM
igi zid mu-i-bar
The god Enlil looked at lord Ningirsu with approval (lit. with true eyes).
(457) Shulgi G 8 (ETCSL 2.4.2.07)
den-lil-da a-ba a mu-da-an-a
enlil=da aba=e a= S4mu-S6n-S8da-S11n-S12a-S14
DN=COM who=ERG arm=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-measure-3.SG.P
Whoever instructed divine Enlil?
227
LESSON 15
15.3 The external possession construction
External possession is aphenomenon where anoun phrase is syntactically

encoded as averbal participant but semantically understood as the possessor
of another participant of the same verb. In other words, there is asemantic
possessor-possessum relation between two noun phrases within aclause but
the possessor is expressed as aseparate constituent outside the noun phrase
whose head is the possessum. External possession constructions are typically
permitted only when the possessor is human and the possessum is inalienable.
Cross-linguistically body-part expressions are the most common type of
possessum that may occur in external possession constructions.
In Sumerian, external possession may be observed in clauses in which
a body-part expression and its semantic possessor occur as separate
constituents, and the verbal form cross-references either only the possessor,
or both the possessor and the body part. In the former case the possessor and
the body-part are in the same case, see, ex. (458) below; in the latter, the
possessor is in the dative, whereas the body-part is in the locative1, see ex. (461)
below.
In ex. (458) below the semantic possessor of the word u hand is the god
Ningirsu. The word dnin-ir-su, however, occurs not in P3 of the noun phrase
whose head is u hand. It is aseparate constituent and occupies asentence-
initial position; P3 of u hand is filled by aresumptive pronominal enclitic that
agrees in person, gender, and number with the semantic possessor (=ane :
3.SG.H.POSS). Both the semantic possessor (dnin-ir-su) and the inalienable
possessum (u) are in the locative2 case. The composite locative2 prefix of the
verbal form shows agreement with the human possessor, but not with the
possessum. The agreement with the semantic possessor instead of the inalienable
possessum signals that the predicate affects the possessor, not the possessum.
(458) E-ana-tum 4 2:36 (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222460)
dnin-ir-su-ra, a-agaag ki a-ne,
ninirsuk=ra aag ki= a-=ane
DN=L2.H field place=ABS measure-TL=3.SG.H.POSS
gu-eden-na, u-na mu-ni-gi
guedenak= u=ane=a S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12gi-S14
GN=ABS hand=3.SG.H.POSS=L2.NH VEN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-return-3.SG.P
He returned (Ningirsus) beloved field, the Gu-edena, under Ningirsus control.
= lit. He returned, his beloved field, the Gu-edena, to Ningirsu, to his hand.
228
In ex. (459) below the possessor is present in the sentence only as a3rd ps. sg.
human possessive enclitic attached to the word iri, not as a separate
constituent. The composite locative2 prefix of the verbal form shows agreement
not with the grammatically non-human inalienable possessum (= iri foot),
but with its human possessor.
kur-kur iri-na, e-ne-seg-ga-a
kur~kur= iri=ane=a S2i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12seg-S14-S15a-a
land~PL=ABS foot=3.SG.H.POSS=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P-SUB-L1
(when) he (= Enlil) made all the countries serve him (= Lugalzagesi) (lit. threw
all the countries to his feet).
In ex. (460) below the copula shows agreement with the 2nd ps. sg. possessor,
not with the grammatically non-human inalienable possessum igi face. The
possessor is present in the sentence only as a2nd ps. sg. human possessive
enclitic attached to the word igi.
(460) Iddin-Dagan D 30 (ETCSL 2.5.3.4)
igi-zu hu-me-en
igi=zu= hu-==me-en
face=2.SG.POSS=ABS awesome-TL=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
Your face is awesome.
In ex. (461) below the inalienable possessum (= kag mouth) is in the locative1
case. On analogy with the constructions in exx. (458) and (459) above, its human
possessor should be cross-referenced with a1st ps. sg. locative1 prefix in the
verbal form. The locative1 prefix, however, may only cross-reference a3rd ps.
non-human verbal participant, there exist no 1st ps. sg. composite locative1
prefix. Consequently, the 1st ps. sg. possessor of kag mouth cannot but be
cross-referenced with adifferent prefix, namely with adative prefix in the
verbal form. The use of the dative is probably due to its function to denote the
participant affected by the verbal activity.
(461) Ishme-Dagan A90 (ETCSL 2.5.4.01)
dutu ni-si-sa inim gi-na,
utu=e nisisa inim gin-a=
DN=ERG justice word firm-PT=ABS
ka-a a-ma-ni-in-ar
kag=u=a S1a-S4m-S7a-S10ni-S11n-S12ar-S14
mouth=1.SG.POSS=L1 MOD-VEN-DAT-L1-3.SG.H.A-place-3.SG.P
The god Utu put justice and reliable words in my mouth.
Utu legte mir Gerechtigkeit und zuverlssige Worte in den Mund.
229
LESSON 15
The German translation of ex. (461) is shown here to demonstrate how easily
the sentence may be translated into German, which itself knows external
possession: Die Mutter wusch dem Kind die Haare = The mother washed the
childs hair.
15.4 The dative promotion
The structure and functioning of the verbal prefix-chain impose restrictions on

the co-occurrence of adverbial prefixes. The restriction on the co-occurrence of
the composite 3rd ps. sg. human dative prefix and the simple locative2 or locative3
prefix in transitive preterite verbal forms was discussed in Lesson 14, sections 14.3
and 14.4 above. Because of this co-occurrence restriction, there is no simple
locative2 or locative3 prefix in transitive preterite verbal forms containing a3rd
ps. sg. human dative prefix; see, e.g., ex. (387) or ex. (428) in Lesson 14 above.
This section discusses co-occurrence restrictions which are solved
differently by the language, namely by changing one of the incompatible
adverbial prefixes into adative prefix. This change will be labelled with the
term dative promotion. The use of the dative is probably due to its function
to denote the participant affected by the verbal activity.
Two types of co-occurrence restriction bypassed with dative promotion are
attested in our texts. The more common type occurs when the construction of
a clause would require the presence of both a locative1 and a locative2 or
locative3 prefix in the finite verbal form. In transitive preterite verbal forms
all these prefixes should occur in S10, but only one of them may use this slot.
This restriction can be circumvented by promoting the participant in the
locative2 or locative3 to the status of indirect object and marking it with
adative prefix in the verbal prefix chain, as in exx. (463) and (465) below.
The compound verb nam fate tar to cut = to determine afate case-
marks the participant whose fate is determined with the locative2, see ex. (462)
below. The same participant is in the dative in ex. (463), where aparticipant in
the locative1 is also cross-referenced in the verbal form.
(462) Ninazu A26 (ETCSL 4.17.1)
[an]-ne nam dug mu-ri-in-tar
an=e nam dug-= S4mu-S6r-S10i-S11n-S12tar-S14
DN=ERG fate good-TL=ABS VEN-2.SG-L2-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
The god An has determined agood destiny for you.
230
(463) Shulgi P Segment C 25 (ETCSL 2.4.2.16)

ubur kug-u-a nam ma-ra-ni-tar
ubur kug=u=a nam= S4ma-S6r-S7a-S10ni-S11-S12tar-S14
bosom holy=1.SG.POSS=L1 fate=ABS VEN-2.SG-DAT-L1-1.SG.A-cut-3.SG.P
I have decided your fate with my holy bosom.
The compound verb si horn sa to be equal = to be straight, proper,
ready denotes the participant that is affected by the verbal action with the
locative3 as shown in ex. (464) below. The same participant is in the dative in
the next example, ex. (465), where the location of the verbal action is specified
with aplace adverbial in the locative1.
(464) Gudea Statue R 1:6-7 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232290)
lu2 bi-lu-da diir-re-ne-ke,
lu biluda diir=en=ak=e
man rite god=PL=GEN=L3.NH
si bi-sa-sa-a
si= S5b-S10i-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14-S15a=e
horn=ABS 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-equal~PL-3.SG.P-SUB=ERG
(Gudea,) the man who performed the rites of the gods properly
(465) Gudea Statue D 2:13-3:2 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232277)
ag4-ba ni2-mi2-us2-sa2, dba-u2, nin-a-na-ke4,
ag=be=a nimussa bau nin=ane=ak=e
heart=3.SG.NH.POSS=L1 bridal.gift DN lady=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=DAT.NH
si ba-ni-sa2-sa2
si= S5b-S7a-S10ni-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14
horn=ABS 3.SG.NH-DAT-L1-3.SG.H.A-equal~PL-3.SG.P
Within it, he (= Gudea) prepared the bridal gifts of Bau, his lady.
The other type of co-occurrence restriction is the consequence of Krechers rule
(1985: 1331) on the functioning of the adverbial prefixes, explained in Lesson 6,
section 6.3 above. Krechers rule states that i) only the first of the adverbial
prefixes of afinite verb may be composite preceded by apronominal prefix;
and ii) every subsequent adverbial prefix is simple and refers to a3rd ps. non-
human verbal participant.
Consider ex. (466) below.20 The second verbal form in this example is
atransitive causative that would look like *nam= S1i-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12kud-S14
(fate=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P) he (= E-ana-tum) made him (= the
20 See Zlyomi forthcoming for adiscussion of the grammar of this example.
231
LESSON 15
Ummaite) swear (a promissory oath) without an ablative prefix. In this

hypothetical verbal form a3rd ps. sg. human composite locative3 prefix cross-
references the causee; see section 15.1 above.
In ex. (466), however, the presence of the ablative prefix in S9 makes it
impossible for a3rd ps. sg. human composite locative3 prefix to occur: after the
ablative, only asimple adverbial prefix with non-human reference may occur.
The use of the 3rd ps. sg. human composite locative3 prefix is thus obstructed
by the presence of the ablative prefix, and this obstruction may be
circumvented by promoting the original causee to the dative.
lu ummaki-ra, e-an-na-tum-me, sa-u-gal, den-lil(E)-la,
lu umma=ak=ra eanatum=e saugal enlil=ak=
person GN=GEN=DAT.H PN=ERG net DN=GEN=ABS
e-na-um, nam e-na-ta-kud
i-
S2 S6 nn- a- n-
S7 S12 S14 um- S14 nam= S1i-S6nn-S7a-S9ta-S11n-S12kud-S14
FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P fate=ABS FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-cut-3.SG.P
lu ummaki-ke e-an-na-tum-ra
lu umma=ak=e eanatum=ra
person GN=GEN=ERG PN=DAT.H
nam mu-na-ku-re
nam= S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S12kud-S14e
fate=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-cut-3.SG.A
E-ana-tum gave the great battle-net of Enlil to the Ummaite, and let him swear
apromissory oath by it, (and) the Ummaite swore the (following) promissory oath
for E-ana-tum: (Here follows the actual swearing in the text.)
Further readings
In the first part of the 2nd millennium BCE, the verbal prefixes cross-
referencing the underlying A(i.e., the causee) in causatives of transitive verbs
will be reinterpreted as causative markers, the detailed description of this
development can be found in Zlyomi 2005b: 347353.
The definition of compound verbs is controversial in Sumerology. Agood
reading to start with is Attingers description in Attinger 1993: 178182. Zlyomi
1996 reviews Attingers book and discusses his definition. Attinger 2004 uses
232
the position of question words for the identification of compound verbs. He

gives asummary of his views in Attinger 2007: 2426. An often-quoted work on
compound verbs is Karahashis unpublished but easily available dissertation
(Karahashi 2000). For those who can read Hungarian, Tanos 2015 is an
interesting study on the semantics of compound verbs in Sumerian.
On compounds with the verb dug, the comprehensive work is Attinger
1993. For the numerous compounds with the verb ak, one should consult the
vocabulary entry the verb in PSD, together with Attingers review (Attinger
2005). On the semantics of some of the compounds with the verb ak, see also
Ebeling 2007.
The constructions used with the compound verb igi bar are discussed in
Zlyomi 2007b. This study also discusses the changes in these constructions due
to the influence of Akkadian.
The most detailed description of external possession in Sumerian can be
found in Zlyomi 2005. Jagersmas account of the phenomenon is in Jagersma
2010: 396398. For the linguistic treatment of the phenomenon, see Payne and
Barshi 1999. Dative promotion is discussed in Zlyomi 1999: 238242, under the
label four-participant verbal forms. The co-occurrence restrictions among
adverbial prefixes are also discussed by Jagersma (2010: 442444) in some detail.
Exercises
15.3 Try to reconstruct the underlying transitive clause of the following actual examples
of causative constructions. You must produce only the morphemic segmentation
and glossing (2nd and 3rd line of the examples).
(467) Ishme-Dagan 7 17 (RIME 4.1.4.7) (Isin, 20th c.) (Q001951)
di-me-dda-gan, lugal ki-en-gi ki-uri-ra, ud den-lil2-le, dnin-urta,
imedagan lugal kengir kiuri=ak=ra ud enlil=e ninurta
PN king GN GN=GEN=L3.H day DN=ERG DN
233
LESSON 15
ur-sa kalag-ga-ne, makim-e3,

ursa kalag=ane= makim=e
hero strong=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS deputy=TERM
mu-ni-in-tuku-a
S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a=a
VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
When Enlil appointed Ninurta, his powerful warrior, as commissioner to Ishme-
Dagan, king of Sumer and Akkad, .
dur-dnin-urta-ke u ar-re
urninurtak=e u ar-=e
PN=ERG people numerous-TL=L3.NH
us zid e-bi-ib-dab-be
us zid-= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12dab-S14e
path right-TL=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-take-3.SG.A
May Ur-Ninurta make numerous people follow the just path.
(469) Gudea Cyl. B 5:20 (ETCSL 2.1.7) (Lagash, 22nd c.)
gud i udu i e-e bi-dab
gud i udu i= e=e S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dab-S14
ox fat sheep fat=ABS temple=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-receive-3.SG.P
He (= Gudea) made the temple receive (i.e., allotted to the temple) fattened
oxen and sheep.
15.4 Create causative forms from the following examples. Insert the god Ningirsu as the
causer. You must produce only the morphemic segmentation and glossing (2nd
and 3rd line of the examples).
a) lu inim-ma sa sa-a-e mu-ne-ra-e
lu inim=ak sa sa-a=ak=e S4mu-S6nn-S8a-S9ta-S12e-S14
man word=GEN head buy-PT=GEN=TERM VEN-3.PL-DAT-ABL-leave-3.SG.S
b) ensi-ke e mu-du
ensik=e e= S4mu-S11n-S12du-S14
ruler=ERG house VEN-3.SG.H.A.-build-3.SG.P
c) e-da lugal im-da-hul
e=da lugal= S2i-S4m-S5b-S8da-S12hul-S14
234
d) e-e im-ma-en
e) damar-dsuenlugal-e ur-bi-lum mu-ul
amarsuenak lugal=e urbilum= S4mu-S11n-S12ul-S14
PN king=ERG GN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-raid-3.SG.P
f) ummaki-a, ki-a i-durun(KU.KU)-ne-e

15.5 Explain the case-marking of the word dnin-hur-sa in the following example!
Which word is cross-referenced by the composite locative2 prefix, and why?
(470) E-ana-tum 1 obv. 4:24-26 (RIME 1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c. BCE) (P222399)
dnin-hur-sa-ra, dub zid-da-na,
ninhursaak=ra dub zid-a=ane=a

DN=L2.H knee right-PT=3.SG.H.POSS=L2.NH
mu-ni-tu
S4mu-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12tu-S13
VEN-3.SG-L2-3.SG.H.A-sit-3.SG.P
She (= Inana) has made him (= Eanatum) sit on the right knee of the goddess
Ninhursaga.
15.6 The first clause of example (471) below contains the only verbal form from the 3rd
millennium BCE that does not obey Krechers rule about the number of composite
adverbial prefixes in the prefix-chain as discussed in Lesson 6, section 6.3 above.
What is wrong with it? Do you have any explanation?
(471) E-ana-tum 1 rev. 5:32-36 (RIME 1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c. BCE) (P222399)
dnin-ki, nam-ne ma-ni-ku-ra,
ninki nam=ane= S4m-S7a-S6nn-S10i-S11-S12kud-S14-S15a=e
DN fate=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS VEN-DAT-3.SG.H-L3-1.SG.A-kud-3.SG.P-SUB=ERG
ummaki, mu ki-ta giri-ba
umma=ak mu ki=ta=e giri=be=a
GN=GEN snake earth=ABL=L3.NH foot=3.SG.NH.POSS-L2.NH
zu e-mi-du-du-e
zu= S1a-S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12du~du-S14e
tooth=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.L3-hold~PL-3.SG.A
(If he violates this agreement), may the goddess Ninki, by whom I let him swear
apromissory oath for me, have snakes from the ground bite Ummas feet!
235
LESSON 15
15.7 Transliterate the text of NG 205 obv. 115 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111164) (a handcopy
of the text can be found at http://cdli.ucla.edu/P111164) with the help of Volks
sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of Foxvogs glossary (2016b). Assign
morphemic segmentation and glossing to the verbal forms.
236
LESSON 16
NEGATION AND MODALITY
The modal prefixes of the finite verbal form may occur either in S1 or S2. The
prefix /a/- and the other modal prefixes differ in respect of whether they may
co-occur with the finite-marker prefix. The prefix /a/- may be followed by
afinite-marker, the other modal prefixes may not. Consequently, this textbook
assumes that /a/- occurs in S1, while all the other modal prefixes occupy S2
and are in complementary distribution with the finite-marker. S1 also
accommodates the negative particle. This lesson describes the most important
uses of these morphemes, together with the imperative form of the verb, in
which the verbal stem moves into S1 of the prefix-chain.
16.1 The negative particle
Indicative verbal forms are negated with the particle /nu/- prefixed to the
verbal form. It is also used with non-finite verbal forms, see ex. (474) below. In
finite verbal forms that would start with afinite-marker without the negative
particle, the particle /nu/ is followed by afinite-marker. Its /u/ contracts with
it, resulting in //, which, however, is not always indicated in the writing as in
ex. (472).
The vowel of the prefixed particle may occasionally assimilate to the vowel
of the next syllable. Before a syllable /ba/- or /bi/- the prefixed particle
changes to /la/- and /li/- respectively, see, e.g., ex. (476) below; but the writing
may not reflect this sound change, see ex. (475) below.
(472) BM 24108 rev. 23 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P145596)
a-na-a-am, nu-u-na-um
ana=e=am- S1nu-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
what=TERM=COP-3.SG.S NEG-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
Why did he not give it to him?
237
LESSON 16
(473) MVN 11, 168 rev. 8 (Umma, 21st c. BCE) (P116181)

e e-a nu-mu-da-al
e= e=a S1nu-S4mu-S6-S8da-S10n-S12al-S14
grain=ABS house=L1 NEG-VEN-1.SG-COM-L1.SYN-exist-3.SG.S
I have no grain in the house.; lit. There is no grain in the house with me
kur eerin-na lu nu-ku-ku-da
kur erin=ak lu= nu-ku~ku-ed-]=P5a
mountain cedar=GEN man=ABS NEG-enter~PF-PF-3.SG.S=L1
into the mountain of cedars which no one is to penetrate
ama-er-ke er nu-bi-dug
amaerak=e er= S1nu-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12dug-S14
wailing.woman=ERG tears=ABS NEG-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
The wailing woman did not utter laments.
The particle /nu/- is generally thought to be used only for the negation of
indicative forms, cf. [nu] is not used if amodal form is to be negated, .
(Edzard 2003: 114). Nevertheless, it may have modal meanings with present-
future verbal forms, as in ex. (476) below.
ki-gub-ba-be, lu nu-zi-zi,
kiguba=be= lu=e S1nu-S2i-S12zi~zi-S14e
pedestal=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS man=ERG NEG-FIN-rise~PF-3.SG.A
sa-dug-be, lu la-ba-ni-la-e
sadug=be= lu=e S1nu-S5ba-S10ni-S11b-S12lal-S14e
offering=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS man=ERG NEG-MID-L1-3.SG.NH.P-small-3.SG.A
No one should lift its (= the statue of Gudea) pedestal, no one should curtail its
regular offerings for himself!
The negative particle may also occur without any verbal form: the negative
equivalent of acopular clause with a3rd ps. sg. S and an enclitic copula is
negated solely with the negative particle /nu/- and the negative clause contains
no copula. An instructive example is ex. (477) below, where the first clause is
negated with the particle /nu/-, while the second is negated with an
independent copula prefixed with the negation particle /nu/-.
238

alan-e, u kug nu
S [alan=e=] u PC [kug=] nu
S[statue=DEM=ABS] and PC[silver=ABS] NEG
za-gin nu-ga-am
PC[zagin=] S1nu-S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14
PC [lapis.lazuli=ABS ] NEG-FIN-COOR-COP-3.SG.S
This statue is of neither silver nor lapis lazuli.
The affirmative equivalent of the first clause would contain the 3rd ps. sg. form
of the enclitic copula (*kug==am- : silver=ABS=COP-3.SG.S), while the affirmative
equivalent of the second clause would contain an independent copula because
of the presence of acoordinator prefix in S3 (*S2i-S3nga-S12me-S14 : FIN-COOR-
COP-3.SG.S). The difference in the way the two clauses are negated in ex. (477) is
conditioned thus by the form of the copula in the corresponding affirmative
clauses.
16.2 Modality
The linguistic literature on modality usually distinguishes two main types of

modality: epistemic and deontic modality. Epistemic modality refers to the
evaluation of the chances that acertain hypothetical state of affairs under
consideration (or some aspect of it) will occur, is occurring or has occurred in
apossible world (Nuyts 2001: 21). Deontic modality indicates the speakers
degree of requirement of, desire for, or commitment to the realisation of the
proposition expressed by his utterance.
The notions of epistemic and deontic modality were applied to Sumerian
by Miguel Civil (2000) for the first time. This textbook follows him in using these
notions, but the description given here is different from Civils. Table 16.1 below
summarizes the uses of the modal prefixes; + refers to affirmative, - to negative
forms.
239
LESSON 16
Table 16.1
EPISTEMIC DEONTIC
+ - + -
weak strong weak strong
/a/- /na(n)/- /bara/- /ga/-, /a/-, imperative /na(n)/- /bara/-
/nu/-
/na/-
/i/-
Table 16.2 shows the correspondences between affirmative and negative forms:
Table 16.2
EPISTEMIC DEONTIC
+ - + -
/a/- (certain) /bara/- /ga/- /bara/-
/a/- (possible) /na(n)/- imperative /na(n)/-
/a/- (precative) /na(n)/-
The imperative
The imperative expresses adirect command. It is marked not by aprefix: in the

imperative form of the verb, the verbal stem occurs in S1 instead of its usual
position in S12, with the consequence that all verbal prefixes are positioned
after the stem. One could state that it is the verbal stem itself that is prefixed
in imperative forms.
The imperative forms use the preterite stem but cross-reference the P with
the FPP in S11. The 3rd ps. sg. non-human prefix /b/ cross-referencing aP may
be missing from S11; the orthography, however, may not help in deciding this
issue; so, for example, in ex. (478) below, only the writing du3-ma, but not du3-
ma-ab is expected in the 23rd c. BCE. See, however, ex. (479) below, in which
the /b/ is clearly indicated by the orthography. The imperative is negated with
the modal-prefix na(n)-, see ex. (503) below.
(478) CUSAS 17, 13 2:1 (RIME 1.14.add21.01) (unknown, cca. 23th c.) (P251599)
e2-u10 du3-ma
e=u= S1du-S4m-S7a-S11b
house=1SG.POSS=ABS build-VEN-DAT-3NH.P
Build up my temple for me!
240

10 gi kug-babbar-am um-ma-ab,
10 gig kug-babbar==am- S1um-S4m-S7a-S11b
10 unit silver=ABS=COP-3.SG.S give-VEN-DAT-3.SG.NH.P
Give me ten shekels of silver!
nin-u tum-mu-un-ze-en
nin=u= S1tum-S4mu-S11n-S14zen
sister=1.SG.POSS=ABS bring-VEN-3.SG.H.P-2.PL
Bring (pl.) my sister!
Singular S or Ais not marked with any verbal pronominal affix; plural S or Ais
cross-referenced with the suffix -/(n)zen/ in S14, see ex. (480) above. As the
construction treats S and Aalike, it can be said to have anominative-accusative
conjugation pattern. In imperative forms the finite-marker prefix is /a/-, see
exx. (481) and (482) below.
(481) TCS 1, 142 rev. 4 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P145683)
e-a-ne gul-a
e=ane= S1gul-S2a
house=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS destroy-FIN
Destroy his house!
kiib-u zi-ra-ab
kiib=u= S1zir-S2a-S11b
seal=1.SG.POSS=ABS break-FIN-3.SG.NH.P
Destroy my sealed tablet!
The prefix /ga/
The prefix /ga/- occupies S2 of the verbal prefix-chain, it is in complementary

distribution with the finite-marker prefix. The prefix /ga/- is only used is in 1st
ps. sg. or pl. verbal forms. Its meaning can be paraphrased as It is my/our
intention to VERB. It is characterised by aspecial construction that uses the
preterite stem but cross-references the P with the final pronominal prefix in S11.21
21 For arare exception that uses apresent-future stem in atext from the first part of the 2nd
millennium BCE, see ex. (50) above in Lesson, section 5.1.
241
LESSON 16
As in present-future verbal forms, the final pronominal prefix in S11 may be

missing if the P is a3rd ps. sg. non-human. Singular S or Ais not marked with
any verbal pronominal affix, plural S or Ais cross-referenced with the suffix -
/enden/ in S14, see ex. (485) below. As the construction treats S and Aalike, it
can be said to have anominative-accusative conjugation pattern. Modal forms
with the prefix /ga/- are negated with the modal-prefix /bara/-, see ex. (498)
below.
issu-zu-e3, ni2 ga-ma-i-ib2-te
issu=zu=e ni= S2ga-S4m-S5ba-S9i-S11b-S12ten
shade=2.SG.POSS=TERM self=ABS MOD-VEN-MID-TERM-3.SG.NH.P-cool
I will cool off in your shade!
(484) NATN 571 obv. 12rev. 1 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P121269)
2 ma-na kug-babbar-am, ga-la
2 mana kugbabbar==am- S2ga-S12la
2 unit silver=ABS=COP-3.SG.S MOD-weigh
(He said to him:) I will pay two pounds of silver!
(485) How grain came to Sumer 15 (ETCSL 1.7.6)
kur-e ga-e-re-en-de-en
kur=e S2ga-S12ere-S14enden
mountain=TERM MOD-go.PT.PL-1.PL
Let us go to the mountain!
(486) Shulgi D 219 (ETCSL 2.4.2.04)
nig ki-en-gi-ra ba-a-gu-la
kur=a S2ga-S4m- S6b-S10i-S11b-S12gul
Whatever has been destroyed in the homeland, I will destroy in the foreign
country.
The prefix /ga/- may not be used with stative verbs. Thus, forms like *ga-me-
en do not exist; instead, the modal-prefix /a/- is used with the copula:
242

sipad sa-gu-al , da-ri e-me
sipad sagual= dari=e S1a-S2i-S12me-S14en
shepherd foremost=ABS forever=TERM MOD-FIN-COP-1.SG.S
May I be the foremost shepherd forever!
The prefix /a/
The prefix /a/-, written with the grapheme HA, can be used as amarker of
both epistemic and deontic modality. In finite verbal forms that would start
with afinite-marker without the prefix /a/-, the prefix is followed by afinite-
marker. The vowel of the prefix then contracts with the finite marker /i/-, the
contracted form, //-, is written as arule with the grapheme HE. The prefix
/a/- may also assimilate to the vowel of afollowing syllable, see, exx. (490)
and (497) below.
As an epistemic marker, /a/- can have aweak meaning: it is possible
that , or astrong meaning: it is acertainty/necessity that . When it
expresses epistemic possibility, then transitive verbs usually use the present-
future tense, while when it expresses epistemic certainty, then the verb uses
as arule the preterite tense. An epistemic /a/- in its weak meaning is negated
with the modal prefix /na(n)/-, see, ex. (489) below; in its strong meaning with
the prefix /bara/-, see, e.g., ex. (502) below.
Clauses with a verbal form prefixed with /a/- expressing epistemic
possibility are often to be translated as conditionals, like in exx. (488) and (489)
below. In ex. (489), for example, the interpretations if he strikes with it and
if he breaks it derive from the epistemic meanings he may strike with it,
and he may break it respectively.
(488) Lugalbanda and the Anzud bird 106 (ETCSL 1.8.2.2)
diir e-me-en
diir= S1a-S2i-S12me-S14en
god=ABS MOD-FIN-COP-2.SG.S
if you are agod, .
(489) The Axe of Nergal 911 (ETCSL 5.7.3)
e-sag-ge a-ne na-an-ku-u,
S1 a- i-
S2 S12 sag-S14 e a=ane= S2nan-S12kuu-S13ed-S14
MOD-FIN-hit-3.SG.A arm=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MOD-be.tired-PF-3.SG.S
243
LESSON 16
e-eb-ta-ku-e, ga-mu-na-ab-silim
S1 a- i- b-
S2 S5 S9 ta-S12 ku- S14 e S2ga-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12silim
MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH-ABL-break-3.SG.A MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-heal
If he strikes with it (= the axe), his arm cannot get tired; if he breaks it, I will
repair it for him.
As adeontic marker, the prefix /a/- expresses arealizable wish, arequest, or
an advice. Transitive action verbs prefixed with adeontic /a/- use the present-
future tense.
(490) FaoS 19, Gir23 obv. 7rev. 1 (Lagash, 23rd c.) (P217056)
lugal-ka, e-me-um-mu
lugalka=e S1a-S6m-S7a-S12um-S14e
PN=ERG MOD-1.PL-DAT-give-3.SG.A
May Lugalka hand it over to us!
(491) TCS 1, 61 36 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P134662)
mer-ra-ga-i-ir, dumu nibruki-kam,
erragair= dumu nibru=ak==am-

PN=ABS child GN=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
ursaga=ra S1a-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14e
PN=DAT.H MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.P-give-3.SG.A
(Tell Ea-bani:) He must hand over Erra-gashir, (who is) acitizen of Nippur, to
Ursaga!
(492) Shulgi H Segment D 19 (ETCSL 2.4.2.08)
u=e u niral-= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gu-S14e
people=L3.NH food fine-TL=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-eat-3.SG.A
a dug a-bi-na-na
a dug-= S1a-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12na~na-S14e
water sweet-TL=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.NH.P-drink~PF-3.SG.A
water!
As amarker of deontic modality expressing arealizable wish, /a/- can be
contrasted with the prefix /nu/- which expresses an unrealizable wish: in ex.
(493) below, Inana mourns the dead king Ur-Namma, and she knows that her
wish may not be fulfilled.
244
(493) Ur-Namma A213 (ETCSL 2.4.1.1)

sipad-u i-li-a-ne nu-u-ma-an-ku-ku
sipad=u= ili=ane=e S2nu-S4m-S7a-S10n-S12ku~ku-S13ed-S14
shepherd=1.SG.POSS=ABS prime=3.SG.H.POSS=L3 MOD-VEN-DAT-L1.SYN-enter~PF-PF-3.SG.S
e-e ba-ra-ku-ku-de-en
e= S2bara-S10n-S12ku~ku-S13ed-S14en
1.SG.PR=ABS MOD-L1.SYN-enter~PF-PF-1.SG.S
If only my shepherd could enter before me in it in his prime I will certainly
not enter it (= E-ana temple) otherwise!
A special feature of the verbal forms prefixed with /a/- is that intransitive
and stative verbs always use the preterite tense in whatever function, epistemic
or deontic, the prefix is used. Both ex. (494), an intransitive verb, and ex. (495),
passive of atransitive, use the preterite form of verb, and they have deontic
meaning.
(494) Gudea Statue C 4:1 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232276)
nam-til3-la-ne e-sud
namtil=ane= S1a-S2i-S12sud-S14
life=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MOD-FIN-long-3.SG.S
May his (= Gudea) life be long!
gu-gen7, ud-ne-na e-gaz
gu=gen ud=nn=a S1a-S3i-S12gaz-S14
bull=EQU day=DEM=L1 MOD-FIN-kill-3.SG.S
When in the sequence of two clauses both use amodal form of the verb, then
the second clause may often be translated as apurpose clause, as in exx. (496)
and (497) below. A similar construction is also attested in Akkadian (see
Huehnergard 1997: 147 [16.4]), so this construction may be another example of
mutual influence between the two languages.
(496) Letter from Kug-Nanna to the god Ninshubur Segment B 6 (ETCSL 3.3.39)
ag ib-ba-zu ga-ab-u-e
ag ib-a=zu= ?22
S2ga-S11b-S12u-S14en
heart angry-PT-2.SG.POSS=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH.P-pacify-1.SG.A
22 See Attinger 1993: 292 ( 190C) for similar irregular forms attested starting from the Old
Babylonian period.
245
LESSON 16
ur-zu e-bur-e
ur=zu= ?
S1a-S2i-S12bur-S13ed -S14
liver=2.SG.POSS=ABS MOD-FIN-release-PF-3.SG.S
Let me soothe your angry heart, so that your spirit will be assuaged.
(497) Ninurta G 6668 (ETCSL 4.27.07)
kug ama dnane dug-ga-na-ab
kug ama nane S1dug-S2a-S6nn-S7a-S11b

holy mother DN speak-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.P
dutu-gen a bad u-mu-ri-in-gub
utu=gen a bad-= S2a-S4mu-S6r-S10i-S11n-S12gub-S14
DN=EQU arm open-TL=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-L2-3.SG.H.A-put-3.SG.P
Ask the holy mother Nanshe to cast her protecting arms over you as if she were
the god Utu!
The prefix /bara/
The prefix /bara/- occupies S2 of the verbal prefix-chain, it is in complemen-

tary distribution with the finite-marker prefix. The negative modal prefix
/bara/- is used as the negative counterpart of both deontic /ga/- and strong
epistemic /a/-. When it negates a/ga/-form, then the verbal form is present-
future as arule, see also ex. (493) above. When it negates a/a/-form, then the
verbal form is preterite as arule.
One can assume that all three verbal forms express the same kind of
modality in ex. (498) below. The first two verbal forms use the prefix /ga/-,
while the third the prefix /bara/-. The co-occurrence of these forms reveal that
/bara/- may be used as the negative counterpart of /ga/-.
(498) BE 3/1, 4 obv. 46 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P105558)
e-za ga-gub, ga-am-ta-e,
e2=zu=a S2 ga- n-
S10 S12 gub S2ga-S4m-S5b-S9ta-S12e
house=2.SG.POSS=L1 MOD-L1.SYN-stand MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH-ABL-leave
ba-ra-ba-za-de-en!
S2bara-S5ba-S12zah-S13ed-S14en
MOD-MID-run.away-PF-1.SG.S
I will serve in your house, I will go out of it, but I will not run away!
246
(499) E-ana-tum 1 obv. 20:221:1 (RIME1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222399)

eg pa-be, u-bala ba-ra-ak-ke
eg pa=be=e ubala= S2bara-S11b-S12ak-S14en
levee ditch=3.SG.NH.POSS=L3.NH change=ABS MOD-3.SG.NH.L3-make-1.SG.A
I will (never ever) change its levees and ditches!
The prefix /bara/- is also the negative counterpart of the prefix /a/- when
expressing epistemic certainty, meaning something like certainly not or
absolutely not:
(500) TCTI 2, 3916 rev. 45 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P133112)
zi lugal diri-ga-e3, ba-ra-a-su
zi lugal=ak dirig-a=e S2bara-S11-S12sug-S14
life king=GEN exceed-PT=TERM MOD-1.SG.A-repay-3.SG.P
By the kings life! I certainly did not pay back too much!
(501) MVN 6, 1 obv. 45 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P217677)
ur-lum-ma-ra, lu ba-ra-ba-du
urlummak=ra lu= S2bara-S5ba-S6n-S10(i>)-S12du-S14
PN=L2.H person=ABS MOD-MID-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-hold-3.SG.S
Definitely no one detained Ur-Lumma.
One can assume that all three verbal forms express the same kind of modality in
ex. (502) below. The first two verbal forms use the prefix /bara/-, while the third
one the prefix /a/- in astrong epistemic meaning. The co-occurrence of these
forms reveal that /bara/- may be used as the negative counterpart of /a/-.
(502) Shulgi A7071 (ETCSL 2.4.2.01)
ni ba-ra-ba-da-te su ba-ra-ba-da-zig
ni= S2 bara-S5 ba- -
S6 S8 da-S12 te- S14 su= S2bara-S5ba-S6-S8daS12-zig-S14
fear=ABS MOD-MID-1.SG-COM-approach-3.SG.S flesh=ABS MOD-MID-1.SG-COM-rise-3.SG.S
piri ban-da-gen gur-ru-u u-mu-bur-bur
piri banda-=gen gurus= S1a-S4mu-S11-S12bur~bur-S14
lion banda-TL=EQU CVN=ABS MOD-VEN-1.SG.A-glow?~PL-3.SG.P
(I, the king, however,) could certainly not be scared, nor could I be terrified.
I did rush forth like afierce lion.
The prefixe na(n)
The prefix /na(n)/- occupies S2 of the verbal prefix-chain, it is in comple-

mentary distribution with the finite-marker prefix. The prefix /na(n)/- is used
247
LESSON 16
as arule with verbs in the present-future. The negative modal prefix /na(n)/-
has two basic functions. Firstly, it is the negative counterpart of the imperative:
(503) The instructions of Shuruppak 154 (ETCSL 5.6.1)
[kar]-kid na-an-sa10-sa10-an
karkid= S2na-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14en
prostitute=ABS MOD-3.SG.H.P-buy~PF-2.SG.A
Do not buy aprostitute!
Secondly, it is the negative counterpart of the prefix /a/- when expressing

deontic modality. One can assume that both verbal forms express the same kind
of modality in ex. (504) below. The first verbal forms use the prefix /na(n)/-,
while the second the prefix /a/- in adeontic meaning. The co-occurrence of
these forms reveal that /na(n)/- may be used as the negative counterpart of
deontic /a/-.
(504) Gudea Statue C 4:13-16 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232276)
egu-za gub-ba-na suhu-be
guza gub-a=ane=ak suhu=be=
chair stand-PT-3.SG.H.POSS=GEN foundation=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS
na-an-gi-ne numun-a-ne e-til
S2 nan-S12 gin-S14 e numun=ane= S1a-S12i-S12til-S14
MOD-firm-3.SG.A seed=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MOD-FIN-end-3.SG.S
May she not make firm the foundation of his standing throne! May his offspring
come to an end!
Nonnegative /na/ and /i/
These two prefixes also occupy S2 of the verbal prefix-chain, they are in
complementary distribution with the finite-marker prefix. The meaning of the
prefix /na/- and /i/- are difficult to determine. Both prefixes appear to
express affirmative epistemic modality. Between the two, the prefix /na/- is
known better. It occurs often in the mythical opening passages of narrative
texts, but also in contexts where it expresses strong epistemic certainty, as in
ex. (505) below.
(505) Gudea Statue B 6:777:4 (Lagash, 22nd c.) (P232275)
e ur-gen dim-ma, ensi dili-e,
e ur=gen dim-a= ensi dili=e
house DEM=EQU make-PT=ABS ruler single=ERG
248
dnin-ir-su-ra, nu-na-du, na-mu-du

ninirsuk=ra S1nu-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12du-S14 S2na-S4mu-S11n-S12du-S14
DN=DAT.H NEG-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P MOD-VEN-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
No ruler but he (= Gudea) has ever built atemple fashioned like this for the god
Ningirsu. = lit. No ruler has ever built atemple fashioned like this for the god
Ningirsu, but he (= Gudea) did built it.
On could speculate that the affirmative epistemic prefix /na/- became amarker
of hearsay evidentiality by associating epistemic certainty with the reliability
of knowledge inherited from ancient times. In its epistemic meaning the prefix
/na/- might have been largely supplanted by the prefix /a/-.
Further readings
The most important descriptions of the traditional approach to the modal

prefixes in Sumerian are Edzard 1971 and 2003: 113130. An important
contribution to the topic is Attinger 1993: 288297, who takes notice of many
of the shortcomings of the traditional approach. Civils description with the
introduction of the modern linguistic terminology can be found in Civil 2000.
In many grammatical environments, the negative modal prefix /na(n)/-
and the affirmative /na/- may be written with the same grapheme NA. The
arguments for the separation of the two morphemes can be found in Attinger
1993: 289291 and Jagersma 2010: 565569. The most detailed study on the
affirmative /na/- is the unpublished work of Ecklin (2005).
A description of the affirmative /na/- as aprefix of evidentiality is Marsal 2012.
Exercises
16.3 Compare the examples below! Why does ex. (506) use the negated form of an
independent copula; and why do the other two examples use only the /nu/
particle without acopula?
249
LESSON 16

arad ur-dku-dba-u-ka nu-u-me-en3
arad urkubauk=ak= S1nu-S2i-S12me-S14en
slave PN=GEN=ABS NEG-FIN-COP-1.SG.S
I am not aslave of Ur-Ku-Bau.
(507) E-ana-tum 1 rev. 10:23-25 (RIME1.9.3.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222399)
na-ru-a, mu-be, lu-a nu
narua=ak mu=be= lu=ak nu
stele=GEN name=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS person=GEN NEG
The steles name is not that of man.
(508) The Lament for Urim and Sumer A95 (ETCSL 2.2.3)
dam-u nu
dam=u= nu
wife=1.SG.POSS=ABS NEG
(The father turned away from his wife saying:) She is not my wife.
16.4 Explain the form of the negative prefix in the example below!
usan la-ba-sag
usan= S1nu-S5ba-S12sag-S14
whip=ABS NEG-MID-hit-3.SG.S
No one was whipped.
16.5 Explain the meaning of the modal-prefix, the form of the locative3 prefix, and
the tense of the verb in the following example!
sa-dug-na, e dnin-irsu-ka-ta,
sadug=ane=a e ninirsuk=ak=ta
offering=3.SG.NH.POSS=L2.NH house DN=GEN=ABL
inim e-eb-gi
16.6 Negate the following modal forms!
a) iri mete-na, u e-na-zig
iri nite=ane=a u= S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S10n-S12zig-S14
city self=3.SG.H.POSS=L1 hand=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-L1.SYN-rise-3.SG.S
May there be arevolt against him in his own city!
250
b) arza-a mul an kug-ba

gu ga-mu-ra-a-de
c) gud-gen, ud-ne-na e-gaz
gud=gen ud=nn=a S1a-S2i-S12gaz-S14
ox=EQU day=DEM=L1 MOD-FIN-kill-3.SG.S
d) urimki-e gil-sa-a, e-mi-ak
urim=e gilsa=e S1a-S2i-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ak-S14
GN=L3.NH treasure=ADV MOD-FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-act-3.SG.P
He donated indeed (the drained swamp) to Urim for ever. = lit. He made indeed
Urim treat (the drained swamp) in the manner of atreasure.
e) inim-ba a-mu-da-gub
May she stand with me in this matter!
f) an-ta e-al a-mu-ra-ta-en
an=ta eal= S1a-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S9ta-S12en-S14
Abundance comes down to you from heaven.
g) ni ki-en-gi-ra ba-a-gu-la
lands!
16.7 Look up the context of the following two exx. on the ETCSL website! Compare the
use of the modal forms in them! Try to explain their use based on what you have
learnt in this lesson.
251
LESSON 16

nin-u sa u-a ga-an-ub ki-u na-ab-pad-[de]
My sister, I will duck down my head in the grass! Dont reveal my whereabouts
to them!

gu-li-u sa u-a e-en-ub ki-ne ba-ra-zu
My friend must have ducked down his head in the grass, I have no idea about
his whereabouts.
16.8 Add morphemic segmentation and glossing to the following letter-orders, and
translate them with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs glossary (2016b). For
the numerical expression used in them you may consult ORACCs preliminary
description of metrological expressions (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/doc/
downloads/numref.pdf), or Powells entry in the Reallexikon der Assyriologie (1987
1990).
a) LEM 180 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P107192)

obv. rev.
1. a-bu-bu 1. a-mu-na-ab-um-mu
2. u-na-a-dug 2. kiib-ba-ne-ta
3. 1(ban) ziz 3. ga-ab-ta-tur
d
4. luikur-ra
b) TCS 1, 269 (Umma, 21st c.) (P145756)

obv. rev.
1. ur-dara 1. e-e u-en
2. u-na-a-dug 2. ga-na-ab-um
3. 1/2(di) gi kug-babbar
4. e-zid-u
5. a-na-ab-um-mu
c) MVN 6, 429 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P114829)

obv. rev.
1. lugal-gu-gal-ra 1. na-mi-gur-re
2. u-na-a-dug 2. a-ma-ru-kam
3. 2(u) 2(a) gu gi-zi 3. a-ba e-u-ge
4. diir-sukkal-ra
5. e-na-ab-um-mu
252
d) TCS 1, 128 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P111261)

obv. rev.
1. lu-dara 1. lu na-an-ba-du
2. u-na-a-dug 2. ze-e-me makim-a-ne
m d
3. urlamma 3. e-me
4. u ba-za
e) LEM 87 (Lagash, 21st c.) (P112518)

obv. rev.
1. na-ne-ra 1. iri-se-ga e dnin-e-gal-ka
2. u-na-a-dug ag mar-sa-me-e
3. msi-ar-kalam-ma 2. na-an-ba-na-a-du
4. mur-me
5. dumu lugal-ka-gi-na-me-e
f) TCS 1, 142 (Nippur, 21st c.) (P145683)

obv. rev.
1. lugal-ezen-ra 1. a-a saa-kam
2. u-na-a-dug 2. tukum-bi
3. amar-uba munu-mu 3. e nu-ra-tug-ga
d
4. lu- nin-ubur-ka-ra 4. e-a-ne gul-a
5. lu i-e na-ne-zi-zi
g) BM 24108 (Lagash 21st c.) (P145596)

obv. rev.
1. na-ne 1. e-na-dug
2. u-na-a-dug 2. a-na-a-am
3. ma-gu-la-ra 3. nu-u-na-um
4. 1(ge) e gur 4. e-na-ab-um-mu
5. um-mu-da 5. inim-be na-ba-ab-gur-re
16.9 Transliterate the text of FaoS 19, Gir21 (Lagash, 23rd c.) (P213588) (a handcopy
sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs
glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to the verbal
forms.
253
LESSON 16
16.10 Transliterate the text of FaoS 19, Um5 (unknown, 23rd c.) (P215523) (a handcopy
sign list (2012). Translate the text with the help of Volks (2012) or Foxvogs
glossary (2016b). Assign morphemic segmentation and glossing to the verbal
forms.
254
INDEX OF QUOTED SUMERIAN TEXTS

A CUSAS 26
ABTR 13 rev. 5............................................... 103 45 rev. 1:3................................................. 147
Amar-Suena 156 .............................................................144
5 2:1 ............................................................ 73
9 3233.............................................. 132, 157 D
9 4546 ..................................................... 208 DP
20 1 ........................................................... 113 80 obv. 2:45 .............................................226
Anam A 38 ........................................................70 103 rev. 2:1................................................. 31
Anonymous Nippur 6 17 ............................ 194 117 obv. 6:45 .......................................... 177
ASJ 4, p. 141 no. 6 obv. 2 ...............................111 117 obv. 6:78 .......................................... 177
AUCT 1 218 rev. 4:2................................................. 30
224 obv. 6:59 .......................................... 188
181 12 ..................................................... 190
307 obv. 2:16 .................................. 101, 193
328 obv. 56 ............................................. 195
339 rev. 2:33:1.........................................185
942 obv. 58 ............................................. 190
512 rev. 2:14........................................... 185
942 rev. 56.............................................. 185
601 obv. 1:32:1 ....................................... 205
AUCT 3
Dumuzis Dream
84 obv. 24 ............................................... 159
19 ..............................................................241
AWL 209
91 ............................................................252
183 rev. 1:14............................................209
144 .............................................................252
184 rev. 1:3................................................209
164 .............................................................158
Aya-Ane-pada 6 15...................................... 194
Dumuzi-Inana
D 19........................................................... 212
B E1 6 ........................................................... 157
BE 3/1, 4 obv. 46 ......................................... 246
BIN 8, 345 obv. 7:6 ........................................ 109
BM 106451 7 .................................................... 93
E
E-ana-tum
BM 106540 obv. 3 .......................................... 108
1
BM 24108 ....................................................... 253
obv. 4:2022.........................................147
obv. 3rev. 1 ............................................ 214
obv. 4:2023.................................195, 212
rev. 23..................................................... 237
obv. 4:24-26 .........................................235
BPOA 1, 382 obv. 7rev. 2..............................153
obv. 9:23.............................................218
BPOA 6, 1287 rev. 1........................................161
obv. 16:1220...................................... 232
BPOA 7, 1948 rev. 3....................................... 160
obv. 16:17............................................ 186
obv. 18:2122...................................... 208
C obv. 20:2-21:1 ......................................247
CTNMC 4 5:19 .................................................. 44
rev. 5:32-36..........................................235
CUSAS 3, 385 obv. 6 ...................................... 225
rev. 10:23-25....................................... 250
CUSAS 17
3 3:1516 .................................................... 65
13
4 2:36 ...................................................... 228
2:1 .......................................................240
5 6:25 ...................................................... 186
3:8 ..........................................................38
6 4:1819 .................................................. 157
8 5:96:4 ................................................... 176
255
ECTJ 50 14 .................................................... 180 2

En-ana-tum I 3:54:2................................................... 83
2 rev. 2:5....................................................110 4
2 rev. 4:105:2...........................................192 4:3 ........................................................124
3 11 ............................................................198 5:48.......................................................57
3 1516 ......................................................195 7
5 4:8 .............................................................31 1516 ..................................... 97, 131, 148
18 2:37............................................... 97, 147 2122................................................... 107
19 12 ......................................................... 43 23
Enki and Ninhursaga 18 ..........................................................31
201 .............................................................. 67 2930................................................... 138
262 ............................................................ 171 30 ..........................................................30
Enkis journey to Nibru 71............................. 70
Enlil and Nam-zid-tara 23-24 ...................... 113 F
Enlil in the Ekur 75......................................... 70 FaoS 17, 45 10 .................................................. 67
Enmerkar and En-suhgir-ana FaoS 19
15 ..............................................................109 Gir21 ......................................................... 253
121 .............................................................. 63 Gir23 obv. 7rev. 1 .......................... 168, 244
276280 .................................................... 120 Gir32 ......................................................... 144
278 .............................................................. 62 Gir32 rev. 7 .............................................. 128
Enmerkar and the Lord of Aratta Um5 .......................................................... 254
30 ..............................................................172
420 ...................................................... 79, 168 G
554 ............................................................ 227 Gilgamesh and Huwawa A 113 .....................157
En-metena Gilgamesh, Enkidu and the Netherworld... 157
1 Gisha-kidu 1 .................................................... 75
1:13 ................................................ 39, 56 Gudea
1:812.................................................. 186 2 18 ..........................................................170
1:2527.................................................175 4 ..............................................................180
1:2829 .......................................... 87, 208 8 6 ................................................................53
1:3942................................................ 173 18 ................................................................60
2:13.................................................... 184 56 3:3-4 ....................................................... 71
2:45 ............................................ 138, 226 64 ................................................................90
2:5 ......................................................... 30 72 12 ......................................................... 43
2:68.................................................... 217 Cyl. A
2:8 ..........................................................30 1:3 ........................................162, 197, 227
2:27................................................ 95, 179 1:9 ........................................................117
3:4 ..........................................................29 1:11.......................................................128
3:2527.................................................. 71 1:17.........................................................66
3:3437................................................ 158 1:25.......................................................174
5:1213................................................ 205 2:23.....................................................188
6:8 .........................................................31 2:5 ........................................................192
6:1516 .......................................... 83, 101 2:13.......................................................169
6:2123 .................................. 80, 132, 208 2:2122 .........................................158, 196
6:2629.................................................. 65 2:24.......................................................160
6:2829................................................ 204
256
2:26 .........................................61, 146, 171 17:17.......................................................54

2:2627.................................................169 17:18.....................................................100
2:28.........................................................99 18:8...............................................146, 171
3:6 ........................................................117 18:24.....................................................204
3:11.......................................................216 19:3.......................................................101
3:1415.................................................242 19:89 ...........................................176, 205
3:17.......................................................193 19:13...............................................81, 184
4:4 ................................................146, 217 19:24.....................................................198
4:5 ........................................................192 22:9.........................................................41
4:16.......................................................196 22:1213...............................................175
4:20.................................................93, 169 22:20.....................................................177
5:18.......................................................169 22:23.....................................................158
5:19.........................................................97 23:4.........................................................73
6:12...............................................55, 214 23:7...............................................140, 155
7:2 ........................................................174 23:26.....................................................196
7:1112 ...........................................98, 114 24:8...................................................42, 68
7:16.......................................................218 24:10.......................................................45
8:10.......................................................114 Cyl. B
9:9 ..........................................................93 2:5 ........................................................116
9:10.................................................80, 215 2:6 ........................................................131
9:17.........................................................54 2:21.......................................................170
9:18.......................................................154 5:45.....................................................192
10:1214...............................................212 5:20.......................................................234
10:27.......................................................52 10:1........................................................ 52
10:2829...............................................151 11:1314 ...................................... 140, 174
11:8.......................................................151 18:1213................................................ 86
11:1011...............................................174 19:2021 ...................................... 155, 217
11:16.....................................................175 20:14 ............................................ 155, 176
11:24.....................................................168 20:18.................................................... 211
12:12 ...........................................130, 155 Statue A
12:12...............................................83, 146 1:3 ..........................................................43
12:1415.................................................98 2:12.................................................... 170
13:2.......................................................118 3:23.....................................................194
13:3.......................................................176 3:64:1..................................................184
13:16.....................................................198 Statue B...........................................................
13:18.....................................................162 1:1314 .......................................... 97, 124
15:6.......................................................171 1:1719 ................................ 189, 214, 250
15:910.................................................100 2:1617.................................................. 99
15:10.............................................154, 192 3:67 ............................................ 162, 197
15:11.....................................................179 3:89...................................................... 68
15:19...............................................99, 238 3:1011................................................ 185
15:22.....................................................220 4:79.................................................... 207
16:1516...............................................189 4:10 .............................................. 161, 250
16:25.....................................................205 5:4 ....................................................... 238
17:11.......................................................54 5:1011.................................................. 64
257
5:17...................................................... 217 I
5:4547................................................ 194 Ibbi-Suen B Segment A 37 ............................104
6:76........................................................ 69 Iddin-Dagan
6:777:3................................................. 68 A 172..........................................................116
6:777:4............................................... 248 B
7:21-23 ................................................ 124 53 ....................................................... 171
7:24.........................................................37 56 ............................................... 171, 210
7:30........................................................ 72 D 30............................................................229
7:4950 ................................ 111, 150, 239 Inana B 30...................................................... 173
7:54...................................................... 108 Inanas descent to the netherworld
8:67.................................................... 184 308 ............................................................ 158
8:1920................................................ 124 332 ............................................................ 169
8:24........................................................ 42 Iri-kagina
8:3942.................................................. 54 1
9:67 .............................................. 67, 245 3:18...................................................38, 60
Statue C 4:8 ..........................................................30
4:1 ........................................................245 4:9 ..........................................................51
4:13-16 ................................................ 248 4:1011...................................................52
Statue D 7:1721.................................................132
2:13-3:2 ............................................... 231 8:1012.................................................125
5:47.................................................... 211 12:2328.................................................95
Statue E 3
2:12.......................................................98 2:1618 ................................ 72, 132, 160
4:14........................................................ 99 3:2022 .............................................. 190
8:1115.................................................. 41 5
9:912 .......................................... 160, 238 obv. 1:13............................................ 168
Statue F obv. 1:89............................................ 211
1:122:1............................................... 189 obv. 1:1213.......................................... 57
3:67.....................................................208 obv. 4:14............................ 138, 156, 159
Statue G 14f 1 .......................................................... 209
2:910.................................................. 217 14p 12 ............................................. 172, 227
Statue H.....................................................181 14q 12 ..................................................... 195
3:15.................................................... 189 Ishme-Dagan
Statue I 7 17.................................................. 195, 233
3:46.................................................... 170 A
Statue R 90 ........................................................229
1:6-7............................................. 218, 231 103....................................................... 198
105........................................................224
H J 1718 ...................................................... 176
Hoe and Plough 147...................................... 118
How grain came to Sumer 15 ...................... 242 J
HSS 3 42 rev. 2:1.............................................193 JCS 10, 28 no. 5 obv. 6 ................................... 186
258
L N
LEM Nabi-Enlil to Iter-pisha 1 ............................... 98
87 ..............................................................253 Nam-mahne
178 7 ......................................................... 196 6
180 ............................................................ 252 2:25.................................................... 103
Letter from Ishbi-Erra to Ibbi-Suen 25......... 70 2:6 ........................................................125
Letter from Kug-Nanna to the god Ninubur 7 36 ............................................................56
Segment B 6 ..............................................245 11 9 ........................................................... 113
Lipit-Eshtar D 6............................................. 219 Nanna C Segment B 16 ................................. 219
Lugalbanda and the Anzud bird 106... 111, 243 NATN
Lugalbanda in the mountain cave ...... 103, 109 571
59 ..............................................................109 obv. 12rev. 1 ..................................... 242
241 ............................................................ 103 obv. 7................................................... 178
Lugal-kigine-dudu 626 obv. 6 ................................................ 178
1 ..............................................................135 Nebraska 19 rev. 22 ...................................... 179
1 614 ........................................................130 NG
Lugal-zagesi 1 ..............................................................199
1:335 ....................................................... 105 11 obv. 1314 ..............................................95
1:4445 ..................................................... 229 17 ..............................................................222
2:2122 ....................................................... 57 20 obv. 7 ....................................................241
2:2629 ..................................................... 138 32 obv. 3 ....................................................250
2:2632 ..................................................... 130 41 obv. 58 ................................................161
2:3032 ....................................................... 45 51 rev. 3.......................................94, 170, 184
3:2426 ..................................................... 175 69 ..............................................................199
3:2728 ..................................................... 218 80 1314 ....................................................156
3:3233 ..................................................... 211 99
3:3536 ..................................................... 243 obv. 2:15rev. 1:31 ............................. 221
rev. 1:35 ............................................ 205
M rev. 1:34 ............................................ 126
MAD 4, 17 rev. 58 ........................................ 177 117 rev. 4................................................... 73
MS 4096 rev. 6 ............................................... 149 120b rev. 910.................................. 140, 193
MVN 11, 168 rev. 8................................ 179, 238 132 rev. 1.................................................. 179
MVN 15, 218 obv. 4rev. 1 ........................... 213 137 obv. 7 ................................................. 115
MVN 22, 71 obv. 8 ..........................................103 138 obv. 5 ................................................. 156
MVN 3 ............................................................ 146 138 rev. 7...................................................118
1 obv. 3:4 ...................................................220 190 obv. 1:6 ...............................................127
36 obv. 3:27 .....................................146, 220 190 obv. 2:12 ............................................ 159
330 obv. 9 ................................................. 149 194 31 ...................................................... 210
363 rev. 35.............................................. 204 202 rev. 9.................................................. 218
MVN 6 205
1 obv. 45. ........................................213, 247 obv. 1:24............................................ 210
293 rev. 3:9................................................ 72 obv. 115..............................................236
429 ............................................................ 252 208 obv. 1:17 .................................... 148, 241
MVN 9, 85 obv. 56 ........................................209 209 obv. 2:1617 ........................................ 92
259
212 Sargon
obv. 1:2................................................ 211 1 3841 ..................................................... 150
obv. 2:4................................................ 111 11 3637 ................................................... 197
214 obv. 1:8 .............................................. 110 16 1213 ................................................... 212
215 obv. 1:5 .................................................99 SAT 1 189 rev. 2 .............................................185
Nik 1 Shulgi
156 rev. 1:4............................................... 187 86 ..............................................................113
297 2:24 .................................................. 177 2046 1-3 .................................................... 38
300 A
obv. 2:2rev. 1:2 ................................. 153 23 ........................................................172
rev. 2:33:4 ..........................................153 7071....................................................247
Ninazu A 26 ....................................................230 91 ........................................................137
Ninurta G 6668 .................................... 208, 246 C 9 ......................................................111, 150
Nisaba 8, 365 rev. 7......................................... 81 D
Nisaba 15 219 ....................................... 161, 210, 242
873 360....................................................... 219
obv. 79............................................... 152 384....................................................... 211
obv. 1012........................................... 152 F 30 ........................................................... 212
NRVN 1 G 8 .............................................................227
65 obv. 14 ............................................... 178 H Segment D 19 ....................... 220, 225, 244
115 rev. 34.............................................. 215 P Segment C 25 ........................................ 231
NWHCM 2009.174 R 2 ............................................................. 198
obv. 910 .................................................. 139 Shu-Suen
obv. 1416 .......................................... 65, 159 1 4:44-46 ................................................... 109
12 ..............................................................105
O 12 78 ....................................................... 150
OBGT VII 3133 ............................................. 149 SNAT
OIP 115, 126 rev. 5................................. 157, 185 125 obv. 47 ............................................. 193
OIP 121........................................................... 226 535 15 ..................................................... 101
54 obv. 3 ............................................220, 226 535 13 ......................................................... 64
470 11 ........................................................197
OSP 2, 58 34 ..................................................148 T
TCS 1 ................................................................ 64
P 48 obv. 3rev. 2.........................................213
Proverbs collection 2 + 6 Segment D 23 ....... 63 56 rev. 5.....................................................197
61 36 ........................................................244
R 68 rev. 3.......................................................64
Rimush 18 2022 ..................................... 66, 147 72 obv. 6 ....................................................213
RTC 19.............................................................165 128 ............................................................ 253
RTC 380 rev. 2 ............................................... 174 131 36 ....................................................... 72
142 ............................................................ 253
S 142 rev. 4.................................................. 241
SA 149 12 ..................................................... 190 148 obv. 6 ................................................. 187
SACT 1, 154 obv. 6......................................... 184 177 rev. 2.................................................. 110
229 rev. 34.............................................. 214
260
240 rev. 3.................................................. 213 Ur-Namma

269 ............................................................ 252 4 ............................................................... 89
327 obv. 3-4.............................................. 110 14 6 ............................................................. 43
TCTI 2 3916 rev. 45 ......................................247 19
The Axe of Nergal 911 ................................ 243 2:56...................................................... 69
The Cursing of Agade 160 .............................. 63 2:78...................................................... 66
The Death of Gilgamesh Me Turan Version 33 ................................................................76
Segment F 168 ......................................... 141 A 213..........................................................245
The Debate between Grain and Sheep 20..... 67 Ur-Nanshe
The instructions of Shuruppak 154 ............ 248 17 3:36 .................................................... 221
The Lament for Urim and Sumer A95 ........ 250 26 ................................................................49
The three ox-drivers form Adab 15.............. 66 Ur-Ningirsu II 3 2:67................................... 217
The victory of Utu-hegal Ur-Ninurta D
28 ..................................................... 131, 169 33 ......................................................175, 210
29 ....................................................... 82, 123 34 ............................................................. 234
TMH NF 1-2 53 obv. 8 ......................................65 Utu-hegal 1 68............................................. 227
TSA 31 obv. 2:4................................................ 53
TSU 12 obv. 14............................................. 178 V
TUT 105 obv. 2:5 ...........................................217 VS 14
20 rev. 1:14..............................................209
U 35 ..............................................................199
UET 2, 338 rev. 2:2 ........................................ 112 94 ..............................................................222
UET 3 121 rev. 1:3................................................209
335 rev. 1................................................... 81 162 obv. 3:2 ................................................ 52
744 rev. 5................................................. 179 179 rev. 5:3................................................141
1410 34 ................................................... 141 VS 27 47 rev. 1:1............................................ 188
Ur-Bau 1 3........................................................ 38
261
REFERENCES
Attinger, P. (1993), Elments de linguistique sumrienne. La construction de du/e/di

dire (Orbis Biblicus et Orientalis. Sonderband). Fribourg, Suisse
Gttingen: Editions Universitaires Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Attinger, P. (2004), Les verbes composes en sumrien, N.A.B.U., no. 79.
Attinger, P. (2005), A propos de AK faire, I-II, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 95,
4664, 208275.
Attinger, P. (2007), Tableau grammatical du sumrien (problmes choisis).
(http://www.iaw.unibe.ch/unibe/portal/fak_historisch/dga/iaw/content/
e39448/e99428/e122665/e122821/pane123080/e123083/Tableaugrammatic
alrevu_ger.pdf)
Attinger, P. (2011), Les pronoms personnels indpendants de le 1re et de la 2e
singulier en Sumrien, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 101, 173190.
Attinger, P. (2014), Lenclitique demonstrative de proximit -/()e/, N.A.B.U.,
no. 3.
Balke, T. (2006), Das sumerische Dimensionalkasussystem (Alter Orient und Altes
Testament, 331). Mnster: Ugarit-Verlag.
Bauer, J. (2005) Zum Gebrauch des Ablativs im Sumerischen, N.A.B.U., no. 31.
Black, J. (1990), The alleged extra phonemes of Sumerian, Revue dAssyriologie
84, 107118.
Black, J. (1991), Sumerian Grammar in Babylonian Theory (Studia Pohl, Series
maior, 12). 2nd, revised edition. Roma: Editrice Pontificio Istituto Biblico.
Black, J. (2000), Some Sumerian adjectives, Acta Sumerologica 22, 327.
Black, J. (2002), Sumerian lexical categories, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 92,
6077.
Black, J. and Zlyomi, G. (2007) Introduction to the study of Sumerian, in J.
Ebeling and G. Cunningham, eds., Analyzing Literary Sumerian. Corpus based
Approaches. London Oakwille: Equinox Publishing, 132.
Borger, R. (2003), Mesopotamisches Zeichenlexikon (AOAT 305). Mnster: Ugarit
Verlag.
Charpin, D. (2014), Ressources assyriologiques sur internet. Bibliotheca Orientalis
71, 331358.
Civil, M. (2000), Modal prefixes, Acta Sumerologica 22, 2942.
Civil, M. (2008), A Sumerian connective particle and its possible Semitic
counterparts, Aula Orientalis 26, 715.
263
REFERENCES
Civil, M. (2013), Ur III as alinguistic watershed, in S. Garfinkle and M. Molina,

eds., From the 21st Century B.C to the 21st Century A.D. Proceedings of the
International Conference on Sumerian Studies Held in Madrid 2224 July 2010.
Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 317.
Coghill, E. and Deutscher, G. (2002), The origin of ergativity in Sumerian, and
the inversion in pronominal agreement: ahistorical explanation based
on Neo-Aramaic parallels, Orientalia NS 71, 267290.
Cooper, J. S. (2005), Right writing: Talking about Sumerian orthography and
texts, Acta Sumerologica 22, 4352.
Cooper, J. S. (2006), Genre, gender, and the Sumerian lamentation, Journal of
Cuneiform Studies 58, 3947.
Cooper, J. S. (2013), Sumer, Sumerisch, in Reallexikon der Assyriologie, Vol. 13.
Berlin: W. de Gruyter, 290297.
Corbett, G. G. (2000) Number (Cambridge Textbooks in Linguistics). Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Crisostomo, C. J. (2015), Language, writing, and ideologies in contact: Sumerian
and Akkadian in the early second millennium BCE, in A. M. Butts, ed.,
Semitic Languages in Contact (Studies in Semitic Languages and Linguistics,
82). Leiden Boston: Brill, 158180.
Ebeling, J. (2007), The meaning and function of the multiword-verb
combinations with and without ak to do, in J. Ebeling and G. Cunningham,
eds., Analyzing Literary Sumerian. Corpus based Approaches. London Oakwille:
Equinox Publishing, 144183.
Ecklin, S. (2005), Das Prfix {na} in der sumerischen Verbalkette. Lizenziatsarbeit,
Universitt Bern, Philosophisch-historische Fakultt,Institut fr Vorder-
asiatische Archologie und Altorientalische Sprachen.
Edzard, D. O. (2003), Sumerian Grammar (Handbook of Oriental Studies. Sect. I, 71)
Leiden and Boston: Brill.
Edzard, D. O., (1971), amu, mar und freie Reduplikation beim sumerischen
Verbum, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 61, 208232.
Edzard, D. O., (1976), amu, mar und freie Reduplikation beim sumerischen
Verbum (Schlu), Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 66, 4561.
Falkenstein, A. (1949), Grammatik der Sprache Gudeas von Laga, I: Schrift- und
Formenlehre (Analecta Orientalia, 28). Roma: Pontificium Institutum
Biblicum.
Falkenstein, A. (1950), Grammatik der Sprache Gudeas von Laga, II: Syntax
(Analecta Orientalia, 29). Roma: Pontificium Institutum Biblicum.
Foxvog, D. A. (1974), The Sumerian Ventive. PhD Dissertation, University of
California.
264
REFERENCES
Foxvog, D. A. (2016), Introduction to Sumerian Grammar (Cuneiform Digital Library

Preprints, 2). http://cdli.ucla.edu/pubs/cdlp/cdlp0002_20160104.pdf.
Foxvog, D. A. (2016b), Elementary Sumerian Glossary (Cuneiform Digital Library
Preprints, 3). http://cdli.ucla.edu/pubs/cdlp/cdlp0003_20160104.pdf.
Gragg, G. B. (1973), Sumerian Dimensional Infixes (Alter Orient und Altes
Testament. Sonderreihe, 5). Kevelaer Neukirchen-Vluyn: Verlag Butzon
& Bercker Neukirchener Verlag.
Haspelmath, M. and Buchholz, O. (1998), Equative and similative constructions
in the languages of Europe, in J. van der Auwera, ed., Adverbial Constructions
in the Languages of Europe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter, 277334.
Huehnergard, John (1997), A Grammar of Akkadian (Harvard Semitic Studies, 45).
Atlanta: Scholars Press.
Jagersma, A. H. (2006), The final person-prefixes and the passive, N.A.B.U., no. 93.
Jagersma, A. H. (2010). A Descriptive Grammar of Sumerian (PhD Dissertation,
Universiteit Leiden. https://openaccess.leidenuniv.nl/handle/1887/16107.
Karahashi, F. (2000), Sumerian Compound Verbs with Body-Part Terms. Ph.D.,
University of Chicago.
Keetman, J. (2004), Verschlusslaute, Affrikaten und Frikative im Sumerischen,
Archiv Orientln 72, 367383.
Keetman, J. (2005), Die altsumerische Vokalharmonie und die Vokale des
Sumerischen, Journal of Cuneiform Studies 57, 116.
Keetman, J. (2014), Die sumerische Wurzelharmonie, Babel und Bibel 7, 109153.
Keetman, J. (2015), Der sumerische Ventiv I: Form und Abgrenzung vom Genus
verbi, Wiener Zeitschrift fr die Kunde des Morgenlandes 105, 165-88.
Keetman, J. (2015b), The Sumerian ventive short and a statistic of Gudea
Cyl. A, N.A.B.U., no. 58.
Kieling, R. (2002), Verbal Plurality in Sandawe, Hamburger Afrikanistische
Arbeitspapiere 1, 5990.
Klaiman, M. H. (1991), Grammatical Voice (Cambridge Studies in Linguistics, 59).
Cambridge etc.: Cambridge University Press.
Klein, J. (2000), The independent pronouns in the ulgi hymns, Acta Sumerolo-
gica 22, 135152.
Kleinerman, A. and A. Gadotti (2013), Two Additional Old Babylonian Sumerian
Literary Letters From Nippur, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 103, 149161.
Kouwenberg, N. J. C. (2002), Ventive, dative and allative in Old Babylonian,
Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 92, 200240.
Kramer, S. N. (1936), The Sumerian Prefix Forms be- and bi- in the Time of the Earlier
Princes of Laga (Assyriological Studies, 8). Chicago: University of Chicago
Press.
265
REFERENCES
Krecher, J. (1967/8), Die pluralischen Verben fr gehen und stehen im

Sumerischen, Welt des Orients 4, 111.
Krecher, J. (1978), Das sumerische Phonem //, in B. Hruka and G. Komorczy,
eds., Festschrift Lubor Matou, II (Assyriologia, 5). Budapest: Etvs Lornd
Tudomnyegyetem, 773.
Krecher, J. (1985), Die /m/-Prfixe des sumerischen Verbums, Orientalia NS 54,
133181.
Krecher, J. (1993), The suffix of determination -/a/, Acta Sumerologica 15,
8198.
Krecher, J. (1995), Die mar-Formen des sumerischen Verbums, in M. Dietrich
O. Loretz, Hrsg., Vom Alten Orient zum Alten Testament. Festschrift fr Wolfram
Freiherrn von Soden zum 85. Geburtstag am 19. Juni 1993 (Alter Orient und Altes
Testament, 240). Kevelaer Neukirchen-Vluyn: Verlag Butzon & Bercker
Neukirchener Verlag, 141200.
Krecher, J. (1998), Zur Sumerischen Grammatik (handout fr den Unterricht).
Stand von 1998, mit wenigem Korrekturen und Ergnzungen von 2015.
(https://www.academia.edu/15648497/Zur_Sumerischen_Grammatik_han
dout_f%C3%BCr_den_Unterricht_)
Krifka, M. (2007), Basic notions of information structure, in C. Fry, G. Fanselow
and M. Krifka, eds., Interdisciplinary Studies on Information Structure: Vol. 6. The
notions of information Structure. Potsdam: Universittsverlag Potsdam, 1355.
Krispijn, Th. J. H. (2000), The change of official Sumerian in the city-state of
Laga, Acta Sumerologica 22, 153175.
Kuno, S. (1978), Pronominalization, reflexivization, and direct discourse,
Linguistic Inquiry 3, 161196.
Marsal, E. (2012), La evidencialidad en lengua sumeria, in A. Agud et al., eds.
Sptimo centenario de los estudios orientales en Salamanca (Estudios filolgicos,
337). Salamanca: Ediciones Universidad de Salamanca, 127134.
Marsal, E. (2014), The beginnings of Sumerology, I: From early sketches to afirst
complete grammar, Aula Orientalis 32, 283297.
Marsal, E. (2015), The beginnings of Sumerology, II: From Delitzschs grammar
to Adam Falkenstein, Aula Orientalis 33, 255269.
Maul, Stefan M. (1991), Neues zu den Graeco-Babyloniaca, Zeitschrift fr
Assyriologie 81, 87107.
Meyer-Laurin, V. (2010), Die mar-Basen der sumerischen Verben tm hin-,
wegfhren und e6/de6 bringen, liefern, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 100,
1-14.
Meyer-Laurin, V. (2011), Die Zeichenpaare im sargonischen Akkadisch aus
sumerologischer Sicht, Welt des Orients 41, 2768; 201236.
266
REFERENCES
Meyer-Laurin, V. (2012), Zum Alter des sumerischen Adverbiativs, in

C. Mittermayer and S. Ecklin, eds., Altorientalische Studien zu Ehren von Pascal
Attinger: mu-ni u4 ul-li2-a-a a2-a2-de3. Fribourg, Suisse: Editions
Universitaires, 215241.
Michalowski, P. (2004) Sumerian, in R. D. Woodward, ed., The Cambridge
Encyclopedia of the Worlds Ancient Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge
University Press, 1959.
Mithun, M. (1996), New directions in referentiality, in B. Fox. ed., Studies in
Anaphora (Typological studies in language 33). Amsterdam: John Benjamins,
413435.
Mittermayer, C. (2006), Altbabylonische Zeichenliste der sumerischen-literarischen
Texte (Orbis Biblicus et Orientalis. Sonderband). Fribourg Gttingen:
Academic Press Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.
Nuyts, J. (2001), Epistemic Modality, Language, and Conceptualization: A Cognitive-
Pragmatic Perspective. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Payne, D. L. and Barshi, I. (1999), External Possession (Typological Studies in
Language, 39). Amsterdam: John Benjamins.
Peust, C. (2009), Zum Relativsatz mit folgendem Possessor im Sumerischen,
Wiener Zeitschrift fr die Kunde des Morgenlandes 99, 227248.
Poebel, A. (1923), Grundzge der sumerischen Grammatik (Rostocker orientalis-
tische Studien, 1). Rostock: Selbstverlag des Verfassers.
Poebel, Arno (1931), The Sumerian Prefix Forms e- and i- in the Time of the Earlier Princes
of Laga (Assyriological Studies, 2). Chicago: University of Chicago Press.
Powell, M. (1987-90), Masse und Gewichte, Reallexikon der Assyriologie, Vol. 7,
pp. 457517.
Robson, E. (2014), Tracing networks of cuneiform scholarship with Oracc, GKAB,
and Google Earth, in M. T Rutz and M. M. Kersel, eds., Archaeologies of Text.
Archaeology, Technology, and Ethics (Joukowsky Institute Publication, 6).
Oxford and Philadelphia: Oxbow Books, 142163.
Rubio, G. (2007) Sumerian morphology, in A. S. Kaye, ed., Morphologies of Asia
and Africa, I-II. Winona Lake: Eisenbrauns, 13271379.
Sallaberger, W. (2004), Das Ende des Sumerischen. Tod und Nachleben einer
altmesopotamischen Sprache, in P. Schrijver and P.-A. Mumm, eds.,
Sprachtod und Sprachgeburt (Mnchner Forschungen zur historischen
Sprachwissenschaft, 2). Bremen: Hempen, 108140.
Sallaberger, W. (2005), bringen im Sumerischen. Lesung und Bedeutung von
de(DU) und tm(DU), in R. Rollinger, ed., Von Sumer bis Homer. Festschrift
fr Manfred Schretter zum 60. Geburtstag am 25. Februar 2004 (Alter Orient und
Altes Testament, 325). Mnster: Ugarit-Verlag, 557576.
267
REFERENCES
Sallaberger, W. (2011), Sumerian language use at Garana. On orthography,

grammar, and Akkado-Sumerian bilingualism, in D. Owen, ed., Garana
Studies (Cornell University Studies in Assyriology and Sumerology, 6).
Bethesda: CDL Press, 335372.
Schulze, W. and Sallaberger, W. (2007), Grammatische Relationen im Sumeri-
schen, Zeitschrift fr Assyriologie 97, 163214s.
Sjberg, . W. et al. (19841998), The Sumerian Dictionary of the University Museum
of the University of Pennsylvania, vol. I: A, 1-3; II: B. Philadelphia, Babylonian
Section of the University Museum.
Smith, E. J. M. (2007), [-ATR] harmony and the vowel inventory of Sumerian,
Journal of Cuneiform Studies 59, 1937.
Svegjrt, Sz. (2011), The Sumerian equative case: astudy of its constructions,
Kubaba 2, 2739.
Steinkeller, P. (1979), Notes on Sumerian plural verbs, Orientalia NS 48, 54-67.
Streck, M. P. (1998), The tense systems in the Sumerian-Akkadian linguistic
area, Acta Sumerologica 20, 181199.
Tanos, B. (2012), Nominal and Verbal Plurality in Sumerian: A Morphosemantic
Approach. PhD Dissertation. L. Etvs University, Budapest
Tanos, B. (2014), The semantics of verbal plurality in Sumerian, in Z. Csabai,
ed., Studies in Economic and Social History of the Ancient Near East in Memory of
Pter Vargyas (Ancient Near Eastern and Mediterranean Studies, 2). Pcs
Budapest: Department of History, University of Pcs LHarmattan, 355391.
Tanos, B. (2015), A sumer sszetett igk mint idimk, in T. Bcs, et al. eds.,
Aegyptiaca et Assyriaca. Tanulmnyok az Etvs Lornd Tudomnyegyetem
kortudomnyi Intzetbl (Antiqua et Orientalia, 5). Budapest: ELTE Etvs
Kiad, 229244.
Thomsen, M.-L. (1984), The Sumerian Language. An Introduction to Its History and
Grammatical Structure (Mesopotamia, 10). Copenhagen: Akademisk Forlag.
Thomsen, M.-L. (2001), The Sumerian Language. An Introduction to Its History and
Grammatical Structure (Mesopotamia, 10). 3rd edition. Copenhagen: Akademisk
Forlag.
Volk, K. (2012), A Sumerian Chrestomathy (Subsidia et Instrumenta Linguarum
Orientis, 5). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz Verlag.
Waetzold, Hartmut (1992), Zur Bildung des Plurals beim sumerischen Verb, in
S. R. Anschtz, ed., Texte, Stze, Wrter und Moneme. Festschrift fr Klaus Heger
zum 65. Geburtstag. Heidelberg: Heidelberger Orientverlag, 635641.
Westenholz, Aage (2014), A Third Millennium Miscellany of Cuneiform Texts (Cornell
University Studies in Assyriology and Sumerology, 26). Bethesda, Maryland:
CDL Press.
268
REFERENCES
Wilcke, C. (1990), Orthographie, Grammatik und literarische Form. Beobachtun-

gen zu der Vaseninschrift Lugalzaggesis (SAKI 152156), in T. Abusch et al.,
eds., Lingering over Words. Studies in Ancient Near Eastern Literature in Honour
of William L. Moran (Harvard Semitic Studies, 37). Atlanta, Georgia: Scholars
Press, 488498.
Woods, C. (2000), Deixis, person, and case in Sumerian, Acta Sumerologica 22,
303334.
Woods, C. (2006), Bilingualism, scribal learning, and the death of Sumerian,
in S. L. Sanders, ed., Margins of Writing, Origins of Cultures (Oriental Institute
Seminars, 2). Chicago: The Oriental Institute of the University of Chicago,
91120.
Woods, C. (2008), The Grammar of Perspective. The Sumerian Conjugation Prefixes as
aSystem of Voice (Cuneiform Monographs, 32). Leiden and Boston: Brill.
Zlyomi, G. (1996), [Review of Attinger 1993], Bibliotheca Orientalis 53, I-II,
95107.
Zlyomi, G. (1996b), Genitive constructions in Sumerian, Journal of Cuneiform
Studies 48, pp. 3147.
Zlyomi, G. (1999), Directive infix and oblique object in Sumerian: An account
of the history of their relationship, Orientalia NS 68, 215253.
Zlyomi, G. (2005), Left-dislocated possessors in Sumerian, in K. . Kiss, ed.,
Universal Grammar in the Reconstruction of Ancient Languages (Studies in Gen-
erative Grammar, 83). Berlin New York: Mouton de Gruyter 2005, 161188.
Zlyomi, G. (2005b), Structural interference from Akkadian in Old Babylonian
Sumerian, Acta Sumerologica 22, 335360.
Zlyomi, G. (2007), Sumerisch, in M. Streck, ed., Schriften und Sprachen des Alten
Orients. 3rd, corrected edition. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesell-
schaft, 1143.
Zlyomi, G. (2007b), Variation in the multiword expression igi bar in the Old
Babylonian period, in J. Ebeling and G. Cunningham, eds., Analyzing Literary
Sumerian. Corpus based Approaches. London: Equinox, 316350.
Zlyomi, G. (2010), The case of the Sumerian cases, in Leonid Kogan et al. eds.
Proceedings of the 53e Rencontre Assyriologique Internationale, Vol. 1: Language
in the Ancient Near East (2 parts) (Babel und Bibel, 4A-B). Winona Lake,
IN: Eisenbrauns, 577590.
Zlyomi, G. (2013), The occurrence of some verbal prefixes in Sumerian. Ms.
(http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/downloads/Verbalprefixes.pdf)
Zlyomi, G. (2013b), The co-occurrences of the dimensional verbal prefixes in
Sumerian. Ms. (http://oracc.museum.upenn.edu/etcsri/downloads/Verbal
prefixes2.pdf)
269
REFERENCES
Zlyomi, G. (2014), The competition between the enclitics /a/ and /e/ in
Sumerian, in H. Neumann et al. eds., Krieg und Frieden im Alten Vorderasien
(AOAT 401). Mnster: Ugarit Verlag, 909919.
Zlyomi, G. (2014b), Some remarks on the oblique object in Jagersmas
Descriptive Sumerian Grammar, N.A.B.U., no. 2.
Zlyomi, G. (2014c), Copular Clauses and Focus Marking in Sumerian. Warsaw
Berlin: De Gruyter Open.
Zlyomi, G. (forthcoming), How to let someone swear an oath by abattle net
in Sumerian, in T. Bcs et al. (eds.), Across the Mediterranean Along the Nile.
Studies in Ancient Egypt, Nubia, and Late Antiquity Dedicated to Lszl
Trk on the Occasion of His 75th Birthday. Budapest.
270
SOLUTION KEY TO SELECTED EXERCISES
2.1
Sumerian voice aspiration emphatic
{b}, {d}, {g}

{p}, {t}, {k} +
Akkadian voice aspiration emphatic
{b}, {d}, {g} +

{p}, {t}, {k}
{}, {q} +
In Sumerian both series of stops were pronounced voiceless, their distinctive feature
being aspiration. Consequently, both series were heard as voiceless by Akkadian
native speakers. In Akkadian, all three series of stops were pronounced without
aspiration. Consequently, all three series were heard as sounds without aspiration
by Sumerian native speakers.
2.2
Sumerian words were stressed on the last syllable. In group a) of the Sumerian loan
words into Akkadian, the last consonant of the original Sumerian word becomes
geminated in Akkadian, making the penultimate syllable of the Akkadian word heavy.
The stress on the last syllable of the original Sumerian word may thus also be retained
in the Akkadian word. In group b) of the Sumerian loan words, the syllable structure of
the Akkadian word did not have to be adapted, as the loaned Sumerian words long last
vowel made the penultimate syllable heavy without any change.
2.3
a) {e} (TERM): al, pad
b) {mi} (VEN-3NH-LOC2/3): gi, gur, tud
c) {ne} (LOC13): al, tar
d) {i} (FIN): dim, tu, gi, sig
271
3.2
a) arad nin-a-na-ke
arad nin=ane=ak=e
servant lady=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=ERG
b) iri-ne
iri=ane=e
city=3.SG.H.POSS=ERG
c) nin diir-re-e-ne
nin diir=en=ak=
lady god=PL=GEN=ABS
d) lugal-u
lugal=u=e
king=1.SG.POSS=ERG
e) nam-til e-a-ne-ne
namtil e=anen=ak=
life brother=3.PL.POSS=ABS
f) ni u-a
ni u=u=ak=
thing hand=1.SG.POSS=GEN=ABS
g) arad-zu
arad=zu=
servant=2.SG.POSS=ABS
h) inim diir-re-ne
inim diir=en=ak=
word god=PL=GEN=ABS
i) e iri nam-lugal-a-ka
e iri namlugal=u=ak=ak=
house city kingship=1.SG.POSS=GEN=GEN=ABS
j) dumu ensi lagaki-ka-ke

dumu ensik laga=ak=ak=e
child ruler GN=GEN=GEN=ERG
k) ama diir-re-ne-ke
ama diir=en=ak=e
mother god=PL=GEN=ERG
272
l) lugal an-ub-da limmu-ba-ke

lugal anubda limmu=be=ak=e
king quarter 4=3.SG.NH.POSS=GEN=ERG
m) diir-u-gen
diir=u=gen
god=1.SG.POSS=EQU
n) u ma-ne
u ma-=ane=
hand mighty-TL=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS
o) mu-be
mu=be=
name=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS
p) dumu diir-ra-ne-ne-ne-ke-ne
dumu diir=anen=en=ak=en=e
child god=3.PL.POSS=PL=GEN=PL=ERG
q) e-ne-ne
e=anen=
house=3.PL.POSS=ABS
r) diir-re-ne
diir=en=e
god=PL=ERG
s) bad gal-be
bad gal-=be=
wall great=TL=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS
t) lugal-ne
lugal=ane=ra
king=3.SG.NH.POSS=DAT.H
3.3
a) P1lugalazida P1arad P3[P1lugalkigal=P5ak]=P5
P1 PN P1slave P3[P1PN=P5GEN]=P5ABS
Lugal-azida, the slave of Lugal-kigal
b) P1namlugal P3[P1ki=P5ak]=P5
P1kingship P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P5ABS
the kingship of Kish
273
c) P1biluda P3[P1diir=P4en=P5ak]=P5e
P1rite P3[P1god=P4PL=P5GEN]=P5L3.NH
the rites of the gods
d) P1diir P2galgal- P3[P1laga=P5ak]=P4en=P5e
P1 god P2 big~PL- TL P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ERG
the great gods of Lagash
e) P1e=P3u=P5
P1e=P31.SG.POSS=P5ABS
my temple
f) P1namtil=P3ane=P5
P1life=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
his life
g) P1kisura P3[P1ninirsuk=P5ak]=P5e
P1border P3[P1DN=P5GEN]=P5L3.NH
to Ningirsus border
h) P1en P3[P1aratta=P5ak]=P5e
P1lord P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P5ERG
the lord of Aratta
i) P1zapag=P3zu=P5
P1cry=P32.SG.POSS=P5ABS
your cry
j) P1nu P2girin-=P5a
P1 bed P2pure-TL=P5L2.NH
onto the flowery bed
k) P1a P2dug-=P5
P1 water P2sweet-TL=P5ABS
sweet water
l) P1mesalim P1lugal P3ki=P5ak=P5e
P1 PN P1king P3GN=P5GEN=P5ERG
Mesalim, king of Kish
274
3.4
a) 1. The doctor of his brothers
2. The doctors of his brother
b) 1. The old donkey of my brother
2. The donkey of my old brother
3.5
a) the plural-marker is not used with non-human nouns
b) it should be: P1azu P2zid- P3[P1lugal=P5ak]=P4en=P5
c) the case-marker is missing at the end of the noun phrase
d) the case-marker is missing at the end of the noun phrase
e) the plural-marker is not used with non-human nouns
f)
g) it should be: P1geme P2libir- P3[P1damgar=P5ak]=P5
4.4
a) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal=P5ak]=P4en=P5
P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
b) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal P2ma-=P5ak]=P4en=P5

P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king P2mighty-TL=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
c) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal P2ma-=P4en=P5ak]=P4en=P5

P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king P2mighty-TL=P4PL=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
d) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal P2ma- P3[P1kur=P5ak]=P5ak]=P4en=P5

P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king P2mighty-TL P3[P1land=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
e) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal P2ma- P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]=P5ak]=P4en=P5

P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king P2mighty-TL P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
f) P1dumu P2zid- P3[P1lugal P2ma- P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]=P4en=P5ak]=P4en=P5

P1child P2true-TL P3[P1king P2mighty-TL P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
g) P1sipad P3[P1ane=P3ane=P5ak]=P5
P1shepherd P3[P1donkey=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
h) P1sipad P3[P1ane P3[P1ama=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5

P1shepherd P3[P1donkey P3[P1mother=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
i) P1sipad P3[P1ane P3[P1ama P2sag-a=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5

P1shepherd P3[P1donkey P3[P1mother P2kind-PT=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
j) P1sipad P3[P1ane P2zid- P3[P1ama P2sag-a=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5

P1shepherd P3[P1donkey P2healthy-TL P3[P1mother P2kind-PT=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
275
k) P1ama P3[P1sipad P2[P1ane=P5ak]=P3ane=P5ak]=P5

P1mother P3[P1shepherd P2[P1donkey=P5GEN]=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
l) P1ama P3[P1sipad P2[P1ane=P5ak] P2zid-=P3ane=P5ak]=P5

P1mother [
P3 P1shepherd P2[P1donkey=P5GEN] P2reliable-TL=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
m) P1ama P2sag-a P3[P1sipad P2[P1ane=P5ak] P2zid-=P3ane=P5ak]=P5

P1mother P2kind-PT [
P3 P1shepherd [
P2 P1donkey= P5GEN] P2reliable-TL=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=
P5ABS
4.5
a) P1dubsar P3[P1lugal=P5ak]=P5
P1scribe P3[P1king=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1lugal=P5ak P1dubsar=P3ane=P5
P1king=P5GEN P1scribe=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
b) P1dumu P3[P1dam=P3u=P5ak]=P4en=P5
P1child P3[P1spouse=P31.S.G.POSS=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ABS
P1 dam=P3 u= P5ak P1dumu=P3ane=P4en=P5
P1spouse=P31.S.G.POSS=P5GEN P1child=P33.SG.H.POSS=P4PL=P5ABS
c) P1arad P3[P1e P3[P1abba=P3u=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5

P1 servant [
P3 P1 house P3[P1father=P31.SG.POSS=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1e P3[P1abba=P3u=P5ak]=P5ak P1arad=P3be=P5
P1 house [
P3 P1 father=P3 1. SG .POSS =P5 GEN ]=P5GEN P1servant=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5ABS
d) P1arad P3[P1e P3[P1abba=P3u=P5ak]=P5ak]=P5

P1servant P3[P1house P3[P1father=P31.SG.POSS=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1abba=P3u=P5ak P1arad P3[P1e=P3ane=P5ak]=P5
P1father=P31.SG.POSS=P5GEN P1servant P3[P1house=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
e) P1kisal P3[P1lugal=P3u=P5ak]=P5
P1 courtyard P3[P1king=P31.S.G.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1lugal=P3u=P5ak P1kisal=P3ane=P5
P1 king=P3 1. S .G .POSS =P5 GEN P1courtyard=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
f) P1lugal P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]=P5
P1king P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1 kur~kur= P5ak P1lugal=P3be=P5
P1 land~PL=P5GEN P1king=P33.SG.N.H.POSS=P5ABS
276
g) P1ane P3[P1ursa=P5ak]=P5
P1donkey P3[P1hero=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1ursa=P5ak P1ane=P3ane=P5
P1hero=P5GEN P1donkey=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
h) P1abba P3[P1diir~digir=P4en=P5ak]=P5
P1father P3[P1god~PL=P4PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1diir~digir=P4en=P5ak P1abba=P3anen=P5
P1god~PL=P4PL=P5GEN P1father=P33.PL.POSS=P5ABS
i) P1namtil P3[P1e=P3u=P4en=P5ak]=P5
P1life P3[P1brother=P31.SG.POSS=P4PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1e=P3u=P4en=P5ak P1namtil P3anen=P5
P1brother=P31.SG.POSS=P4PL=P5GEN P1life=P33.PL.POSS=P5ABS
j) P1tug P3[P1sipad=P5ak]=P5
P1garment P3[P1shepherd=P5GEN]=P5ABS
P1sipad=P5ak P1tug=P3ane=P5
P1shepherd=P5GEN P1garment=P33.SG.H.POSS=P5ABS
4.6
The sentences b), e), i). Look for anoun phrase whose last case-marker is the genitive.
4.7
P1barag P3[P1enlil=P5ak]=P5a P1barag P3[P1utu=P5ak]=P5a
P1 dais [
P3 P1 DN= P5 GEN ]=P5 L 2. NH P1 dais P3[P1DN=P5GEN]=P5L2.NH
[P1barag~barag P3[P1kiengir=P5ak] P1ensik P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]=P5
[P1dais~PL P3[P1GN=P5GEN] P1ruler P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
or
P1barag~barag P3[P1kiengir=P5ak]=P5 P1ensik P3[P1kur~kur=P5ak]=P5
P1dais~PL P3[P1GN=P5GEN]=P5ABS P1ruler P3[P1land~PL=P5GEN]=P5ABS
[P1dumu P3[P1unug=P5ak] P1dumu P3[P1larsam=P5ak] P1dumu P3[P1patibira=P5ak]]=P5ak

[P1child P3[P1GN=P5GEN] P1child P3[P1GN=P5GEN] P1child P3[P1GN=P5GEN]]=P5GEN
4.8
P1sipad P2[P1udu P2[P1siki=P5ak]=P5ak]=P4en=P5e
P1 shepherd [
P2 P1 sheep P2[P1wool=P5GEN]=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5ERG
277
4.9 Some possible solutions:

a) P1lugal P2ma-=P4en=P5e
P1king P2mighty-TL=P4PL=P5ERG
b) P1diir P2ma- P3[P1e=P3u=P5ak]=P4en=P5ak

P1god P2mighty-TL P3[P1temple=P31.SG.POSS=P5GEN]=P4PL=P5GEN
c) P1ama P3[P1iri=P5ak]=P5
P1mother P3[P1city=P5GEN]=P5ABS
d) P1sipad P2[P1ane=P5ak]=P3u=P5
P1shepherd P2[P1donkey=P5GEN]=P31.SG.POSS=P5ABS
e) erroneous
f) P1e=P5ak P1iri=P3be=P5
P1temple=P5GEN P1city=P33.SG.NH.POSS=P5ABS
g) P1dumu=P4en=P5ak P1lugal=P3anen=P5e
P1child=P4PL=P5GEN P1king=P33.PL=P5ERG
h) P1enlil=P5ak P1lu P3[P1ag=P3ane=P5ak]=P5

P1DN=P5GEN P1man P3[P1heart=P33.PL.POSS=P5GEN]=P5ABS
5.3
a) mu dumu-ne 3-am ba-gub-ba-e
mu S[dumu=ane=] PC [3=]=am- S5ba-S12gub-S14-S15a=ak=e
name S[child=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS] PC[3=ABS]=COP-3.SG.S MID-stand-3.SG.S-SUB=GEN=TERM
b) a-ba-am ema bi2-in-du8
2
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S boat=L3.NH 3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-caulk-3.SG.P
c) za-gen a-ba an-ga-kalag
za=gen aba= S2a-S3nga-S12kalag-S14
2.SG.PR=EQU who=ABS FIN-COOR-strong-3.SG.S
a-ba an-ga-an-da-sa2
aba= S2a-S3nga-S6n-S8da-S12sa-S14
who=ABS FIN-COOR-3.SG.H-COM-equal-3SG.S
d) amar-e a-ba-am ba-an-tum

amar=e= aba==am- S5ba-S11n-S12tum-S14
calf=DEM=ABS who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S MID-3.SG.H.A-lead-3.SG.P
278
e) a-ba-am za-e-me-en
aba==am- ze==me-en
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
5.4
a) 5 gi kug-sig-am,
5 gi kugsig==am-
5 unit gold=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
b) ensi iri 2-na-ke
ensik iri 2=ak=e
ruler city 2=GEN=ERG
c) e-e or e-be
e=e= e=be=
house=DEM=ABS house=DEM=ABS
d) eg-ba
eg=be=ak
canal=DEM=GEN
e) ag iri ni-te-ne-ne-ka,
ag iri nite=anen=ak=a
heart city self=3.PL.POSS=GEN=L1
f) me-a
me=a
wh=L1
g) a-na-a
ana=e
what=TERM
h) kug-babbar na-me nu-mu-da-a-tuku
kugbabbar name= nu-mu--da-e-tuku-
silver some=ABS NEG-VEN-1.SG-COM-2.SG.A-have-3.SG.P
i) a-ba-am lu-ne-e
aba==am- lu=n=
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S person=DEM=ABS
279
k) e ama-na ul-la-be
e ama=ane=ak= ul-a=be
house mother=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=ABS hurry-PT=3.SG.NH.POSS
mu-du
mu-n-du-
ven-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
l) dumu lugal-la 3-am3
dumu lugal=ak= 3==am-
child king=GEN=ABS 3=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
m) e 3-kam-ma-ka
e 3-kamak=a
house 3-ORD=L1
6.3
a) S4 VEN- S6 IPP-S8 COM- S12 STEM-S14 pronominal suffix (composite comitative)
b) S1MOD-S2FIN-S6IPP-S7DAT-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite dative)
c) S4VEN-S6IPP-S7DAT-S9ABL-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite dative, simple
ablative)
d) S2 FIN- S6IPP-S8COM-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite comitative)
e) S2FIN-S10L1-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (simple locative1)
f) S5MID-S9TERM-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (simple terminative)
g) S4VEN-S6IPP-S7DAT-S10L1-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite dative,
simple locative1)
h) S2FIN-S6IPP-S7DAT-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite dative)
i) S1MOD-S4VEN-S6IPP-S8COM-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite
comitative)
j) S4 VEN- S10L1-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (simple locative1)
k) S4VEN-S6IPP-S9TERM-S11FPP-S12STEM-S14pronominal suffix (composite terminative)
6.4
a) S2FIN-S4VEN-S53.SG.NH-S7DAT-S12give-S143.SG.A
She will give it to it.
b) S4VEN-S63.SG.H-S7DAT-S113.SG.NH.P-S12speak.PF-S143.SG.A
He says to him: .
c) S1ANT-S4VEN-S53.SG.NH-S7DAT-S113.SG.NH.A-S12give-S143.SG.P
After she had given to it, .
280
d) S2FIN-S53.SG.NH-S9ABL-S113.SG.H.A-S12place-S143.SG.P
She supplied them from it.
e) S4VEN-S63.SG.H-S7DAT-S10L1-S113.SG.H.A-S12build-S143.SG.P
He built it in it for her.
f) S1ANT-S4VEN-S63.SG.H-S7DAT-S8COM-S10L1-S12enter-S142.SG.S
After you had entered to her into it with them.
6.5
S2na-S11n-S12sa~sa-S14en
Do not buy her!
S1a-S2i-S12til-S14
May it come to an end!
S1u-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S10n-S12kur-S14en
After you had entered to her into it with them, .
S2a-S5b-S9ta-S11n-S12gu-S14-S15a
From which he consumed it.
S1u-S6nn-S10i-S11n-S12u-S14
After he had thrown it on him, ....
S2i-S3nga-S11n-S12sig-S14
He also demolished it.
S2i-S6nn-S9i-S11n-S12sa-S14
He bought her from them (lit. bartered for them).
S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S8da-S12ug-S14e
They stepped forward to him with .
S1u-S11n-S12taka-S14
After he left her, .
S2nan-S12kuu-S13ed-S14
It cannot be tired.
8.3
a) iriki-ba, du-dsuen, diir-be-em
iri=be=ak usuen= diir=be==am-

city=3.SG.NH.POSS=GEN PN=ABS god=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
Of their town, Shu-Suen is its protective god.
281
b) da-du makim-be-em
dadu= makim=be==am-
PN=ABS commissioner=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
Dadu was its commissioner.
c) dnin-lil-lai-li ag-ga-na-me-en
ninlil=ak ili ag=ane=ak==me-en
DN=GEN delight heart=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
As for Ninlil, you are the delight of her heart.
d) en za-e-me-en lugal za-e-me-en
en= ze==me-en lugal= ze==me-en
lord=ABS 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S king=ABS 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
The lord is you, the king is you.
e) mer-ra-ga-i-ir,
dumu nibruki-kam,
erragair= dumu nibru=ak==am-
PN=ABS child GN=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
ursaga=ra a-mu-nn-a-n-um-e
PN=DAT.H MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.P-give-3.SG.A
May he hand over Erra-gashir, (who is) acitizen of Nippur, to Ursaga!
f) sipad-me e mu-du
sipad==me-en e= mu--du-
shepherd=ABS=COP-1.SG.S house=ABS VEN-1.SG.A-build-3.SG.P
I, the shepherd, have built the temple.
g) dutu-am an-ag-ge im-si
utu=am anag=e i-m-b-si-
DN=STM heaven=L3.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH.L3-fill-3.SG.S
It fills the midst of the heavens like the god Utu.
h) eme zid-dam kurun kug mu-un-il
me zid-=am kurun kug-= mu-n-il-
tree true-TL=STM fruit holy-TL=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P
He bears holy fruits like atrue mesh-tree.
i) ab-ba-kal-la ur-me-ra e-e-me
abbakala= urme=ra e==me-en
PN=ABS PN=DAT.H 1.SG.PR=ABS=COP-1.SG.S
a-na-um
a-nn-a--um-
MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-1.SG.A-give-3.SG.P
It is me who gave Abba-kala to Ur-mesh!
282
8.4
a) ud=be=a gudea= ensik laga=ak==am-
day=DEM=L1 PN=ABS ruler GN=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
b) ninirsuk=ak ensik= lu ag=ane=ak==am-
DN=GEN ruler=ABS person heart=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
c) lugal==me-en e gal- diir ma-=u=en=ak=
king=ABS=COP-1.SG.S house great-TL god mighty-TL=1.SG.POSS=PL=GEN=ABS
mu--du-
VEN-1.SG.A-build-3.SG.P
d) aba==am- ze=-me-en
who=ABS=COP-3.SG.S 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
e) ninirsuk= diir ma- gudea ensik laga=ak=ak==am-
DN=ABS god mighty-TL PN ruler GN=GEN=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
f) ensik laga=ak= ze=-me-en
ruler GN=GEN=ABS 2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S
g) dikud lugal=ak 7=be==me-e
judge king=GEN 7=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.PL.S
h) sag-a==am-
kind-PT=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
i) dam=u= nu
spouse=1.SG.POSS=ABS NEG
j) lugal urim=ak= nu-i-me-en
king GN=GEN=ABS NEG-FIN-COP-2.SG.S
k) lugal urim=ak= nu
king GN=GEN=ABS NEG
l) dumu urim=ak= nu-i-nga-me-e
child GN=GEN=ABS NEG-FIN-COOR-COP-3.PL.S
m) e=ane=ak ningirsuk= diir=be==am-
house=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN DN=ABS god=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
n) ane=am kugsig= mu-n-il-
donkey=STM gold=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-bear-3.SG.P
283
8.5
For an analysis of this passage, see Zlyomi 2014c: 5254 (the open access book is
available at http://www.degruyter.com/view/product/447760).
9.3
a) mu-ni-n-ak-
VEN-L1-3.SG.H.A-act-3.SG.P
b) mu-r-a-n/b-mu-
VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.H.A/3.SG.NH.A-grow-3.SG.P
c) i-nn-i-b-gi~gi-
FIN-3.SG.H-L2-3.SG.NH.P-return~PF-3.SG.A
or
i-n-(i>)-gi~gi-
FIN-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-return~PF-3.SG.A
d) mu-r-a-n-du-
VEN-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.H.A-build-3.SG.P
e) m-a-b-um-e
VEN-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A
g) ba-ni-b-gin-en
MID-L1-3.SG.NH.P-confirm-3.PL.A
or
ba-n-gin-en
MID-L1.SYN-confirm-3.PL.A
h) b-i-b-a~a-en
3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-place~PF-3.PL.A
or
i-b-(i>)-a~a-en
FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-place~PF-3.PL.A
i) gu= m-a-n-sig-e
neck=ABS VEN-DAT-3.SG.H.A-fil-3.PL
j) mu-nn-a-b-dim-e
VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-create-3.SG.A
k) sizkur= mu-nn-a-n-dug-
prayer=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-speak-3.SG.P
284
10.5
a) kug atumdug=ra mu-nn-a-ere-e
holy DN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-go.PL-3.PL.S
b) umma=a ki=u=a i-b-(i>)-tu-

GN=L2.NH place=1.SG.POSS=L2.NH FIN-3.SG.NH-L2.SYN-sit-3.SG.S
c) ensik=be=en= mu-n-ug-
ruler=3.SG.NH.POSS=PL=ABS VEN-3.SG.H.A-die.PL-3.SG.P
d) gud=be= nu-mu-n-da-n-la-
ox=DEM=ABSNEG-VEN-3.SG.H-COM-3.SG.H.A-bring.PL-3.SG.P
e) lugalke=da i-n-da-til-
PN=COM FIN-3.SG.H-COM-live-3.SG.S
f) nagsu=e hazanum=e mu-nn-a-n-tum-

GN=TERM mayor=ERG VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-bring-3.SG.P
g) inim=be=a a-mu--da-n-sug-e
word=DEM=L1 MOD-VEN-1.SG-COM-L1.SYN-stand.PL-3.PL.S
h) en ninirsuk=ra mu-nn-a-da-gub-
lord DN=DAT.H VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-COM-stand-3.SG.S
10.7
mdnin-mug-an-dul, arad mug-ge-[si], mur-dnin-mug
ninmugandul arad mugesi=ak urninmugak
PN servant PN=GEN PN
dumu mug-ge-si, e-ma-a e-se-am
dumu mugesi=ak= ema=a S2i-S10n-S12se-S14e?-S15a==am-23
child PN=GEN=ABS prison=L1 FIN-L1.SYN-live.PL=3.PL.S?-SUB=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
nin-tur ama mug-ge-si-ke ba-la-e
nintur ama mugesi=ak=e S5ba-S12la-S14e
PN mother PN=GEN=ERG MID-bring.PL-3.SG.A
ur-dnin-tu sagi-ma, makim-be

urninturak sagima= makim=be==am-
PN chief.cupbearer=ABS commissioner=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
23 See Zlyomi 2014c: 154169 (esp. ex. 349 on p. 157) for similar constructions, in which the
enclitic copula is attached to asubordinate clause.
285
It was (the case) that Ninmug-andul, the servant of Mugesi (and) Ur-Ninmuga, son of
Mugesi, were detained (lit. lived in aprison). Nintur, the mother of Mugesi, will take
them out. Ur-Nintura, the chief cupbearer was its (= the legal cases) commissioner.24
11.3
a) enmerkar=ra etug= i-m-ba-nn-a-um-
PN=DAT.H ear=ABS FIN-VEN-mid-3.SG.H-DAT-give-3.SG.S
b) ag iri=ane=ak=a a-ba-n-gaz-
heart city=3.SG.H.POSS=GEN=L1 MOD-MID-L1.SYN-kill-3.SG.S
c) saugal=ane= u-ba-n-(i>)-u-
battle.net=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS ANT-MID-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-cover-3.SG.S
d)
e) e= i-m-ba-r-a-du-ed-
house=ABS FIN-VEN-MID-2.SG-DAT-build-PF-3.SG.S
f) e= i-m-ba-du-
house FIN-VEN-MID-3.SG.S
g)
11.5
The two verbal forms differ only in the grammatical gender of the participant in the
dative. This results in adifferent allomorph of the ventive prefix (/mu/ vs. /m/); and
the latter allomorph of the ventive in turn requires the presence of the finite-marker.
12.3
In the first example the personal name ends with aclosed syllable, the form of the
comitative enclitic is therefore =/da/. In the second example the personal name ends
in avowel, the form of the comitative enclitic is therefore =/d/, the short /a/ drops.
The writing of this =/d/ would require aVC sign, AD, which is not used.
24 Westenholzs (2014: 131) commentary to this text is worth quoting: I assume that Ninmug-
andul and Ur-Ninmug had gone out on abinge, made some mischief, and were detained; and
it took the venerable grandmother to take them out.
286
15.3
imedagan lugal kengir kiuri=ak=e ud ninurta
PN king GN GN=GEN=ERG day DN
ursa kalag=ane= makim=e mu-n-tuku-S14-S15a=a
hero strong=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS deputy=TERM VEN-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=L1
u ar-=e
people numerous-TL=ERG
us zid-= a-i-b-dab-e
path right-TL=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.NH.P-take-3.SG.A
gud i udu i= e=e i-b-dab-
ox fat sheep fat=ABS temple=ERG FIN-3.SG.NH.A-receive-3.SG.P
15.4
a) ninirsuk=e
DN=ERG
lu inim=ak sa sa-a=ak=e mu-nn-a-ta-n-e-
man word=GEN head buy-PT=GEN=TERM VEN-3.PL-DAT-ABL-3.SG.H.A-leave-3.SG.P
b) ninirsuk=e ensik=ra e= mu-nn-i-n-du-
DN=ERG ruler=L3.H house VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A.-build-3.SG.P
c) ninirsuk=e e=da lugal= S2i-m-b-da-n-ul-
DN=ERG house=COM owner=ABS FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-COM-3.SG.H.A-rejoice-3.SG.P
d) ninirsuk=e e=e i-m-b-a-n-en-

DN=ERG house=DAT.NH FIN-VEN-3.SG.NH-DAT-3.SG.H.A-go-3.SG.P
e) ninirsuk=e amarsuenak lugal=ra urbilum= mu-nn-i-n-ul-
DN=ERG PN king=L3.H GN=ABS VEN-3.SG.H-L3-3.SG.H.A-raid-3.SG.P
f) ninirsuk=e umma=a ki=u=a b-i-n-durun-

DN=ERG GN=L2.NH place=1.SG.POSS=L2.NH 3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.H.A-sit.PL-3.SG.P
15.5
The example demonstrates the phenomenon called external possession. The word dnin-
hur-sa is in the human locative2. It is cross-referenced by acomposite locative2 prefix
in the verbal prefix-chain. Ninhursag is the inalienable semantic possessor of the word
dub knee in the clause. It is, however, not in P3 of the noun phrase whose head is
dub knee. It is aseparate constituent and occupies asentence-initial position; P3 of
dub knee is filled by aresumptive pronominal enclitic that agrees in person, gender,
287
and number with the possessor (=ane : 3.SG.H.POSS). Both the semantic possessor (dnin-
hur-sa) and the inalienable possessum (dub) are in the locative2 case. The composite
locative2 prefix of the verbal form shows agreement with the human possessor, not
with the possessum.
15.6
The dative prefix apparently precedes the 3rd ps. sg. IPP. The example may indicate
that the pronominal use of the ventive developed progressively.
16.3
The negative equivalent of acopular clause with a3rd ps. sg. S and an enclitic copula is
negated solely with the negative particle /nu/- and the negative clause contains no
copula. The first example is in the 1st ps. sg., so it has to be negated with anegated
form of the independent copula.
16.4
Before the syllable /ba/- the prefixed negative particle /nu/- changes to /la/-.
16.5
The modal prefix /a/- has adeontic meaning expressing awish. The verbal form is
intransitive, S11 contains no FPP. Consequently, the composite 3rd. ps. sg. non-human
locative2 prefix becomes syncopated. Intransitive and stative verbs prefixed with /a/-
always use the preterite tense in whatever function, epistemic or deontic, the prefix is
used.
16.6
a) iri mete-na, u na-na-zi-zi
iri nite=ane=a u= S2nan-S6nn-S7a-S10n-S12zi~zi-S13ed-S14
city self=3.SG.H.POSS=L1 hand=ABS MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-L1.SYN-rise-PF-3.SG.S
May there be no revolt against him in his own city!:
b) arza-a mul an kug-ba
gu ba-ra-mu-ra-a-de-e
gu= S2bara-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S10e-S12de-S14en
voice=ABS MOD-VEN-2.SG-DAT-L2-pour-1.SG.A
I will not tell you the pure stars of heaven indicating my regulations!
288
c) gud-gen, ud-ne-na na-an-gaz-e

gud=gen ud=nn=a S2nan-S12gaz-S13ed-S14
ox=EQU day=DEM=L1 MOD-kill-PF-3.SG.S
He should not be slaughtered like an ox on the very day!
d) urimki-e gil-sa-a, ba-ra-mi-ak
urim=e gilsa=e S2bara-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11n-S12ak-S14
GN=L3.NH treasure=ADV MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH-L3-3.SG.H.A-act-3.SG.P
He certainly did not donate (the drained swamp) to Urim for ever.
e) inim-ba nam-mu-da-gub-be
inim=be=a S2nan-S4mu-S6-S8da-S10n-S12gub-S13ed-S14
word=DEM=L1 MOD-VEN-1.SG-COM-L1.SYN-stand-PF-3.SG.S
May she not stand with me in this matter!
f) an-ta e-al ba-ra-mu-ra-ta-en
an=ta eal= S2bara-S4mu-S6r-S7a-S9ta-S12en-S14
Abundance certainly does not come down to you from heaven.
g) ni ki-en-gi-ra ba-a-gu-la
kur-ra ba-ra-am-mi-ib-gu-ul-le-en
kur=a S2bara-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gul-S14en
foreign.land=L2.NH MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-destroy-1.SG.A
Whatever has been destroyed in the homeland, I shall not destroy in the foreign
lands!
16.7
In the first clause of the first example the 1st ps. speaker expresses his intention to
duck down his head. His second clause is anegated imperative. In the first clause of the
second example, the speaker expresses epistemic certainty. His second clause is negated
epistemic certainty.
16.8
a) a-bu-bu, u-na-a-dug,
abubu=ra S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14
PN=DAT.H ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P
1(ban) ziz, lu-dikur-ra, a-mu-na-ab-um-mu,
1 ziz= luikur=ra S1a-S4mu-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
1 emmer=ABS PN=DAT.H MOD-VEN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A
289
kiib-ba-ne-ta, ga-ab-ta-tur
kiib=ane=ta S2ga-S5b-S9ta-S12tur
tablet=3.SG.H.POSS=ABL MOD-3.SG.NH-ABL-small
Please tell Habubu: He should give 10 litres of emmer wheat to Lu-Ishkur! I will
deduct it from his tablet.
b) ur-dara u-na-a-dug, 1/2(di) gi kug-babbar
urara=ra S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14 1/2 gi kugbabbar=
PN=DAT.H ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P 1/2 unit silver=ABS
e-zid-u, a-na-ab-um-mu
ezidu=ra S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
e-e u-en, ga-na-ab-um

e= u-
S1 S12 en-S14 S2ga-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um
1.SG.PR=ABS ANT-go-3.SG.S MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give
Please tell Ur-Shara: He should give half ashekel of silver to Ezidgu! I myself,
when he comes, will give it back to him!
c) lugal-gu-gal-ra, u-na-a-dug, 2(u) 2(a) gu gi-zi
lugalgugal=ra u-
S1 S6 nn- a- e-
S7 S11 S12 dug- S14 22 gu gizi=
PN=DAT.H ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P 22 unit reed=ABS
diir-sukkal-ra, e-na-ab-um-mu
diirsukkal=ra S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
na-mi-gur-re, a-ma-ru-kam
S2nan-S4m-S5b-S10i-S11b-S12gur-S14e amaru=ak==am-
MOD-VEN-3.SG.NH-L2-3.SG.NH.P-return-3.SG.A flood=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
a-ba e-u-ge
aba= e=u=gen
who=ABS brother=1.SG.POSS=EQU
Please tell Lugal-gugal: He should give 660 kilograms of fodder reed to Dingir-
sukkal! He should not bring this up again! It is urgent! Who is like my brother?
d) lu-dara, u-na-a-dug,
luarak=ra S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14
mur-dlamma, u ba-za, lu na-an-ba-du

urlamma u baza=ra lu= S2nan-S5ba-S6n-S10(i>)-S12du-S13ed-S14
PN and PN=L2.H person=ABS MOD-MID-3.SG.H-L2.SYN-hold-PF-3.SG.S
290
ze-e-me makim-a-ne, e-me

ze==me-en makim=ane= S1a-S2i-S12me-S14en
2.SG.PR=ABS=COP-2.SG.S deputy=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS MOD-FIN-COP-2.SG.S
Please tell Lu-Shara: No one should detain Ur-Lamma and Baza! It is you who
should be their (lit. his) bailiff!.
e) na-ne-ra, u-na-a-dug,
nane=ra S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14
msi-ar-kalam-ma, mur-me, dumu lugal-ka-gi-na-me-e

siarkalamak urme= dumu lugalkaginak==me-e
PN PN=ABS child PN=ABS=COP-3.PL.S
iri-se-ga e dnin-e-gal-ka ag mar-sa-me-e
irisega e ninegal=ak=ak ag marsa=ak-=me-e
servant house DN=GEN=GEN heart shipyard=GEN-ABS=COP-3.PL.S
na-an-ba-na-a-du
S2nan-S5ba-S6nn-S7a-S10e-S12du-S13ed-S14
MOD-MID-3.SG.H-DAT-L2-hold-PF-3.SG.S
Please tell Nane: No one should detain Sigar-kalama and Urmesh, the children
of Lugal-kagina, servants in the temple of Ninegal, shipyard assistants, because
of him!'"
f) lugal-ezen-ra, u-na-a-dug
lugalezen=ra S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14
PN ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P
amar-uba munu-mu, lu-dnin-ubur-ka-ra, lu i-e

amaruba munumu 25
luninuburakak =ra lu=e ie=
PN maltster PN=DAT.H person=ERG sesame.oil=ABS
na-ne-zi-zi, a-a saa-kam,
S2 nan-S6 nn- a-
S7 S12 zi~zi-S14 e aaa saa=ak==am-
MOD-3.PL-DAT-expend~PF-3.SG.A order chief=GEN=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
tukum-bi e nu-ra-tug-ga,
tukumbi e= S1nu-S6r-S7a-S11n-S12tuku-S14-S15a==am-
if wood=ABS NEG-2.SG-DAT-3.SG.H.A-have-3.SG.P-SUB=ABS-COP=3.SG.S
e-a-ne gul-a
e=ane= S1gul-S2a
house=3.SG.H.POSS=ABS destroy-FIN
291
Please tell Lugal-ezen: No one may issue sesame oil to Amar-shuba, the maltster,
and Lu-Ninshuburka. This is the order of the chief temple administrator! Should
anyone not heed you, destroy his house!
g) na-ne, u-na-a-dug, ma-gu-la-ra
nane=ra u-
S1 S6 nn- a- e-
S7 S11 S12 dug- S14 magula=ra
PN=DAT.H ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P PN=DAT.H
1(ge) e gur, um-mu-da, e-na-dug

60 e gur= um-ed=a S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11-S12dug-S14
60 barley unit=ABS give-PF=L2.NH MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-1.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P
a-na-a-am, nu-u-na-um
ana=e=am- S1nu-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11n-S12um-S14
what=TERM=COP-3.SG.S NEG-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.H.A-give-3.SG.P
e-na-ab-um-mu
S1a-S2i-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e
MOD-FIN-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A
inim-be na-ba-ab-gur-re
inim=be= S2nan-S5ba-S11b-S12gur-S14e
word=DEM=ABS MOD-VEN-MID-3.SG.NH.P-return-3.SG.A
Please tell Nane: I did tell him to give 18,000 liters of barley to Mash-gula! Why
did he not give it to him? He must give it to him! He should not bring up this issue
again!
16.9
me-sag-e na-be-a, al-la-u
mesag=e S2na-S11b-S12e-S14e-S15a= allau=ra
PN=ERG MOD-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A-SUB=ABS PN=DAT.H
u-na-dug, a-ag 4(bur) gana
u-
S1 S6 nn- a- e-
S7 S11 S12 dug- S14 aag 4 gana=
ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P field 4 field=ABS
a-ma-ab-um-mu arad-u-ne
S1a-S4m-S7a-S11b-S12um-S14e arad=u=en=e
MOD-VEN-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-give-3.SG.A servant=1.SG.POSS=PL=ERG
25 Cf., e.g., BM 106482 (P200719) obv. 8.
292
e-uru-ne
S1a-S2i-S12uru-S14en
MOD-FIN-plough-3.PL.A
ma-be da ga-na-ab-ri
ma=be= da=a? S2ga-S6nn-S7a-S11b-S12ri
?
goat=3.SG.NH.POSS=ABS side=L2.NH MOD-3.SG.H-DAT-3.SG.NH.P-place
Please tell Allagu, this is what Mesag says: He should give me aland with an
area of 4 bur, so that my servants can plough it. I will lead its goat (i.e. the goat
due because of renting the field) to him!
16.10
ur-dutu-ke, na-be-a, e-e-u
urutuk=e S2na-S11b-S12e-S14e-S15a= eeu=ra
PN=ERG MOD-3.SG.NH.P-speak.PF-3.SG.A-SUB=ABS PN=DAT.H
u-na-dug, [a]-ga-deki lugal-am

S1u-S6nn-S7a-S11e-S12dug-S14 agade= lugal==am-
ANT-3.SG.H-DAT-2.SG.A-speak-3.SG.P GN=ABS king=ABS=COP-3.SG.S
lu a-ga-deki na-ne-gaz-e
lu agade=ak= S2na-S11nn-S12gaz-S14e
person GN=GEN=ABS MOD-3.PL.P-kill-3.SG.A
ki ir-gi-gi-e lu e-gi-gi
ki irgigi=ak=e lu= S1a-S2i-S11n-S12gi~gi-S14e
place PN=GEN=TERM person=ABS MOD-FIN-3.SG.H.P-return~PF-3.SG.A
Please tell Sheshsheshgu, this is what Ur-Utu says: Agade is in control (of the
land) (lit. is the king); he should not kill the? people from Agade! He should
send amessenger to Irgigi!26
26 Probably the king of Agade himself.
293
----
----
ELTE Faculty of Humanities
AN INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR OF SUMERIAN

This textbook provides an introduction to the grammar of Sumerian, one
of the oldest documented languages in the world. It not only synthesizes AN INTRODUCTION
TO THE GRAMMAR
the results of recent scholarship but introduces original insights on many
important questions. The book is designed to appeal to readers of all back-
grounds, including those with no prior background in Sumerian or cunei-
of
form writing.
It is written for undergraduate students and structured for a semester-long
SUMERIAN
course: the order of the topics is determined by didactic considerations,
with the focus on syntactic analysis and evidence. It explains the function-
ing of Sumerian grammar in 16 lessons, illustrated with more than 500 fully
glossed examples. Each lesson ends with a series of tasks; a solution key to
selected exercises can be found at the end of the volume. Above all, this is
the first Sumerian textbook that introduces and utilizes the online assyrio-
logical resources available on the internet.
An Introduction to the Grammar of Sumerian has been written on the as-
sumption that after decades of grammatical research it has become possible
now to teach a general framework of Sumerian grammar that may function
as the basis of further, more intensive and elaborate studies.
a
a
Gbor Zlyomi
Gbor Zlyomi
ISBN 978 963 284 844 0
etvs UNIVERSITY PRESS

etvs lornd UNIVERSITY
----
----
zolyomi_borito_b.indd 1 2017.01.23. 9:03:31

An Introduction To The Grammar of Sumeri PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

An Introduction To The Grammar of Sumeri PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

An Introduction To The Grammar of Sumeri PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

What is the purpose and structure of the book?

What is the purpose and structure of the book?

What are some of the features of Sumerian writing and language discussed?

What are some of the features of Sumerian writing and language discussed?

----

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR OF SUMERIAN

ISBN 978 963 284 844 0

etvs UNIVERSITY PRESS

zolyomi_borito_b.indd 1 2017.01.23. 9:03:31

AN INTRODUCTION TO THE GRAMMAR

with the collaboration of

Supported by the Higher Education Restructuring Fund allocated to ELTE by

Language editor: Vera Benczik

Gbor Zlyomi, 2017

ISBN 978 963 284 844 0

Abbreviations in the morphemic glossings ..................................................................9

9.3 The present-future ..............................................................................................127

SOLUTION KEY TO SELECTED EXERCISES ........................................................................271

ABBREVIATIONS IN THE MORPHEMIC

~ reduplication MASC = masculine

A SHORT INDEX OF SUBJECTS

ablative case (S9) 13.1 locative1 case (S10) 14.2

With gratitude, I dedicate this book to Gza Komorczy,

Sumerian was spoken in the southern part of ancient Mesopotamia, an area

The first written documents, created most probably by Sumerian speaking

1 On split ergativity in Sumerian see Lesson 9, section 9.1 below.

1.2 Some features of the Sumerian

phonograms representing asequence of sounds.2 Many signs may be used either

The Sumerian writing system retained ahighly logographic character even

1.4 The SumerianAkkadian bilingualism

1.5 From cuneiform script to modern

The mixed logographic-phonographic writing system reflects the morpho-

first line represents the utterance in standard graphemic transliteration; the

1.6 The linguistic study of Sumerian

grammar of Sumerian (141314). Joachim Krechers teaching material, Zur

Further readings and resources

An essential paper on the context of the eme-sal sociolect of Sumerian is

The Official Inscriptions of the Middle East in Antiquity (= OIMEA,

Sumerian is an extinct language without any known relatives. The reconstruc-

2.1 The consonants

about the pronunciation of Sumerian is made and accepted, the transliteration

Table 2.1: The Sumerian consonants in the 3rd millennium BCE

STOPS AFFRICATES FRICATIVES APPROXIMANTS NASALS

2.2 Vowels and vowel harmonies

The assimilation of certain verbal prefixes containing the graphoneme {i} or

(2) DP 218 rev. 4:2 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220868)5

(4) En-metena 23 30 (RIME 1.9.5.23) (Lagash, 25th c.) (P222530)

(6) En-metena 1 2:8 (RIME 1.9.5.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001103)

5 Abbreviations follow the conventions of the Cuneiform Digital Library Initiative

(7) En-ana-tum I 5 4:8 (RIME 1.9.4.5) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001090)

(8) En-metena 1 6:8 (RIME 1.9.5.1) (Lagash, 25th c.) (Q001103)

(10) DP 103 rev. 2:1 (Lagash, 24th c.) (P220753)

the graphoneme {a}, e.g., ar to place, or ak to act, occur with alow

Table 2.3: Correspondences of verbal prefixes and verbal bases

PREFIX / STEM {i} {u} {e} {a}

Table 2.4: The assumed two classes of vowels in respect of height

PREFIX VERBAL STEM

Vowel harmony the agreement among vowels in successive syllables in

2.3 Syllable structure and stress